Alcatel BSS Parameter Dictionary

Alcatel-Lucent GSM
Telecom Parameters Dictionary
OMC Document
Reference Guide
Release B11
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

BLANK PAGE BREAK
Status RELEASED
Short title
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use
and communication of its contents not permitted without written
authorization from Alcatel.
2 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Contents
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1 Parameter Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.2 Parameter Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2 VGCS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3 LCS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4 IP Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5 GSM Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
5.3 System (CST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
6 GPRS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
6.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
6.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
7 E-GPRS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
7.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180
7.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183
8 DTM Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
8.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
9 2G-LTE Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
9.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
10 2G-3G Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
10.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
10.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 3 / 1278

Contents
4 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Preface
Preface
Purpose The BSS Parameter Dictionary lists all of the Telecom Parameters for GSM
and GPRS.
What’s New In Edition 09

This document was generated from the edition 18rl of the BSS Telecom
Parameters database.
In Edition 08
In Edition 07
In Edition 06
In Edition 05
In Edition 04
In Edition 03
In Edition 02
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 5 / 1278

Preface
In Edition 01
First official release of document.
Audience This manual is designed for OMC-R users, O&M technicians and system
designers.
Assumed Knowledge Not applicable.
6 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

1 Introduction
1 Introduction
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 7 / 1278

1 Introduction
1.1 Parameter Classification

The GSM and GPRS parameters are classified into three categories:
Network: customer dependent parameters, related to the network topology,
defined by the customer and valid for the complete network (e.g. BTS name,
Cell ID, LAC number ...). They can be adjusted by CDE scripts.
Site: adjustable parameters from one cell to the next or from one BSC to the
next. They are set to a default value. They can be adjusted from the OMC-R.
System: fixed parameters, i.e. BSS system mandatory rules or

automatically populated in the DLS skeleton and let unchanged because
not customer dependent. Some of them are coded in BTS Software and
configuration files.
1.2 Parameter Description

To each parameter are associated the following characteristics:
Logical Parameter Name: Mnemonic conventionally used in Alcatel
documentation.
Definition: definition/purpose of the parameter.

Coding rules:, Rules of coding, when necessary.
Mandatory rules: Mandatory relationships or inter-dependence of some

data.
Recommended rules: Recommended relationships or inter-dependence

of some data.
Feature: Indicates to which feature the parameter is linked.
Category: Category into which the parameter is classified.

Instance: Possible instance of the parameter.
Value
Min/Max values: Possible range of the parameter values.
Default value: Parameter value in release B9 for a generic configuration.
Modifiable: Indicates if the parameter is modifiable at the OMC-R.
Parameter Access: Indicates where the parameter is accessible at the

OMC-R.
External Comments: Specific information, when necessary, related

to the parameter.
8 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 9 / 1278

2.1 Site (CAE)

2.1.1 (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)) -
(CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)
Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)
Definition Level hysteresis for cell reselection applied when the new cell is in
a different location area.
Coding rules step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits (000 : 0 dB, 111 : 14 dB)
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Value Unit Minimum Maximum Default
dB 0 14 6
External Comment –
Cell Type Dependent No
Nb of TRX Dependent No
10 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.2 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) -
(CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET
Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(BSC)
Definition Permanent offset to C2 criterion.
Coding rules step size = 2dB; coded on 6 bits (000000:0 dB, 111111 : 126 dB)
Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS) =

CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (n)(BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 126 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 11 / 1278

2.1.3 (EN_INBAND_NOTIF) - (EN_INBAND_NOTIF)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_INBAND_NOTIF
Logical Name EN_INBAND_NOTIF
Definition Flag to disable/enable the in-band notification
Coding rules 0: disabled, 1:enabled
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
12 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.4 (EN_INBAND_PAGING) - (EN_INBAND_PAGING)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_INBAND_PAGING
Logical Name EN_INBAND_PAGING
Definition Flag to disable/enable the in-band paging
Coding rules 0: disabled, 1: enabled
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 13 / 1278

2.1.5 (EN_UPLINK_REPLY) - (EN_UPLINK_REPLY)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_UPLINK_REPLY
Logical Name EN_UPLINK_REPLY
Definition Flag to disable/enable the uplink reply procedure
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
14 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.6 (EN_VGCS) - (EN_VGCS)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_VGCS
Logical Name EN_VGCS
Definition Flag to disable/enable the VGCS in the cell
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules When the VGCS feature (EN_VGCS) is activated, it is recommended

to
- include the Response Request in the HANDOVER REQUIRED
message (RESP_REQ).
- to configure, at least, one TRX with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 in the
cell.
- to set EN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the value
of MIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 15 / 1278

2.1.7 (INBAND_PAGING_THR) - (INBAND_PAGING_THR)
Parameter Name HMI Name INBAND_PAGING_THR
Logical Name INBAND_PAGING_THR
Definition If the eMLPP priority included in the Paging message from the MSC
is higher than or equal to this parameter, then the BSS shall trigger
in-band paging within cells, that are identified to be paged from the
PAGING message, and that have existing VGC active.
Coding rules Coded over 3 bits

000 : deactivation of inband paging
001 : call priority level 4 (lowest priority)
010 : call priority level 3
110 : call priority level B
111 : call priority level A (highest priority)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 4
16 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.8 (MAX_VGCS_TS) - (MAX_VGCS_TS)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_VGCS_TS
Logical Name MAX_VGCS_TS
Definition Maximum number of radio timeslots that can be used by the VGCS
calls in the cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules MIN_VGCS_TS <= MAX_VGCS_TS

If EN_VGCS= enabled, then "(MAX_VGCS_TS + MAX_PDCH) <
Total number of TCHs of the cell".
If EN_VGCS= disabled, then" MAX_VGCS_TS = 0"
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 127 0
External Comment 127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH.

To support VGCS in a cell, it is mandatory to have Max_VGCS_TS
>0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 17 / 1278

2.1.9 (MIN_VGCS_TS) - (MIN_VGCS_TS)
Parameter Name HMI Name MIN_VGCS_TS
Logical Name MIN_VGCS_TS
Definition Minimum number of radio timeslots that are reserved for the VGCS
calls in the cell in normal situation (point-to-point CS call can NOT
use these timeslots).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules MIN_VGCS_TS <= MAX_VGCS_TS
Recommended rules - The following rules about the upper limit are recommended :
i) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) -
2 if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1:
CCCH combined"
ii) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) -
3 if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0:
CCCH not combined"
iii) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) -
1 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX.
- If EN_VGCS = enabled , then Alcatel recommends to set

EN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the value of
MIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 31 0
18 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.10 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(BSC)
Definition Maximum transmission power an MS is allowed to use when

accessing the cell until otherwise commanded, broadcast on PBCCH
for CS service establishment.
Coding rules P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.
GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39
dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.
DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm,
0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm 5 43 43
External Comment According to the 3GPP TS 05.05, if the BCCH frequency band is
P-GSM/G1, depending on the version of MS (Phase 1 MS or Phase
2/onwards MS), the coded value "0", "1" and "2" are interpreted
differently:
- Coded value "0": (interpreted as 43 dBm by the Phase 1 MS;
interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);
- Coded value "2": (interpreted as 39 dBm by both the Phase 1 MS
and the Phase 2/onwards MS).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 19 / 1278

2.1.11 (NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR) -
(NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR)
Parameter Name HMI Name NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR
Logical Name NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR
Definition If the eMLPP priority is higher than or equal to this parameter, the
Notifications message shall be sent on FACCH of all other on-going
VGCS call.

000 : deactivation of notification on FACCH of other on-going VGCS
calls
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
20 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.12 (NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR) -
(NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR)
Parameter Name HMI Name NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR
Logical Name NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR
Definition If the eMLPP priority is higher than or equal to this parameter, the
Notifications message shall be sent on FACCH of all on-going point
to point call whose MS is VGCS capable.

000 : deactivation of notification on FACCH of all on going point to
point calls in the cell
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 21 / 1278

2.1.13 (NOTIF_PCH_THR) - (NOTIF_PCH_THR)
Parameter Name HMI Name NOTIF_PCH_THR
Logical Name NOTIF_PCH_THR
Definition The priority threshold for notification over PCH.

The BSS shall consider, for Notification/PCH, only VGCS-Calls which
have a priority (eMLPP priority) not below this parameter. If more
than one is selected, all these voice group calls shall be notified on
PCH and all with the same frequency of occurrence.

000 : deactivation of notification on PCH in the cell
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
22 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.14 (NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS) - (NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS)
Parameter Name HMI Name NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
Logical Name NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
Definition This parameter defines the maximum number of blocks usable for
NCH.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules if EN_VGCS is enabled :

- BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
- if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 7 2
External Comment The parameter is significant when EN_VGCS is enabled
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 23 / 1278

2.1.15 (NY2) - (NY2)
Parameter Name HMI Name NY2
Logical Name NY2
Definition Maximum number of repetitions for the VGCS UPLINK GRANT

message during an uplink access procedure
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 7 3
24 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.16 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(n)(BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name PENALTY_TIME
Logical Name PENALTY_TIME(n)(BSC)
Definition Time during which MS shall apply TEMPORARY_OFFSET to C2

criterion.
Coding rules step size = 20s. 0: 20s, 1: 40s, ..., 30: 620s, 31: TEMPORARY
OFFSET ignored and cell_RESELECT_OFFSET has a negative
value
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
sec 20 620 20
Cell Type Dependent Single inhibited (31)
Umbrella inhibited (31)
Concentric inhibited (31)
Concentric Umbrella inhibited (31)
Microcell 20 s (0)
Minicell 20 s (0)
Extended inner cell inhibited (31)
Extended outer cell inhibited (31)
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 25 / 1278

2.1.17 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Logical Name RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC)
Definition Minimum received level at the MS required for initial access to the
cell.
Coding rules Coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm.
Mandatory rules RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -100
26 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.18 (START_UPLINK_REPLY) - (START_UPLINK_REPLY)
Parameter Name HMI Name START_UPLINK_REPLY
Logical Name START_UPLINK_REPLY
Definition Maximum number of repetitions for the UPLINK FREE message (with
the Uplink Access Request bit set to L) during the initial part of the
uplink access procedure (i.e. before sending the first UPLINK FREE
message with the Uplink Access Request bit set to H)
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 1024 256
External Comment The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 27 / 1278

2.1.19 (T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY) - (T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY
Logical Name T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY
Definition This Timer is used to delay the Multiple SACCH Info Modify and
the VGCS_ADD_INFO in order to give the MS a chance to receive
the immediately transmitted VGCS_ADD_INFO/FACCH and SI6
messages
Coding rules step size = 100 ms
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
ms 100 1000 200
28 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.20 (T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE) -
(T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE
Logical Name T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE
Definition This parameter defines the repetition period of CHANNEL RELEASE

message sent on FACCH
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
ms 200 1000 200
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 29 / 1278

2.1.21 (T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE) - (T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE
Logical Name T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE
Definition Delay between consecutive repetitions of the UPLINK FREE

message, sent to the mobile station. The UPLINK FREE messages
shall be repeated as long as no uplink is granted to a mobile station.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
ms 20 480 200
30 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.22 (T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS) - (T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS
Logical Name T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS
Definition Guard timer to wait for an Uplink Access. If no such bursts are
received at this timer expiry, the BSC releases the voice group call
channel in that cell and provide notifications containing no channel
description.
Coding rules step size = 1sec
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules T_Wait_Uplink_Access >= [START_UPLINK_REPLY + (10 *

WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)] * T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 3 300 60
External Comment The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 31 / 1278

2.1.23 (T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK) -
(T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK
Logical Name T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK
Definition Guard timer to wait for UPLINK REQUEST ACK or UPLINK

REQUEST REJECT message from the MSC.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
ms 500 5000 500
32 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.24 (T14) - (T14)
Parameter Name HMI Name T14
Logical Name T14
Definition Maximum queuing time for the VGCS Assignment Requests
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 1 19 6
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 33 / 1278

2.1.25 (T3115) - (T3115)
Logical Name T3115
Definition This timer is used for the repetition of the VGCS UPLINK GRANT
message during the uplink access procedure. If the timer expires
before the reception of a correctly decoded frame from MS, the BTS
repeats the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message to the requesting MS
Coding rules step size = 20ms
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
ms 100 480 200
34 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.26 (TEMPORARY_OFFSET) - (TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name TEMPORARY_OFFSET
Logical Name TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n)
Definition Offset applied to C2 criterion for the duration of PENALTY_TIME.
Coding rules step size = 10dB. 0: 0dB, 1:10dB, 6: 60dB, 7: infinity
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 infinity 0
Cell Type Dependent Single 0 dB (0)
Umbrella 0 dB (0)
Concentric 0 dB (0)
Concentric Umbrella 0 dB (0)
Microcell infinity (7)
Minicell infinity (7)
Extended inner cell 0 dB (0)
Extended outer cell 0 dB (0)
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 35 / 1278

2.1.27 (VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC) - (VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC)
Parameter Name HMI Name VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC
Logical Name VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC
Definition This parameter defines the type of FR AMR codec used in the
network.
Coding rules 0: AMR Full Rate Codec 12,2 kbit/s;

1: AMR Full Rate Codec 10,2 kbit/s;
7: AMR Full Rate Codec 4,75 kbit/st;
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 7 1
36 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.28 (VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC) - (VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC)
Parameter Name HMI Name VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC
Logical Name VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC
Definition This parameter defines the type of HR AMR codec used in the
network.
Coding rules 0: AMR Half Rate Codec 7,95 kbit/s;

1: AMR Half Rate Codec 7,40 kbit/s;
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 2 5 4
External Comment AMR Half Rate codec mode 7,95 kb/s is not supported by Alcatel
BSS.
AMR Half Rate codec mode 7,4kb/s is not supported as a
"stand-alone" codec
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 37 / 1278

2.1.29 (WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS) - (WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)
Parameter Name HMI Name WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS
Logical Name WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS
Definition Maximum number of repetitions for the UPLINK FREE message

(with the Uplink Access Request bit set to L) per cycle, during the
non-initial part of the uplink access procedure (i.e. after sending the
first UPLINK FREE message with the Uplink Access Request bit set
to H).
Each time the value of this counter becomes zero, the BTS send one
UPLINK FREE message with the Uplink Access Request bit set to H.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 32 3
External Comment The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true.
38 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3 LCS Telecom Parameters
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 39 / 1278

3.1 Network (CDE)

3.1.1 (CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN) - (CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN)
Parameter Name HMI Name CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN
Logical Name CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN
Definition Confidence origin used in the 3D linear regression of the confidence

of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when providing the reference
location to the A-GPS server.
Coding rules step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules –
Category Network (CDE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
% 0 100 50.7
40 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.1.2 (CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE) -
(CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE)
Parameter Name HMI Name CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE
Logical Name CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE
Definition Slope ratio between the confidence and the arc factor used in the 3D
linear regression of the confidence of the ellipsoid arc returned by
the MFS when providing the reference location to the A-GPS server.
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
% 0 100 25
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 41 / 1278

3.1.3 (CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE) -
(CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE)
Parameter Name HMI Name CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE
Logical Name CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE
Definition Slope ratio between the confidence and the sum of minimum radius
factor and maximum radius factor used in the 3D linear regression
of the confidence of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when
providing the reference location to the A-GPS server.
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
% 0 100 15.28
42 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.1.4 (MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST) -
(MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST)
Parameter Name HMI Name MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST
Logical Name MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST
Definition Bitmap (8 bits) defining the types of optional assistance data to be

retrieved from the A-GPS server when using the MS based A-GPS
positioning method. The following optional assistance data type are
considered: Almanac, UTC model, DGPS corrections, reference
time, acquisition assistance, real-time integrity.
Coding rules bit 8 (most significant) and bit 7 are not used (i.e. always set to 0); bit
6=1: real-time integrity is retrieived; bit 5=1: acquisition assistance
is retrieived; bit 4=1: reference time is retrieived; bit 3=1: DGPS
corrections is retrieived; bit 2=1: UTC model is retrieived; bit 1 (least
significant)=1: Almanac is retrieived.
Mandatory rules –
Type Reference
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 0 63 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 43 / 1278

3.1.5 (PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1) - (PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1
Logical Name PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1
Definition The most preferred GPS positioning method.
Coding rules It contains a reference to a GPS method: 1 for MS Assisted A-GPS,

2 for MS Based A-GPS, 3 for Conventional GPS.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules The same GPS methods reference should not be used for different
priorities
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 1 3 1
44 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition The second preferred GPS positioning method.

Mandatory rules –
priorities.
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 1 3 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 45 / 1278

Definition The third preferred GPS positioning method.

Mandatory rules –
priorities.
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 1 3 3
46 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.1.8 (SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT) - (SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT)
Parameter Name HMI Name SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT
Logical Name SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT
Definition Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based on

TCP keep alive mechanism. This timer controls the retransmission
timeout for the sending of the individual data segments.
Coding rules step size = 1 second
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 4 10 5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 47 / 1278

3.1.9 (SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL) -
(SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL)
Parameter Name HMI Name SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL
Logical Name SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL
Definition Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based on TCP

keep alive mechanism. This timer determines the interval separating
keep alive retransmissions until a response is received. Once a
response is received, the delay until the next keep alive transmission
is again controlled by the value of this timer. The connection
will be aborted after the number of retransmissions specified by
SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS have gone unanswered.
Coding rules step size = 1 second
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 4 10 5
48 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.1.10 (SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS) -
(SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS)
Parameter Name HMI Name SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS
Logical Name SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS
Definition Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based on TCP

keep alive mechanism. This parameter controls the number of times
TCP will retransmit an individual data segment before aborting the
connection. The retransmission timeout is given by the parameter
SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 4 10 5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 49 / 1278

3.1.11 (T_SAGI_GUARD) - (T_SAGI_GUARD)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_SAGI_GUARD
Logical Name T_SAGI_GUARD
Definition Timer to guard the response from the A-GPS server (on SAGI:
interface with A-GPS server).
Coding rules step size = 1 sec
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 1 300 60
External Comment The timer is meaningful in the MFS when EN_SAGI=1.
50 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.2 Site (CAE)

3.2.1 (ARC_SIZE_FACTOR) - (ARC_SIZE_FACTOR)
Parameter Name HMI Name ARC_SIZE_FACTOR
Logical Name ARC_SIZE_FACTOR
Definition Factor used in the computation of the width in degree of the ellipsoid
arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on
TA positionning method.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 1.5 1.2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 51 / 1278

3.2.2 (AZIMUTH) - (LCS_AZIMUTH)
Parameter Name HMI Name AZIMUTH
Logical Name LCS_AZIMUTH
Definition Antenna direction orientation for the sector supporting the cell (used
by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positionning
method).
Coding rules 0: 0 degree,..., 359: 359 degree, 360: omnidirectional cell
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 360 0
External Comment 0 corresponds to the North orientation and is counted clockwise.
52 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.2.3 (EN_CONV_GPS) - (EN_CONV_GPS)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_CONV_GPS
Logical Name EN_CONV_GPS
Definition Flag to enable or disable the positioning method ’Conventional GPS’.
Coding rules 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled
Mandatory rules EN_CONV_GPS = 0 (from B11 MR3)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment - The activation of this positioning method is meaningful when

EN_LCS=1.
- Only the value 0 is supported (from B11 MR3)
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 53 / 1278

3.2.4 (EN_LCS) - (EN_LCS (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_LCS
Logical Name EN_LCS (BSC)
Definition Enables/Disables the Location Services (LCS) in the BSS.
Mandatory rules - Equal to EN_LCS (MFS)

- EN_LCS = "disabled" on BSC G2 (from B11 MR3)
- EN_LB and EN_LCS shall not be both enabled at the same time
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
External Comment - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only (from B11 MR3).
- Only the value 0 is supported on G2 BSC (from B11 MR3)
54 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.2.5 (EN_LCS) - (EN_LCS (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_LCS
Logical Name EN_LCS (MFS)
Definition Enables/Disables the Location Services (LCS) in the BSS.
Mandatory rules - Equal to EN_LCS (BSC)

- EN_LCS = "disabled" on BSC G2 (from B11 MR3)
- EN_LB and EN_LCS shall not be both enabled at the same time
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
External Comment - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only (from B11 MR3).
- Only the value 0 is supported on G2 BSC (from B11 MR3)
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 55 / 1278

3.2.6 (EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS) - (EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS
Logical Name EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS
Definition Flag to enable or disable the positioning method ’MS Assisted

A-GPS’.
Mandatory rules - EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS = 0 (from B11 MR3)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0

EN_LCS=1.
56 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.2.7 (EN_MS_BASED_AGPS) - (EN_MS_BASED_AGPS)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_MS_BASED_AGPS
Logical Name EN_MS_BASED_AGPS
Definition Flag to enable or disable the positioning method ’MS Based A-GPS’.
Mandatory rules - EN_MS_BASED_AGPS = 0 (from B11 MR3)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0

EN_LCS=1.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 57 / 1278

3.2.8 (EN_SAGI) - (EN_SAGI)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_SAGI
Logical Name EN_SAGI
Definition Flag indicating whether SAGI (interface with the A-GPS server) is
configured or not for this BSS.
Coding rules 0: disabled; 1: enabled
Mandatory rules - EN_SAGI = 0 (from B11 MR3)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
External Comment - Only the value 0 is supported (from B11 MR3)
58 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.2.9 (Geographical Coordinates) -

(GEOGRAPHICAL_COORDINATES_FLAG)
Parameter Name HMI Name Geographical Coordinates
Logical Name GEOGRAPHICAL_COORDINATES_FLAG
Definition Indicates whether latitude and longitude are significant or not.
Coding rules 0: not significant, 1: significant
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 59 / 1278

3.2.10 (HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH) - (HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH)
Parameter Name HMI Name HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH
Logical Name HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH
Definition Antenna half power beam for the sector supporting the cell (used by
the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positionning
method).
Coding rules 0: half power beam width unknown, 1: 1 degree,..., 360: 360 degree
(omnidirectional cell)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 360 0
60 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.2.11 (LATITUDE) - (LCS_LATITUDE)
Parameter Name HMI Name LATITUDE
Logical Name LCS_LATITUDE
Definition Latitude of the BTS supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute
location estimate based on TA positionning method).
Coding rules Sequence of:

- number of degrees (from 0 to 90)
- number of minutes (from 0 to 59)
- number of fractional minutes (from 0 to 9999)
- direction (boolean, true for South and false for North)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type List of numbers
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0,0,0,false 90,59,9999,true #
External Comment 1) 0 latitude corresponds to the Equator;

2) The coding for OMC-R HMI is described in the "BSS O&M
Parameters" document, parameter "LCS-Latitude".
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 61 / 1278

3.2.12 (LONGITUDE) - (LCS_LONGITUDE)
Parameter Name HMI Name LONGITUDE
Logical Name LCS_LONGITUDE
Definition Longitude of the BTS supporting the cell (used by the MFS to
compute location estimate based on TA positionning method).
Coding rules Sequence of:

- number of degrees (from 0 to 180)
- number of minutes (from 0 to 59)
- number of fractional minutes (from 0 to 9999)
- direction (boolean, true for West and false for East)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0,0,0,false 180,59,9999,true #
External Comment 1) 0 longitude corresponds to the Greenwich Meridian;

2) The coding for OMC-R HMI is described in the "BSS O&M
Parameters" document, parameter "LCS-Longitude".
62 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.2.13 (MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR) - (MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR
Logical Name MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR
Definition Factor used in the computation of the maximum radius of the ellipsoid
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.5 1 0.6
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 63 / 1278

3.2.14 (MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR) - (MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR)
Parameter Name HMI Name MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR
Logical Name MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR
Definition Factor used in the computation of the minimum radius of the ellipsoid
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.5 1 0.85
64 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.2.15 (T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant) - (T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant
Logical Name T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant
Definition SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including the
RRLP message exchange with the target MS) in case of a Delay
Tolerant Location Request.
Mandatory rules T_Location + T_Location_Longer > T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant >=

T_LCS_Low_Delay
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 1 300 10
External Comment The timer is meaningful in the MFS when EN_LCS=1.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 65 / 1278

3.2.16 (T_LCS_Low_Delay) - (T_LCS_Low_Delay)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_LCS_Low_Delay
Logical Name T_LCS_Low_Delay
Definition SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including

the RRLP message exchange with the target MS) in case of a Low
Delay Location Request.
Coding rules step size = 0.1 sec

T_LCS_Low_Delay
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.1 180 3
66 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.2.17 (T_Loc_abort) - (T_Loc_abort)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_Loc_abort
Logical Name T_Loc_abort
Definition BSC timer supervising the response from the SMLC in case of
Location Abort.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules T_Loc_abort < T_Location
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
sec 1 30 2
External Comment The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 67 / 1278

3.2.18 (T_Location) - (T_Location)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_Location
Logical Name T_Location
Definition BSC timer, on a per call basis, supervising the response from the
SMLC in case of Location request, when no RRLP exchange is
triggered with the MS.

T_LCS_Low_Delay
Recommended rules -
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
sec 1 300 15
External Comment The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1.
68 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.2.19 (T_Location_Longer) - (T_Location_Longer)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_Location_Longer
Logical Name T_Location_Longer
Definition BSC timer, on a per call basis, supervising the response from the
SMLC in case of Location request, when a RRLP exchange is
triggered with the MS.

T_LCS_Low_Delay
Recommended rules T_Location_Longer > T_Location
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
sec 1 300 30
External Comment The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1, and replaces
T_Location timer in case of Conventional GPS, MS Assisted A-GPS
and MS Based A-GPS positioning methods.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 69 / 1278

3.2.20 (T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant) - (T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant
Logical Name T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant
Definition SMLC timer to guard the RRLP message exchange between the
SMLC and the target MS, in case of a Delay Tolerant Location
Request.
Mandatory rules T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant > T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant

T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant >= T_RRLP_Low_Delay
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 1 300 9
70 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3.2.21 (T_RRLP_Low_Delay) - (T_RRLP_Low_Delay)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_RRLP_Low_Delay
Logical Name T_RRLP_Low_Delay
Definition SMLC timer to guard the RRLP message exchange between the
SMLC and the target MS, in case of a Low Delay Location Request.
Mandatory rules T_Low_Delay > T_RRLP_Low_Delay

T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant >= T_RRLP_Low_Delay
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.1 120 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 71 / 1278

72 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4 IP Telecom Parameters
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 73 / 1278

4.1 Site (CAE)

4.1.1 (—) - (MSC_OFFLOAD_STATE)
Parameter Name HMI Name —
Logical Name MSC_OFFLOAD_STATE
Definition State assigned to a given MSC, connected to the BSC (Aflex feature),
for the load redistribution function. That function removes the "off
loaded" MSC from the list of candidate MSCs on BSS side.
Coding rules 0: off loaded

1: on loaded
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance MSC
None 0 1 1
External Comment - Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled.

- Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only.
- If a MSC server is in high load situation, the operator can avoid
the MSC to enter the overload situation through the update of that
parameter to "off loaded" for the concerned MSC.
Parameter change: on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied

immediately after modification. The complete redistribution of the MS
requires the same change done on Core Network side too.
74 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.2 (—) - (SGSN_OFFLOAD_STATE)
Parameter Name HMI Name —
Logical Name SGSN_OFFLOAD_STATE
Definition State assigned to a given SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex

feature), for the load redistribution function. That function removes
the "off loaded" SGSN from the list of candidate SGSNs on BSS side.
Coding rules 0: off loaded

1: on loaded
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviour

of the Gbflex feature, all the NSEs, connected to the same SGSN,
must have the same SGSN_OFFLOAD_STATE.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance NSE
None 0 1 1
External Comment - Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled.

- If a SGSN server is in high load situation, the operator can avoid
the SGSN to enter the overload situation through the update of that
parameter to "off loaded" for all the NSEs of all the BSSs connected
to the concerned SGSN.
Parameter change: on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied

immediately after modification. The complete redistribution of the MS
requires the same change done on Core Network side too.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 75 / 1278

4.1.3 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1) -
(ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1
Logical Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1
Definition Primary IP adress of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on

the MSC side.
Coding rules coded on 15 characters string
Mandatory rules - ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 and

ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely
identify a SCTP endpoint inside one MSC
- 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden
Category Site (CAE)
Type IP address
SubSystem BSC
Instance SCTP EndPoint
None None None None
External Comment Parameter change: before any modification, the operator must lock
the associated A Signalling Link (ASL).
76 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.4 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2) -
(ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2)
Parameter Name HMI Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2
Logical Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2
Definition Secondary IP adress of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol)

on the MSC side.
It is an optional address used in case of SCTP multihoming in MSC
side.
Mandatory rules - 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden
Category Site (CAE)
Type IP address
SubSystem BSC
None None None None
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 77 / 1278

4.1.5 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST) - (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST)
Parameter Name HMI Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST
Logical Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST
Definition List of the SCTP endpoints (used by M3UA protocol) on the MSC
side.
Up to 4 endpoints can be defined in that list.
Coding rules coded as an array of 4 entries

Each entry is an SCTP endpoint, composed
of ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1,
ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT and
ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2
Mandatory rules When the MSC TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number of
SCTP endpoints configured in the ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST
must be equal or greater than MIN_NB_ACTIVE_
Category Site (CAE)
SubSystem BSC
Instance MSC
None None None None
the associated A Signalling Link(s) (ASL).
78 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.6 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT) - (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT)
Parameter Name HMI Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Logical Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Definition Port of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on the MSC side.
Coding rules Step size = 1
Mandatory rules ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 and

ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely identify a
SCTP endpoint inside one MSC
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
None 1 65535 None
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 79 / 1278

4.1.7 (EN_A_FLEX) - (EN_A_FLEX)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_A_FLEX
Logical Name EN_A_FLEX
Definition Enables/disables the support of the "Aflex" feature (for signaling

traffic). The Aflex feature allows a BSS to be connected to more
than one MSC.
Mandatory rules EN_A_FLEX is enabled only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is enabled

When EN_A_FLEX is enabled, up to 16 MSCs can be connected to
one BSC.
When EN_A_FLEX is disabled, only one MSC can be connected
to one BSC.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
External Comment - Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only.

- Support of A-Flex by the MSC server is mandatory.
- Support of Virtual MGW feature by the Media Gateway is mandatory.
Parameter change: Before disabling the feature from the BSC side,
the operator must delete all the excessive MSCs (except one, ie no
more than one MSC connected to the BSC).
Before enabling the feature, the operator must have configured the
NULL_NRI and NRI_LENGTH parameters. Then the Aflex feature
deals with the unlocked MSC(s).
80 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.8 (EN_ASIG_OVER_IP) - (EN_ASIG_OVER_IP)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_ASIG_OVER_IP
Logical Name EN_ASIG_OVER_IP
Definition Enables/disables the support of "A signalling over IP"
Mandatory rules - EN_A_FLEX is enabled only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is enabled.

- EN_ASIG_OVER_IP can be enabled if, at least, one MSC SCTP
endpoint has been configured.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
External Comment - Function available on BSC Evolution only.
- Parameter change: A BSC reset procedure is needed, after

modification, to resynchronize all the channels of the A interface.
This ’BSC reset’ leads to a total outage of several minutes. No
telecom service is provided during this procedure.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 81 / 1278

4.1.9 (EN_GB_FLEX) - (EN_GB_FLEX)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_GB_FLEX
Logical Name EN_GB_FLEX
Definition Enables/disables the support of the "Gbflex" feature (for data and
signaling traffic). The GbFlex feature allows a BSS to be connected
to more than one SGSN.
Mandatory rules - EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if Gb_Transport_Mode is IP

- If Gb_Transport_Mode is FR then EN_GB_FLEX must be disabled
- EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if SGSNR = 1
- When EN_GB_FLEX is enabled, up to 8 SGSNs can be connected
to one BSS.
- When EN_GB_FLEX is disabled, only one SGSN can be connected
to one BSS.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
External Comment Support of Gb-Flex by the SGSN is mandatory.
Parameter change: no impact on the on going telecom service.

Before disabling the feature from the MFS side, the operator shall
delete all the excessive NSEs (no more than one NSE per GPU, ie
no more than one SGSN connected to the BSS).
82 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.10 (Gb_Configuration_Type) - (Gb_Configuration_Type)
Parameter Name HMI Name Gb_Configuration_Type
Logical Name Gb_Configuration_Type
Definition Configuration type used with Gb over IP.

In case of static configuration, the SGSN IP endpoint(s) are given by
O&M.
In case of dynamic configuration, the SGSN IP endpoint(s) are
sent dynamically by the SGSN. For that exchange, at least one
pre-configured SGSN IP endpoint is previously given by O&M.
Coding rules 0 : Static configuration

1: Dynamic configuration
Mandatory rules In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration where Gb_Transport_Mode

is IP, all the NSEs connected to the same SGSN, having children
SGSN IPendpoint(s), must have the same Gb_Configuration_Type.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem MFS
Instance NSE
None 0 1 0
External Comment Gb_Configuration type is significant only when Gb_Transport mode

is IP.
Parameter change: before any parameter modification, the operator
has to delete the children SGSN IP endpoint(s).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 83 / 1278

4.1.11 (GPU_Gb_Base_IP) - (GPU_Gb_Base_IP)
Parameter Name HMI Name GPU_Gb_Base_IP
Logical Name GPU_Gb_Base_IP
Definition Base address of the IP address of the local Gb IP endpoint, used to

define the GPU_Gb_IP_Address of each GPU board (for Gb over IP
interface).
Coding rules coded on 32 bits

The last group is set to 000 (base address)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type IP address
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 0 4294967295 None
External Comment Parameter change: if Gb_transport_Mode is already in IP mode, a

change of this parameter must be followed by a manual reset of the
associated GP/GPU (during the IP settings preparation phase, no
manual reset is needed since the reset is automatically performed by
the MFS at the feature activation time).
84 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.12 (GPU_Gb_Base_UDP) - (GPU_Gb_Base_UDP)
Parameter Name HMI Name GPU_Gb_Base_UDP
Logical Name GPU_Gb_Base_UDP
Definition Base port number of the UDP port number of the local Gb IP
endpoint, used to define the GPU_Gb_UDP_port of each GPU board
(for Gb over IP interface).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 63488 64512 64512

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 85 / 1278

4.1.13 (GPU_Gb_IP_Address) - (GPU_Gb_IP_Address)
Parameter Name HMI Name GPU_Gb_IP_Address
Logical Name GPU_Gb_IP_Address
Definition Allows to display the IP address of the local Gb IP endpoint, used by

a GPU board in a NSE instance (for Gb over IP interface)

coded default value is for implementation purposes only
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type IP address
SubSystem MFS
Instance GPU
None 0 4294967295 None
External Comment Calculated by the MFS from the GPU_Gb_Base_IP value.
86 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.14 (GPU_Gb_UDP_Port) - (GPU_Gb_UDP_Port)
Parameter Name HMI Name GPU_Gb_UDP_Port
Logical Name GPU_Gb_UDP_Port
Definition Allows to display the UDP port number of the local Gb IP endpoint,
used by a GPU board in a NSE instance (for Gb over IP interface).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance GPU
None 63488 64512 64512
External Comment equal to GPU_Gb_base_UDP.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 87 / 1278

4.1.15 (IP_Address) - (SGSN_IP_Address)
Parameter Name HMI Name IP_Address
Logical Name SGSN_IP_Address
Definition IP address of a SGSN Ipendpoint, used in case of static configuration

of Gb over IP interface.
IP address of a pre-configured SGSN IP endpoint, used in case of
dynamic configuration of Gb over IP interface.

Mandatory rules - Each SGSN IP EndPoint (SGSN_IP_Address, SGSN_UDP_Port)

must be unique per NSE.
- in case of static configuration, up to 16 SGSN IP endpoints can be
defined per NSE.
- In case of dynamic configuration, only a single pre-configured
SGSN IP endpoint can be defined per NSE.
Category Site (CAE)
Type IP address
SubSystem MFS
Instance SGSN-IPEndPoint
None 0 4294967295 None
88 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.16 (IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS) - (IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS)
Parameter Name HMI Name IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS
Logical Name IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS
Definition Mask of the subnet where is allocated the range of MFS addresses
used for
Gb telecom protocols

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type IP address
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 0 4294967295 None

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 89 / 1278

4.1.17 (LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1) -
(LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1
Logical Name LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1
Definition Local primary IP adress of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA

protocol) on the BSC side.
Mandatory rules - LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 and

LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely
identify a SCTP endpoint inside the BSC
Recommended rules 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden
Category Site (CAE)
Type IP address
SubSystem BSC
None None None None
90 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.18 (LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT) -
(LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT)
Parameter Name HMI Name LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Logical Name LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Definition Local port of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on the

BSC side.
Mandatory rules LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 and

LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely
identify a SCTP endpoint inside the BSC
Recommended rules By default, the LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT values are

taken in the range 61953-61999.
It is recommended to change these values only in case of IOT issue

with the MSC. In this case it is recommended:
- to not use values in the range 0..49151 ("well known" and "iana
registered" ports)
-to avoid the values already used by other BSS protocols using IP,
-and especially to not use the ports used by the IP_BSSAsig protocol
(to avoid conflicts during the transition from ’Asig over TDM’ to ’Asig
over IP’).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
None 1 65535 None
External Comment Parameter change: Before any modification of the

Local_Asig_SCTP_Endpoint_Port, If the Aflex feature is enabled,
Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly set the concerned MSC into the
"off loaded" state in order to redirect the new traffic towards other
MSCs. Then, the operator must lock all the A Signalling Links (ASL)
of the modified MSC. Under some circumstances (e.g. that MSC is
the only MSC still operational, ie in IT or FIT, state among all the
MSCs connected to a BSC), the BSS-TEL is to be previously locked
too. This procedure leads the BSC to reject any new calls and wait for
some minutes (Wait Traffic Clear) before shutting down the on going
calls. After modification of the Local_Asig_SCTP_Endpoint_Port, the
locked objects must be unlocked and be "on loaded" again to reopen
the telecom service.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 91 / 1278

92 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.19 (MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP) - (MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP)
Parameter Name HMI Name MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Logical Name MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Definition The minimum number of active IP server processes (IPSP) in the

MSC server required to handle the traffic with that MSC.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules When the MSC TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number of
must be equal or greater than MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance MSC
None 1 4 1
External Comment - This parameter is significant when the TRAFFIC_MODE of the

MSC is load sharing mode.
- Parameter change: before any modification of the
MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP, If the Aflex feature is
enabled, Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly set the concerned
MSC into the "off loaded" state in order to redirect the new traffic
towards other MSCs. Then, the operator must lock all the A Signalling
Links (ASL) of the modified MSC. Under some circumstances (e.g.
that MSC is the only MSC still operational, ie in IT or FIT, state among
all the MSCs connected to a BSC), the BSS-TEL is to be previously
locked too. This procedure leads the BSC to reject any new calls and
wait for some minutes (Wait Traffic Clear) before shutting down the
on going calls. After modification of the MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP, the
locked objects must be unlocked and be "on loaded" again to reopen
the telecom service.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 93 / 1278

4.1.20 (MSC_CN_ID) - (MSC_CN_ID)
Parameter Name HMI Name MSC_CN_ID
Logical Name MSC_CN_ID
Definition This parameter indicates, within a given PLMN, the Core Network
Identifier.
It is part of the Global Core Network Identifier, defined in 3GPP TS
23.003 as (PLMN-id + CN-id), which uniquely identifies a MSC for
the Aflex feature.
Coding rules coded on 2 bytes

The coded default value is for implementation purposes only; this
dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any MSC
identifier yet.
Mandatory rules - All the MSCs, connected to one BSC, must have different
MSC_CN_ID.
Recommended rules - The operator must control that, in a PLMN, 2 MSCs must have
2 different MSC_CN_ID.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance MSC
None 0 4095 None
External Comment - Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled

- The operator must control that the BSC and all the MSCs connected
to that BSC via Aflex feature must belong to the same PLMN.
- Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going
calls are not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Change
applied immediately on the new calls established after modification.
94 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.21 (MSC_MCC) - (MSC_MCC)
Parameter Name HMI Name MSC_MCC
Logical Name MSC_MCC
Definition Mobile Country Code of the MSC, connected to the BSC. It is part of
the Global Core Network Identifier, defined in 3GPP TS 23.003 as
(PLMN-id + CN-id), which uniquely identifies a MSC for the Aflex
feature.
Coding rules 3 digits BCD

dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any MCC
yet.
Mandatory rules The OMC-R initializes the parameter with the MCC field of the
BSC-OwnPLMN. It is not changeable on the HMI.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance MSC
None 0 999 None

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 95 / 1278

4.1.22 (MSC_MNC) - (MSC_MNC)
Parameter Name HMI Name MSC_MNC
Logical Name MSC_MNC
Definition Mobile Network Code of the MSC, connected to the BSC. It is part of
the Global Core Network Identifier, defined in 3GPP TS 23.003 as
(PLMN-id + CN-id), which uniquely identifies a MSC for the Aflex
feature.

dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any MNC
yet.
Mandatory rules The OMC-R initializes the parameter with the MNC field of the
BSC-OwnPLMN. It is not changeable on the HMI.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance MSC
None 0 999 None

96 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.23 (MSC_SPC) - (MSC_SPC)
Parameter Name HMI Name MSC_SPC
Logical Name MSC_SPC
Definition Signalling Point Code of a given MSC, connected to the BSC.
Coding rules coded over 14 bits
Mandatory rules All the MSCs connected to one BSC must have different MSC_SPC.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance MSC
None 0 16383 None
External Comment - Significant only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is set to TRUE

- "A signalling over IP" function is available on BSC Evolution only.
- Parameter change: Before any modification of the MSC_SPC, If the
Aflex feature is enabled, Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly set
the concerned MSC into the "off loaded" state in order to redirect
the new traffic towards other MSCs. Then, the operator must lock
all the A Signalling Links (ASL) of the modified MSC. Under some
circumstances (e.g. that MSC is the only MSC still operational, ie
in IT or FIT, state among all the MSCs connected to a BSC), the
BSS-TEL is to be previously locked too. This procedure leads the
BSC to reject any new calls and wait for some minutes (Wait Traffic
Clear) before shutting down the on going calls. After modification
of the MSC_SPC, the locked objects must be unlocked and be "on
loaded" again to reopen the telecom service.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 97 / 1278

4.1.24 (MSC_WEIGHT) - (MSC_WEIGHT)
Parameter Name HMI Name MSC_WEIGHT
Logical Name MSC_WEIGHT
Definition Weight assigned to a MSC, connected to the BSC (Aflex feature), for
the load balancing function. A high value is to be associated to a
high capacity MSC.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules It is recommended to set a weight value consistent with the number
of A-trunks connected to that MSC.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance MSC
None 1 255 1

98 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.25 (NRI_LENGTH) - (NRI_LENGTH)
Parameter Name HMI Name NRI_LENGTH
Logical Name NRI_LENGTH
Definition This parameter defined the configurable length of a NRI (Network

Resource Identification), expressed as a number of bits It is used
by the BSC to derive the NRI value from the received temporary
identity TMSI, and to identify the serving MSC, connected to the BSC
(Aflex feature). The NRI is coded starting from the bit 23 (the most
significant bit of the NRI) of the TMSI, regardless of the NRI length.
Coding rules The coded default value is for implementation purposes only; this
dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any length
value yet.
Mandatory rules - Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH - 1

- NULL_NRI <= 2^NRI_LENGTH 1
Recommended rules - The operator must control that the same NRI_LENGTH is
configured in all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area.
- A larger length allows to define/connect more MSCs per CS pool
area, but reduce the number of available TMSI for a given time
period, since the NRI is part of the TMSI.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 10 None

Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going calls

are not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Change
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 99 / 1278

4.1.26 (NRI_LENGTH_PS) - (NRI_LENGTH_PS)
Parameter Name HMI Name NRI_LENGTH_PS
Logical Name NRI_LENGTH_PS
Definition This parameter defined the configurable length of a NRI (Network

Resource Identification), expressed as a number of bits It is used
by the MFS to derive the NRI value from the received TLLI, and to
identify the serving SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature).
The NRI is coded starting from the bit 23 (the most significant bit of
the NRI) of the TLLI, regardless of the NRI length.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules - Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1

- NULL_NRI_PS <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1
Recommended rules The operator must control that the same NRI_LENGTH_PS is
configured in all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 10 None
External Comment Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled.
Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic

is not disrupted. Change applied immediately after modification.
100 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.27 (NRI_LIST) - (NRI_LIST)
Parameter Name HMI Name NRI_LIST
Logical Name NRI_LIST
Definition List of the Network Resource Identifiers, associated to a given MSC,

connected to the BSC (Aflex feature). Up to 8 NRIs can be defined
per MSC.
The NRI is part of the temporary identity TMSI, which is assigned by
the serving MSC to the MS. The BSC derives the NRI from any Initial
layer 3 message, in order to identify the serving MSC.
Coding rules Coded on 2 bytes

The empty list (length = 0) value 1024 is for implementation purpose
only; this dummy list indicates that the operator does not provide
any NRI yet.
Mandatory rules - 2 different MSCs, connected to the BSC, must have 2 different
NRI_LIST.
- A NRI shall be unique among all the NRI_LIST of all the MSCs
connected to the BSC (and especially when the BSC is in the
overlapping zone of 2 CS pool areas).
- Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH 1
- The NULL_NRI shall not be included in any NRI_LIST of any MSCs
connected to the BSC
- When EN_A_FLEX is enabled, the NRI_LIST must contain at least
one NRI
Recommended rules - The operator must control that one NRI shall be unique among all
the NRI_LIST of all the MSCs, which serve in parallel a given CS
pool area.
- When several BSCs, belonging to the same CS pool area, are
connected to the same MSC, the operator must control that the
NRI_LIST of that MSC is configured with the same value in each
BSC of the CS pool area.
Category Site (CAE)
SubSystem BSC
Instance MSC
None 0 1023 None

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 101 / 1278

102 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.28 (NRI_LIST_PS) - (NRI_LIST_PS)
Parameter Name HMI Name NRI_LIST_PS
Logical Name NRI_LIST_PS
Definition List of the Network Resource Identifiers, associated to a given

SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature). Up to 8 NRIs can be
defined per SGSN (and at least one).
The NRI is part of the temporary identity P-TMSI, which is assigned
by the serving SGSN to the MS. The MFS derives the NRI from the
TLLI received from the MS, in order to identify the serving SGSN.

The value 1024 is only defined for implementation purpose (it is not
a valid value).
Mandatory rules - In a BSS, 2 different SGSNs must have 2 different NRI_LIST_PS.

- A NRI shall be unique among all the NRI_LIST_PS of all the NSEs
of one GP /GPU.
- Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1
- For a BSS, the NULL_NRI_PS shall not be included in any
NRI_LIST_PS of any NSE connected to that BSS.
Recommended rules - For all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area, the NSEs
connected to one SGSN must all have the same NRI_LIST_PS, in
order for a MS to be served by that dedicated SGSN inside the whole
pool area (area belonging or not to the same MFS)
- In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviour
of the Gbflex feature, all the NSEs, connected to one SGSN, must
have the same NRI_LIST_PS.
Category Site (CAE)
SubSystem MFS
Instance NSE
None 0 1024 None
External Comment Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 103 / 1278

4.1.29 (NULL_NRI) - (NULL_NRI)
Parameter Name HMI Name NULL_NRI
Logical Name NULL_NRI
Definition Upon reception of a message with that dummy/reserved NRI

included, the BSC uses the load balancing algorithm for selecting
one MSC, among the "on loaded" MSC connected to the BSC (Aflex
feature), and for re-routing the received message to that MSC.

dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any null
NRI yet.
Mandatory rules - NULL_NRI <= 2^NRI_LENGTH - 1

- The NULL_NRI shall not be included in any NRI_LIST of any MSCs
connected to the BSC.
Recommended rules The operator must control that the NULL_NRI is common inside all
the BSSs of one PLMN.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1023 None

Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going calls

are not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Change
104 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.30 (NULL_NRI_PS) - (NULL_NRI_PS)
Parameter Name HMI Name NULL_NRI_PS
Logical Name NULL_NRI_PS
Definition In UL cases, upon TLLI reception with that dummy/reserved NRI

included, while a SGSN is not already selected for a mobile, the MFS
uses the load balancing algorithm for selecting one SGSN among
the "on loaded" SGSN connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature).
Mandatory rules - NULL_NRI_PS <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1

- For a BSS, the NULL_NRI_PS shall not be included in any
NRI_LIST_PS of any NSE connected to that BSS.
Recommended rules The operator must control that the NULL_NRI_PS is common inside
all the BSSs of one PLMN
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 1023 None

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 105 / 1278

4.1.31 (Peer_NSE_Data_Weight) - (Peer_NSE_Data_Weight)
Parameter Name HMI Name Peer_NSE_Data_Weight
Logical Name Peer_NSE_Data_Weight
Definition Indicates the data weight assigned to the peer NSE, in case of static
configuration of the Gb over IP interface.
Coding rules step size = 1
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
None 0 255 10
External Comment Declared by the operator in case of static configuration.

If Peer_NSE_Data_Weight=0, the SGSN IP endpoint will not be
selected as a data endpoint by the load sharing function.
106 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.32 (Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight) - (Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight)
Parameter Name HMI Name Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight
Logical Name Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight
Definition Indicates the signalling weight assigned to the peer NSE, in case of
static configuration of the Gb over IP interface.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
None 0 255 10
External Comment Declared by the operator in case of static configuration.

If Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight=0, the SGSN IP endpoint will not be
selected as a signalling endpoint.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 107 / 1278

4.1.33 (Port_Number) - (SGSN_UDP_Port)
Parameter Name HMI Name Port_Number
Logical Name SGSN_UDP_Port
Definition UDP port number of a SGSN Ipendpoint, used in case of static

configuration of Gb over IP interface.
UDP port number of a pre-configured SGSN IP endpoint, used in
case of dynamic configuration of Gb over IP interface.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules - Each SGSN IP EndPoint (SGSN_IP_Address, SGSN_UDP_Port)

must be unique per NSE.
- in case of static configuration, up to 16 SGSN IP endpoints can be
defined per NSE.
- In case of dynamic configuration, only a single pre-configured
SGSN IP endpoint can be defined per NSE.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
None 1024 65535 49152
External Comment Following IANA.org: "Registered Ports" are in the range 1024-49151
and "Dynamic and/or Private Ports" are those from 49152 through
65535 (ALU BSS ports are taken in the private range, however SGSN
ports taken in the registered ports are accepted by the ALU BSS).
108 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.34 (SGSN_ID) - (CN_ID_PS)
Parameter Name HMI Name SGSN_ID
Logical Name CN_ID_PS
Definition This parameter uniquely identifies one SGSN inside one BSS for the
Gbflex feature.
For that, the operator has the possibility to use the Core Network
Identifier, which is part of the Global Core Network Identifier, defined
in 3GPP TS 23.003 as (PLMN-id + CN-id). But in such case, the
same identifier can identify 2 different SGSN, belonging to 2 different
PLMN.
Mandatory rules - All the NSEs of one GP/GPU must have different CN_ID_PS.
Recommended rules - The operator must control that, in a BSS, 2 SGSNs must have 2
different CN_ID_PS.
- For a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviour
of the Gbflex feature, the operator must connect all the GP/GPU(s) to
the same SGSN(s) and define the same CN_ID_PS on all the NSEs,
connected to one SGSN.
- It is highly recommended to extend that rule (same CN_ID_PS value
for all the NSEs connected to one SGSN) in all the BSSs managed
by the MFS; and even more, in the whole managed network.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance NSE
None 0 65535 None
External Comment - Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled

- The default value depends on the configuration. The value given
here is for implementation purposes only.
- The operator must control that the BSS and all the SGSNs
connected to that BSS via Gbflex feature must belong to the same
PLMN.

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 109 / 1278

4.1.35 (SGSN_WEIGHT) - (SGSN_WEIGHT)
Parameter Name HMI Name SGSN_WEIGHT
Logical Name SGSN_WEIGHT
Definition Weight assigned to a SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature),

for the load balancing function. A high value is to be associated to
a high capacity SGSN, because it will be chosen more often than a
SGSN with a lower weight (e.g. a SGSN with weight = 10 will be
chosen twice as often as a SGSN with weight = 5).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviour

of the Gbflex feature, all the NSEs, connected to the same SGSN,
must have the same SGSN_WEIGHT. Same rule is to be extended
to all the NSEs of all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area, and
connected to the same SGSN.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance NSE
None 1 255 1

110 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.36 (SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR) - (SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR)
Parameter Name HMI Name SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR
Logical Name SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR
Definition Number of times one SGSN is used, once selected by the Node
Selection Function.
Coding rules —
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules There is no advantage to define different values for the BSSs of the
MFS.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 100 10

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 111 / 1278

4.1.37 (START_TELECOM_IP_ADDRESS_BSC) -
(START_TELECOM_IP_ADDRESS_BSC)
Parameter Name HMI Name START_TELECOM_IP_ADDRESS_BSC
Logical Name START_TELECOM_IP_ADDRESS_BSC
Definition First IP address for the range of telecom addresses shown to the
external world. The BSC deduces every address of its telecom
endpoint from this base address.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules - 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden
Category Site (CAE)
Type IP address
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None None None None
External Comment Parameter change: when this parameter is changed from the BSC
operator terminal, the BSC resets autonomously.
112 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4.1.38 (TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC) -
(TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC)
Parameter Name HMI Name TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC
Logical Name TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC
Definition Mask of the subnet where is allocated the range of BSC addresses
used for
telecom protocols
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules - 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden
Category Site (CAE)
Type IP address
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None None None None
External Comment Parameter change: Changing the IP configuration (e.g. subnet

mask, and so routing table) of any IP equipment of the network
(BSC included) may impact the ongoing traffic. Usually, the change
is also to be done accordingly in the gateway(s). As consequence,
Alcatel-Lucent recommends to shut down the traffic before any
change.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 113 / 1278

4.1.39 (TRAFFIC_MODE) - (TRAFFIC_MODE)
Parameter Name HMI Name TRAFFIC_MODE
Logical Name TRAFFIC_MODE
Definition Traffic mode of the MSC server.
Coding rules 0: load sharing mode (ie the traffic is distributed over all the active
IPSPs)
1 :override mode (ie only one of the IPSPs handle the traffic)
2: broadcast mode (ie all the active IPSPs receive the same
messages)
Mandatory rules - The value "broadcast mode" is not allowed.

- When the MSC TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number of
must be equal or greater than MIN_NB_ACTIVE_
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem BSC
Instance MSC
None 0 2 0
External Comment - Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is
for implementation purposes.
- The broadcast mode is not supported by the BSS.
- Parameter change: Before any modification of the TRAFFIC_MODE,
If the Aflex feature is enabled, Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly
set the concerned MSC into the "off loaded" state in order to redirect
the new traffic towards other MSCs. Then, the operator must lock
all the A Signalling Links (ASL) of the modified MSC. Under some
circumstances (e.g. that MSC is the only MSC still operational, ie
in IT or FIT, state among all the MSCs connected to a BSC), the
BSS-TEL is to be previously locked too. This procedure leads the
BSC to reject any new calls and wait for some minutes (Wait Traffic
Clear) before shutting down the on going calls. After modification of
the TRAFFIC_MODE, the locked objects must be unlocked and be
"on loaded" again to reopen the telecom service.
114 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5 GSM Telecom Parameters
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 115 / 1278

5.1 Network (CDE)

5.1.1 (ADDR_MON) - (ADDR_MON)
Parameter Name HMI Name ADDR_MON
Logical Name ADDR_MON
Definition Time it takes to ADDR_TR to be reached to report an alarm. On

timeout, the address error counter is reset.
Coding rules step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 6553.5 15
116 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.2 (ADDR_TR) - (ADDR_TR)
Parameter Name HMI Name ADDR_TR
Logical Name ADDR_TR
Definition Address error threshold for alarm detection.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 255 60
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 117 / 1278

5.1.3 (Autocleaning_Timer) - (T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP)
Parameter Name HMI Name Autocleaning_Timer
Logical Name T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP
Definition Guard time for detection of SDCCH/TCH autocleaning procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules - In micro cells, it is recommended to set N_BAD_SACCH so that

T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP > N_BAD_SACCH * 480ms + 30
seconds if T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP <> 0.
- Alcatel-Lucent recommends to configure the present BSS
guard timer strictly greater than Max(RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS,
RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR) x 0.480 sec of any cells of the
BSS in order to let the radio link failure defence mechanism ended
before internal cleanup.
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
sec 0 255 40
External Comment T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP = 0 inhibits the autocleaning

procedure.
118 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.4 (BF_HI_RX) - (BF_HI_RX)
Parameter Name HMI Name BF_HI_RX
Logical Name BF_HI_RX
Definition Threshold on LAPD RX buffers occupancy for transition from normal

to busy condition.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules BF_HI_RX > BF_LO_RX
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 80
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 119 / 1278

5.1.5 (BF_HI_TX) - (BF_HI_TX)
Parameter Name HMI Name BF_HI_TX
Logical Name BF_HI_TX
Definition Threshold on LAPD TX buffers occupancy for transition from normal

to busy condition.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules BF_HI_TX > BF_LO_TX
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 30 16
120 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.6 (BF_LO_RX) - (BF_LO_RX)
Parameter Name HMI Name BF_LO_RX
Logical Name BF_LO_RX
Definition Threshold on LAPD RX buffers occupancy for transition from busy

to normal condition.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules BF_LO_RX < BF_HI_RX
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 70
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 121 / 1278

5.1.7 (BF_LO_TX) - (BF_LO_TX)
Parameter Name HMI Name BF_LO_TX
Logical Name BF_LO_TX
Definition Threshold on LAPD TX buffers occupancy for transition from busy

to normal condition.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules BF_LO_TX < BF_HI_TX
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 30 8
122 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.8 (CGI_REQUIRED) - (CGI_REQD)
Parameter Name HMI Name CGI_REQUIRED
Logical Name CGI_REQD
Definition Controls format of cell identifications sent to the MSC.
Coding rules 0: CGI not used, 1: CGI used
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Alcatel recommend to set the CGI_REQD parameter to 1 provided

that the MSC supports the CGI format. The CGI_REQD parameter
shall be set to 1 if the operator wants to allow inter-PLMN 2G
to 2G handovers. If this parameter needs to be changed, it is
recommended to change it during a migration phase to avoid any
additional Telecom outage.
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 1
External Comment Depends on MSC Type. The value indicated here is for
implementation purposes.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 123 / 1278

5.1.9 (COUNT_DECR) - (COUNT_DECR)
Parameter Name HMI Name COUNT_DECR
Logical Name COUNT_DECR
Definition Stepsize by which the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction
to TCU overload is decremented upon T_COUNT_I expiry.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 10 1
124 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.10 (COUNT_I_THRESHOLD) - (COUNT_I_THRESHOLD)
Parameter Name HMI Name COUNT_I_THRESHOLD
Logical Name COUNT_I_THRESHOLD
Definition Leaky bucket counter threshold used to trigger defense actions upon
TCU overload.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 50 10
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 125 / 1278

5.1.11 (COUNT_INCR_1) - (COUNT_INCR_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name COUNT_INCR_1
Logical Name COUNT_INCR_1
to TCU overload is incremented upon TCU overload level 1.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules COUNT_INCR_1 <= COUNT_INCR_2
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 10 2
126 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.12 (COUNT_INCR_2) - (COUNT_INCR_2)
Parameter Name HMI Name COUNT_INCR_2
Logical Name COUNT_INCR_2
to TCU overload is incremented upon TCU overload level 2.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules COUNT_INCR_2 >= COUNT_INCR_1
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 10 4
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 127 / 1278

5.1.13 (CRC_MON) - (CRC_MON)
Parameter Name HMI Name CRC_MON
Logical Name CRC_MON
Definition Time in which CRC_TR is to be reached to report an alarm. On

timeout, the CRC error counter is reset.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 25.5 10
128 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.14 (CRC_TR) - (CRC_TR)
Parameter Name HMI Name CRC_TR
Logical Name CRC_TR
Definition CRC error threshold for alarm detection.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 255 50
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 129 / 1278

5.1.15 (EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY) -
(EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY)
Parameter Name HMI Name EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY
Logical Name EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY
Definition Defines if the G1 non-capable MS is supported or not in the network
Coding rules 0: G1 non-capable MS-s are only supported in the cells where the
BCCH is not configured on the G1 band (i.e. BCCH is configured on
PGSM band or on DCS1800 band).
1: G1 non-capable MS-s are not supported in any cell that contains
at least one G1 TRX of the network (Note these MS-s are still
supported in other cells).
Mandatory rules When EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY is set to "0", if the BCCH is

not configured on the G1 band (i.e. BCCH is configured on PGSM
band or on DCS1800 band), then:
1) the OMC-R does not allow the operator to define the CCCH,
SDCCH and CBCH on a G1 TRX.
2) TRX_PREF_MARK must be <> 0 for a hopping G1 TRX.
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
130 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.16 (EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF) - (EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF
Logical Name EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF
Definition When set, this flag allows, when bugged MS asking for a "dual rate,
half-rate preferred", to allocate a full rate channel.
Coding rules 0 : function disabled, 1 : function enabled
Mandatory rules –
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 131 / 1278

5.1.17 (I_TX_LAPD) - (I_TX_LAPD)
Parameter Name HMI Name I_TX_LAPD
Logical Name I_TX_LAPD
Definition Maximum LAPD transmission queue length.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 5 204 105
132 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.18 (LB_DECR) - (LB_DECR)
Parameter Name HMI Name LB_DECR
Logical Name LB_DECR
Definition Stepsize by which a leaky bucket overload counter in the BSC is

decremented on T_LB_OV expiry.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 10 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 133 / 1278

5.1.19 (LB_INCR) - (LB_INCR)
Parameter Name HMI Name LB_INCR
Logical Name LB_INCR
Definition Stepsize by which a leaky bucket overload counter in the BSC is

incremented each time an OVERLOAD is received from the FU.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 10 2
134 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.20 (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1]) - (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1])
Parameter Name HMI Name MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1]
Logical Name MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1]
Definition Percentage of MEASUREMENT RESULT messages discarded by

the TCU at step I.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 10
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 135 / 1278

5.1.21 (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [10]) - (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i

[10])

the TCU at step I.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 0
136 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


the TCU at step I.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 137 / 1278


the TCU at step I.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 30
138 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


the TCU at step I.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 40
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 139 / 1278


the TCU at step I.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 0
140 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


the TCU at step I.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 141 / 1278


the TCU at step I.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 0
142 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


the TCU at step I.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 143 / 1278


the TCU at step I.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 0
144 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.30 (NBLK) - (NBLK)
Parameter Name HMI Name NBLK
Logical Name NBLK
Definition Maximum number of BLOCK messages that can be sent if the ACK
from the MSC is not received.
Coding rules 255: infinite transmission
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 255 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 145 / 1278

5.1.31 (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1) - (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1
Logical Name NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1
Definition Number of steps needed to reduce the load upon TCU overload
level 1.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1 <= NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 10 1
146 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.32 (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2) - (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2)
Parameter Name HMI Name NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2
Logical Name NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2
Definition Number of steps to reduce the load upon TCU overload level 2.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2 >= NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 10 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 147 / 1278

5.1.33 (NUBLK) - (NUBLK)
Parameter Name HMI Name NUBLK
Logical Name NUBLK
Definition Maximum number of UNBLOCK messages that are sent if the ACK
from the MSC is not received.
Coding rules 255: infinite transmission
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 255 2
148 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.34 (PROT_MON) - (PROT_MON)
Parameter Name HMI Name PROT_MON
Logical Name PROT_MON
Definition Time in which PROT_TH is to be reached to report an alarm. On

timeout, the protocol error counter is reset.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 6553.5 10
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 149 / 1278

5.1.35 (PROT_TH) - (PROT_TH)
Parameter Name HMI Name PROT_TH
Logical Name PROT_TH
Definition Protocol error threshold for alarm detection.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 255 10
150 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.36 (RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB) - (RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB)
Parameter Name HMI Name RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB
Logical Name RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB
Definition Maximum number of measured neighbour frequencies, reported by

the BTS to the BSC in the Radio Measurements. The actual number,
reported by a TRE, depends on its generation. One frequency,
identified by one (BCCH frequency/BSIC) couple, is reported into
one CI vector.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Configuring a multiple of 14 as value allows optimizing the

block usage in the RMS measurements returned to OMC in the
performance counters.
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 42 154 84
External Comment - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.

- Significant only if EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC is enabled.
- A G3 TRE supports up to 84 (BCCH frequency/BSIC) couples;
others up to 154 couples.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 151 / 1278

5.1.37 (SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD) - (SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD)
Parameter Name HMI Name SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD
Logical Name SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD
Definition Period used to average the processor occupancy measurements.
Coding rules 8 bits, step size=1sec
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 16 10
152 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.38 (SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY) - (SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY)
Parameter Name HMI Name SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY
Logical Name SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY
Definition Delay added to SDCCH internal release when TCU processor load
is high.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 10 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 153 / 1278

5.1.39 (SDCCH_LOW_DELAY) - (SDCCH_LOW_DELAY)
Parameter Name HMI Name SDCCH_LOW_DELAY
Logical Name SDCCH_LOW_DELAY
Definition Delay added to SDCCH internal release when TCU processor load is
low.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 10 0
154 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.40 (SMS_INHIBIT) - (SMS_INHIBIT)
Parameter Name HMI Name SMS_INHIBIT
Logical Name SMS_INHIBIT
Definition This flag enables/disables SMS support.
Coding rules 0: SMS permitted, 1: SMS inhibited
Mandatory rules –
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 155 / 1278

5.1.41 (SSF) - (SSF)
Parameter Name HMI Name SSF
Logical Name SSF
Definition This parameter inditifies the numbering plan of the Signalling Point
Code.
Coding rules coded over 4 bits.only values 0, 4, 8 and 12 are defined : Value =
0, international network; Value = 4, Spare, reserved for international
use; Value = 8, National network; Value = 12 , Reserved for national
use
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 12 12
External Comment SSF (Sub-Service Field) is composed of 4 bits: 2bits for Network
Indicator and 2 spare bits.
156 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.42 (T_BTS_EST_CNF) - (T_BTS_EST_CNF)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_BTS_EST_CNF
Logical Name T_BTS_EST_CNF
Definition Supervision of the SAPI 3 Establishment procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 6553.5 4
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 157 / 1278

5.1.43 (T_BTS_RLS_CNF) - (T_BTS_RLS_CNF)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_BTS_RLS_CNF
Logical Name T_BTS_RLS_CNF
Definition Supervision of the SAPI 3 Release procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 6553.5 4
158 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.44 (T_CBC_READY) - (T_CBC_READY)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_CBC_READY
Logical Name T_CBC_READY
Definition Defines the maximum period during which the BSC tries to connect
to the CBC before issueing an alarm or returning CMD-MODE Resp.
Coding rules step size: 1 sec
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules T_CBC_READY > 8 * T_CONNECT
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 10 600 300
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 159 / 1278

5.1.45 (T_COUNT_I) - (T_COUNT_I)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_COUNT_I
Logical Name T_COUNT_I
Definition Supervision of the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction to
TCU overload.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 50 12
160 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.46 (T_i) - (T_i)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_i
Logical Name T_i
Definition Duration of SSP or SPI condition that triggers an Internal Reset

procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 120 22
External Comment Some "slow" MSC (e.g. legacy MSC) may take more than one minute
to reply the BSC request (e.g. the SST message sent by the BSC).
If the BSC is connected to such kind of "slow" MSC, increasing the
T_i value up to 120 seconds may be necessary. Otherwise after T_i
expiry, the BSC triggers an unexpected Internal Reset procedure.
This leads to telecom outage for several minutes.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 161 / 1278

5.1.47 (T_LB_OV) - (T_LB_OV)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_LB_OV
Logical Name T_LB_OV
Definition Supervision of the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction
to FU overload.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0.1 25.5 10
162 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.48 (T_OVL_MSC) - (T_OVL_MSC)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_OVL_MSC
Logical Name T_OVL_MSC
Definition Minimum delay between two consecutive OVERLOAD messages

sent to the MSC.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0.1 6553.5 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 163 / 1278

5.1.49 (T_RCR_ACK) - (T_RCR_ACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_RCR_ACK
Logical Name T_RCR_ACK
Definition Supervision of the RF Channel Release procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 6553.5 5
164 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.50 (T_SMSCB_RESP) - (T_SMSCB_RESP)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_SMSCB_RESP
Logical Name T_SMSCB_RESP
Definition Maximum waiting time to get a response from the BTS to a primitive.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 1 10 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 165 / 1278

5.1.51 (T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL) - (T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL
Logical Name T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL
Definition This timer defines the time that, upon reception of a BSCGP BSC
Shared DTM Information Indication message indicating that the TCH
resource allocated to a DTM capable MS is being released at the
BSC side, the MFS shall wait before releasing the TCH resource
in its turn.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
ms 0 5000 1000
External Comment The value "0" indicates that, upon reception of a BSCGP BSC
Shared DTM Information Indication message, the MFS shall release
immediately the related TCH resource.
166 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.52 (T1_0858) - (T1_0858)
Parameter Name HMI Name T1_0858
Logical Name T1_0858
Definition Delay during which, after reception of an OVERLOAD from the BTS,
a new OVERLOAD is ignored.
Mandatory rules T1_0858 < T2_0858
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 3 6553.5 30
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 167 / 1278

5.1.53 (T2_0858) - (T2_0858)
Parameter Name HMI Name T2_0858
Logical Name T2_0858
Definition Minimum delay between debarring of an access class, in the case

where the BTS stops sending OVERLOAD.
Mandatory rules T2_0858 > T1_0858
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 3 6553.5 50
168 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.54 (T9101) - (T9101)
Logical Name T9101
Definition Supervision of the SCCP connection release procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 6553.5 10
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 169 / 1278

5.1.55 (T9103) - (T9103)
Logical Name T9103
Definition Supervision of the Channel Activation procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 6553.5 3
170 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.56 (T9108) - (T9108)
Logical Name T9108
Definition Supervision of the Physical Context procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 6553.5 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 171 / 1278

5.1.57 (T9110) - (T9110)
Logical Name T9110
Definition Guards the response of the MSC when no resources are

allocated to the SCCP connection (started on the reception
of CONN_IND(SCCP_CON_REQ) not carrying a HANDOVER
REQUEST message and stopped when a HANDOVER REQUEST
message is received on the same SCCP connection as the
SCCP_CON_REQ message). Guards also the response of the MSC
when a HANDOVER FAILURE or ASSIGNMENT FAILURE message
has been sent (stopped when a HANDOVER REQUEST or CLEAR
COMMAND message is received).
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules T9110 << max [T(ias), T(iar)].
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 6553.5 20
172 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.58 (TCH_INFO_PERIOD) - (TCH_INFO_PERIOD)
Parameter Name HMI Name TCH_INFO_PERIOD
Logical Name TCH_INFO_PERIOD
Definition Periodicity of TCH usage information update in the BSC.
Coding rules stepsize = 0.1
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
sec 2 25.5 5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 173 / 1278

5.1.59 (THR_LB_OV) - (THR_LB_OV)
Parameter Name HMI Name THR_LB_OV
Logical Name THR_LB_OV
Definition Counter threshold for triggering global defence actions in the BSC
upon FU overload.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 50 10
174 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.60 (THRESHOLD_1_0) - (THRESHOLD_1_0)
Parameter Name HMI Name THRESHOLD_1_0
Logical Name THRESHOLD_1_0
Definition Free buffer thresholds separating "no overload" condition and

"overload level 1" condition when pointer P points at position 0.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules THRESHOLD_1_0 >= THRESHOLD_2_0
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 25
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 175 / 1278


Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 28
176 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 55
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 177 / 1278


Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 31
178 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 34
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 179 / 1278


Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 37
180 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 40
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 181 / 1278


Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 43
182 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 46
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 183 / 1278


Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 49
184 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 52
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 185 / 1278

Definition Free buffer thresholds separating "overload level 1" condition and
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules THRESHOLD_2_0 <= THRESHOLD_1_0
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 22
186 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 25
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 187 / 1278

Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 52
188 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 28
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 189 / 1278

Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 31
190 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 34
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 191 / 1278

Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 37
192 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 40
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 193 / 1278

Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 43
194 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 46
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 195 / 1278

Coding rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 49
196 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.82 (TL_TCUA) - (TL_TCUA)
Parameter Name HMI Name TL_TCUA
Logical Name TL_TCUA
Definition Minimum delay between two consecutive TCU load increaseby the
local overload controller.
Mandatory rules TL_TCUA >TS_TCUA
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0.1 50 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 197 / 1278

5.1.83 (TL0) - (TL0)
Parameter Name HMI Name TL0
Logical Name TL0
Definition Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level. The TCU is in "Low

Overload" state if its Processor Occupancy Level is higher or equal
to TL0 and less than TL3." The TCU is in "No Overload" state if its
Processor Occupancy Level is less than TL0.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules TL0 < TL3 < TL4
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 60
198 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.84 (TL1) - (TL1)
Logical Name TL1
Definition BSC processor occupancy threshold used to decrement pointer P

on buffer occupancy thresholds.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules TL1 < TL2
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 70
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 199 / 1278

5.1.85 (TL2) - (TL2)
Logical Name TL2
Definition BSC processor occupancy threshold used to increment pointer P

on buffer occupancy thresholds.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules TL3 > TL4
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 85
200 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.86 (TL3) - (TL3)
Logical Name TL3
Definition Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level:

1) In upward direction, the TCU Overload State is in "High Overload"
state if "TL3 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL4";
2) In downward direction, the TCU Overload State is still in "Very High
Overload" State if "TL3 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL4";
3) In downward direction, the TCU Overload State is in "Low
Overload" state if "TL0 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL3.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules T0 < TL3 < TL4
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 75
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 201 / 1278

5.1.87 (TL4) - (TL4)
Logical Name TL4
Definition Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level. The TCU is in "Very

High Overload" state if its Processor Occupancy Level is higher or
equal to TL4.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules TL4 > TL3 > TL0
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 95
202 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.1.88 (TRG_SDCCH) - (TRG_SDCCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name TRG_SDCCH
Logical Name TRG_SDCCH
Definition Controls if local overload controller is triggered upon SDCCH

overload.
Coding rules 1 for TCU, 0 for others
Mandatory rules –
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC proc
None 0 1 1
External Comment This parameter is set by default to 1 for TCUs. It shall be set to 0
for other BSC processors
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 203 / 1278

5.1.89 (TS_TCUA) - (TS_TCUA)
Parameter Name HMI Name TS_TCUA
Logical Name TS_TCUA
Definition Minimum delay between two consecutive TCU load reduction by the
local overload controller.
Mandatory rules TS_TCUA < TL_TCUA
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0.1 50 10
204 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2 Site (CAE)

5.2.1 (A_LEV_HO) - (A_LEV_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name A_LEV_HO
Logical Name A_LEV_HO
Definition Window size for level averages for handover.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules A_LEV_HO + W_LEV_HO < 32
Recommended rules A_LEV_HO = 2 x A_LEV_PC. A_PBGT_HO = 2 x A_LEV_HO
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 1 31 8
Cell Type Dependent Single 8
Umbrella 8
Concentric 8
Concentric Umbrella 8
Microcell 4
Minicell 8
Extended inner cell 8
Extended outer cell 8
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 205 / 1278

5.2.2 (A_LEV_MCHO) - (A_LEV_MCHO)
Parameter Name HMI Name A_LEV_MCHO
Logical Name A_LEV_MCHO
Definition Window size for level averages for microcell handover.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules A_LEV_MCHO + W_LEV_MCHO < 16
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 1 15 2
Cell Type Dependent Single N/A
Umbrella N/A
Concentric N/A
Concentric Umbrella N/A
Microcell 2
Minicell N/A
Extended inner cell N/A
Extended outer cell N/A
206 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.3 (A_LEV_PC) - (A_LEV_PC)
Parameter Name HMI Name A_LEV_PC
Logical Name A_LEV_PC
Definition Window size for level averages for power control.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules A_LEV_PC + W_LEV_PC < 32
Recommended rules A_LEV_HO = 2 x A_LEV_PC
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 1 31 4
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 207 / 1278

5.2.4 (A_PBGT_DR) - (A_PBGT_DR)
Parameter Name HMI Name A_PBGT_DR
Logical Name A_PBGT_DR
Definition Window size for neighbour cell level averages for forced directed retry.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 1 15 4
208 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.5 (A_PBGT_HO) - (A_PBGT_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name A_PBGT_HO
Logical Name A_PBGT_HO
Definition Window size for averaging neighbour cell levels and averaging
current cell levels for power budget calculation.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules A_PBGT_HO + W_PBGT_HO < 32
Recommended rules A_PBGT_HO = 2 x A_LEV_HO
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 1 31 16
External Comment should be set to 6 in suburban area, to 8 in urban area and to 12

in rural area
Umbrella 12
Concentric 12
Microcell 6
Minicell 12
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 209 / 1278

5.2.6 (A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR) - (A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR)
Parameter Name HMI Name A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR
Logical Name A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR
Definition Quality averaging window size for AMR-NB FR-to-HR channel

adaptation (handover Cause 27).
Coding rules step size = 1 Samfr
Mandatory rules A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR >= A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 1 61 61
210 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.7 (A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR) - (A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR)
Parameter Name HMI Name A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR
Logical Name A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR
Definition Quality averaging window size for AMR-NB HR-to-FR channel

adaptation.
Mandatory rules A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR >= A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 1 61 8
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 211 / 1278

5.2.8 (A_QUAL_HO) - (A_QUAL_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name A_QUAL_HO
Logical Name A_QUAL_HO
Definition Window size for quality averages for handover.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules A_QUAL_HO + W_QUAL_HO < 32
Recommended rules A_QUAL_HO = 2 x A_QUAL_PC
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 1 31 8
Umbrella 8
Concentric 8
Microcell 4
Minicell 8
212 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.9 (A_QUAL_PC) - (A_QUAL_PC)
Parameter Name HMI Name A_QUAL_PC
Logical Name A_QUAL_PC
Definition Window size for quality averages for power control.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules A_QUAL_PC + W_QUAL_PC < 32
Recommended rules A_QUAL_HO = 2 x A_QUAL_PC
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 1 31 4
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 213 / 1278

5.2.10 (A_RANGE_HO) - (A_RANGE_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name A_RANGE_HO
Logical Name A_RANGE_HO
Definition Window size for distance averages.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 1 31 8
214 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.11 (A_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (A_TRAFFIC_LOAD)
Parameter Name HMI Name A_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Logical Name A_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Definition Window size for load averages.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 16 12
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
4 4 8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 215 / 1278

5.2.12 (AC 0) - (AC_0)
Parameter Name HMI Name AC 0
Logical Name AC_0
Definition Indicates if Access Class 0 is barred.
Coding rules 0: not barred, 1: barred
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
216 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.13 (AC 1) - (AC_1)
Logical Name AC_1
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 217 / 1278

5.2.14 (AC 11) - (AC_11)
Logical Name AC_11
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
218 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.15 (AC 12) - (AC_12)
Logical Name AC_12
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 219 / 1278

5.2.16 (AC 13) - (AC_13)
Logical Name AC_13
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
220 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.17 (AC 14) - (AC_14)
Logical Name AC_14
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 221 / 1278

5.2.18 (AC 15) - (AC_15)
Logical Name AC_15
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
222 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.19 (AC 2) - (AC_2)
Logical Name AC_2
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 223 / 1278

5.2.20 (AC 3) - (AC_3)
Logical Name AC_3
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
224 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.21 (AC 4) - (AC_4)
Logical Name AC_4
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 225 / 1278

5.2.22 (AC 5) - (AC_5)
Logical Name AC_5
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
226 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.23 (AC 6) - (AC_6)
Logical Name AC_6
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 227 / 1278

5.2.24 (AC 7) - (AC_7)
Logical Name AC_7
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
228 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.25 (AC 8) - (AC_8)
Logical Name AC_8
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 229 / 1278

5.2.26 (AC 9) - (AC_9)
Logical Name AC_9
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
230 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.27 (ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST) - (ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST)
Parameter Name HMI Name ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST
Logical Name ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST
Definition Enables/disables the addition of the legacy HR codec type in the list
of supported codec type provided to the TFO remote partner for a
given AMR-NB call, when that call is currently established in Half
Rate for cell load reason and when TFO is possible for that call (TFO
on AMR-NB supported by the TC and configured in the cell).
Coding rules 0: HR SV1 is never provided in the list of supported codec types.
1: HR SV1 may be provided (if supported by the MS and configured
in the cell) in the list of supported codec types, in addition to HR SV3.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment - Significant if EN_TFO_AMR_NB is enabled

- TFO on AMR-NB function is available on BSC Evolution only.
calls are not disrupted. Change applied only on new AMR-NB call
allocated in Half Rate after modification
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 231 / 1278

5.2.28 (ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM) -
(ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM)
Parameter Name HMI Name ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM
Logical Name ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM
Definition Indicates if C2 cell selection parameters are present in

SYS_INFO_7&8 or SYS_INFO_4.
Coding rules 1bit; 0= the SI 4 rest octets, if present, are used to derive the value of
PI and possibly C2 parameters.
1= the value of PI and possibly C2 parameters in a SYS INFO TYPE
or message 8 are used
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
232 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.29 (AG_PREMPT_PCH) - (AG_PREMPT_PCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name AG_PREMPT_PCH
Logical Name AG_PREMPT_PCH
Definition Flag to enable pre-emption of Paging sub-channels for Access Grant

messages when there is one remaining free AGCH block.
Coding rules 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled
Mandatory rules Let’s define the free AGCH blocks as the number of blocks remaining
for the AGCH messages when the BCCH extended block and NCH
blocks have been excluded.
- If there is no free AGCH block then the flag is not used (pre-emption
mandatory, default
value 0 is not used by BTS )
- If there is only one free AGCH block then AG_PREMPT_PCH =1 or
0 (pre-emption allowed)
- If there is more than one free AGCH then AG_PREMPT_PCH = 0
(pre-emption forbidden).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 233 / 1278

5.2.30 (ALLOC_ANYWAY) - (ALLOC_ANYWAY)
Parameter Name HMI Name ALLOC_ANYWAY
Logical Name ALLOC_ANYWAY
Definition Controls whether a queued request can be allocated on free

resource at expiry of its queuing timer independently of the threshold
NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment only relevant when NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO > 0
234 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.31 (AMR_FR_HYST) - (AMR_FR_HYST)
Parameter Name HMI Name AMR_FR_HYST
Logical Name AMR_FR_HYST
Definition Hysteresis for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation.
Coding rules step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 15 = 7.5 dB
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16
dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_FR_HYST +
AMR_FR_THR_i <= 16dB (with i = 1...3).
The recommended value for the preferred AMR FR
configurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via the
PREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter is:
AMR configuration 1, 8, 9, 10, 12 and 14: 2 dB.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 7.5 2
External Comment Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset
(12.2kbit/s, 7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s).
Significant only if EN_AMR_FR is set to TRUE.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 235 / 1278

5.2.32 (AMR_FR_SUBSET) - (AMR_FR_SUBSET)
Parameter Name HMI Name AMR_FR_SUBSET
Logical Name AMR_FR_SUBSET
Definition Bitmap (8 bits) defining the codec subset that shall be used for
AMR-NB FR calls (up to 4 codecs selected by the operator or codecs
associated to the selected preferred AMR configuration).
Coding rules bit 8 (most significant)=1: 12,2 kbit/s is part of the subset;
bit 7=1: 10,2 kbit/s is part of the subset;
bit 1 (least significant)=1: 4,75 kbit/s is part of the subset.
AMR configuration 0 is composed of the codec: 4.75 Kbit/sec

AMR configuration 1 is composed of the codec: 12.20, 7.40, 5.90
and 4.75 Kbit/sec
AMR configuration 8 is composed of the codec: 5.90 and 4.75
Kbit/sec
AMR configuration 9 is composed of the codec: 6.70, 5.90 and 4.75
Kbit/sec
and 4.75 Kbit/sec
and 4.75 Kbit/sec
and 4.75 Kbit/sec
(The list of all the 16 standardized AMR-NB FR configurations are
given in 3GPP TS 28.062)
Mandatory rules In one subset a maximum of 4 codec modes can be chosen (a

maximum of 4 bits can be set to 1).
Recommended rules The AMR configuration 1 is especially recommended for calls

between GERAN and UMTS, because it leads in all call cases to
TFO/TrFO compatible connections with optimal voice quality.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
236 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

None 1 240 164
External Comment - Default value corresponds to an optimal codec subset:12.2kbit/s,

7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s
- The AMR-NB FR configurations 11, 13 and 15 (allowing the
optimization mode) are not supported by the Alcatel-Lucent BSS.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 237 / 1278

5.2.33 (AMR_FR_THR_1) - (AMR_FR_THR_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name AMR_FR_THR_1
Logical Name AMR_FR_THR_1
Definition Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between lowest

codec mode and second lowest codec mode.
Mandatory rules AMR_FR_THR_1 <= AMR_FR_THR_2
AMR_FR_THR_1 <= 16dB.
The recommended value for the preferred AMR FR
PREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter is:
AMR configuration 1, 8, 9, 10, 12 and 14: 4 dB.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 31.5 6.5
(12.2kbit/s, 7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s). AMR_FR_THR_1 is not used if less
than 2 codecs are in the AMR FR subset.
238 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between second

lowest codec mode and third lowest codec mode.
Mandatory rules AMR_FR_THR_3 >= AMR_FR_THR_2 >= AMR_FR_THR_1
The recommended values for the preferred AMR FR
PREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter are:
AMR configuration 1 and 14: 6.5 dB;
AMR configuration 9, 10 and 12: 5.5 dB.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 31.5 11.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 239 / 1278

Definition Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between third

lowest codec mode and fourth lowest codec mode.
Mandatory rules AMR_FR_THR_3 >= AMR_FR_THR_2
The recommended values for the preferred AMR FR
PREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter are:
AMR configuration 1 and 14: 11.5 dB;
AMR configuration 10: 6.5 dB;
AMR configuration 12: 8 dB.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 31.5 11.5
240 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.36 (AMR_HR_HYST) - (AMR_HR_HYST)
Parameter Name HMI Name AMR_HR_HYST
Logical Name AMR_HR_HYST
Definition Hysteresis for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation.
Mandatory rules –
dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_HR_HYST +
AMR_HR_THR_i <= 16dB (with i = 1...3).
The recommended value for the preferred AMR HR
PREF_CONFIG_HR_AMR_NB parameter is:
AMR configuration 1, 8, 9, 10: 2 dB.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 7.5 2
Significant only if EN_AMR_HR is set to TRUE.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 241 / 1278

5.2.37 (AMR_HR_SUBSET) - (AMR_HR_SUBSET)
Parameter Name HMI Name AMR_HR_SUBSET
Logical Name AMR_HR_SUBSET
Definition Bitmap (6 bits) defining the codec subset that shall be used for
AMR-NB HR calls (up to 4 codecs selected by the operator or codecs
associated to the selected preferred AMR configuration).
Coding rules Coded on 1 byte.

bit 8 (most significant) = 0
bit 7 = 0;
bit 6 =1: 7,95 kbit/s is part of the subset;
bit 1 (least significant)=1: 4,75 kbit/s is part of the subset;

Kbit/sec
AMR configuration 8 is composed of the codec: 5.90 and 4.75
Kbit/sec
Kbit/sec
and 4.75 Kbit/sec
(The list of all the 9 standardized AMR-NB HR configurations are
given in 3GPP TS 28.062)
Mandatory rules - In one subset a maximum of 4 codec modes can be chosen (a

maximum of 4 bits can be set to 1).
- The subset shall not contain only 7.4 kbit/s codec mode. As
consequence, the AMR configuration 4 is forbidden too.
Recommended rules The AMR configuration 1 is especially recommended for calls

between GERAN and UMTS, because it leads in all call cases to
TFO/TrFO compatible connections with optimal voice quality.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 1 60 22
242 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

External Comment - Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset
- The codec mode 7.95 kbit/s (and AMR configuration 5, as
consequence) is not supported by the Alcatel-Lucent BSS.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 243 / 1278

5.2.38 (AMR_HR_THR_1) - (AMR_HR_THR_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name AMR_HR_THR_1
Logical Name AMR_HR_THR_1
Definition Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between lowest

codec mode and second lowest codec mode.
Mandatory rules AMR_HR_THR_1 <= AMR_HR_THR_2
AMR_HR_THR_1 <= 16dB.
The recommended values for the preferred AMR HR
PREF_CONFIG_HR_AMR_NB parameter are:
AMR configuration 1, 9 and 10: 10.5 dB;
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 31.5 11
(7.4kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s, 5.15kbit/s). AMR_HR_THR_1 is not used if less
than 2 codecs are in the AMR HR subset.
244 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between second

lowest codec mode and third lowest codec mode.
Mandatory rules AMR_HR_THR_3 >= AMR_HR_THR_2 >= AMR_HR_THR_1
AMR configuration 1, 9 and 10: 12 dB.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 31.5 12.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 245 / 1278

Definition Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between third

lowest codec mode and fourth lowest codec mode.
Mandatory rules AMR_HR_THR_3 >= AMR_HR_THR_2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 31.5 12.5
246 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.41 (AMR_START_MODE_FR) - (AMR_START_MODE_FR)
Parameter Name HMI Name AMR_START_MODE_FR
Logical Name AMR_START_MODE_FR
Definition Indicates the codec used at the beginning of a AMR-NB FR call, until
codec mode adaptation is started by the BTS.
Coding rules 0: implicit rule is used for initial codec mode; 1: lowest codec mode
of the subset; 2: second lowest codec mode (used if the subset
contains more than one codec mode); 3: third lowest codec mode
(used if the subset contains more than two codec modes); 4: highest
codec mode (used if the subset contains four codec modes)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 0 4 0
External Comment When the TFO function is enabled in case of AMR narrow band
codec (EN_TFO_AMR_NB) in the cell, the Alcatel-Lucent BSS
always considers the implicit rule is used for the initial codec mode.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 247 / 1278

5.2.42 (AMR_START_MODE_HR) - (AMR_START_MODE_HR)
Parameter Name HMI Name AMR_START_MODE_HR
Logical Name AMR_START_MODE_HR
Definition Indicates the codec used at the beginning of a AMR-NB HR call, until
codec mode adaptation is started by the BTS.
Coding rules 0: implicit rule is used for initial codec mode; 1: lowest codec mode
of the subset; 2: second lowest codec mode (used if the subset
contains more than one codec mode); 3: third lowest codec mode
(used if the subset contains more than two codec modes); 4: highest
codec mode (used if the subset contains four codec modes)
Mandatory rules If AMR_START_MODE_HR is explicit (I.e. not equal to 0), the

chosen codec mode shall not correspond to 7.40 kbit/s.
Recommended rules Use codec mode 6.7 kbit/s as start mode for AMR-NB HR should
be avoided.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 0 4 0
External Comment When the TFO function is enabled in case of AMR narrow band
codec (EN_TFO_AMR_NB) in the cell, the Alcatel-Lucent BSS
always considers the implicit rule is used for the initial codec mode.
248 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.43 (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1
Logical Name AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1
Definition Hysteresis for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation, for transition
between lowest codec mode and second lowest codec mode.
Mandatory rules AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1

+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1<=AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2
+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
Recommended rules As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB,
following rules is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1
+ AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 <= 16dB
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 7.5 2.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 249 / 1278

5.2.44 (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2)
Parameter Name HMI Name AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
Logical Name AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
Definition Hysteresis for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation, for transition
between highest codec mode and second lowest codec mode
Mandatory rules AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1

+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1<=AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2
+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
following rules is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
+ AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 <= 16dB
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 7.5 2.5
250 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.45 (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1
Logical Name AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1
Definition Threshold for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation between

lowest codec mode and second
lowest codec mode.
Mandatory rules - AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 < AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2

- AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1
<= AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
following rule is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1 +
AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 <= 16dB
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 31.5 6
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 251 / 1278

5.2.46 (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2)
Parameter Name HMI Name AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2
Logical Name AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2
Definition Threshold for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation between

second lowest codec mode and highest codec mode
Mandatory rules - AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 < AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2

- AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1
<= AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
following rule is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 +
AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 <= 16dB
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 31.5 8
252 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.47 (AUTO_BAR_BSS_OVERLOAD) - (EN_BSS_OVRL_CLASS_BAR)
Parameter Name HMI Name AUTO_BAR_BSS_OVERLOAD
Logical Name EN_BSS_OVRL_CLASS_BAR
Definition This flag enables/disables access class automatic barring upon

BTS/BSC overload.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 253 / 1278

5.2.48 (AUTO_BAR_CELL) - (AUT_BAR)
Parameter Name HMI Name AUTO_BAR_CELL
Logical Name AUT_BAR
Definition This flag enables/inhibits automatic barring of cell.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
254 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.49 (AUTO_BAR_EC) - (EC_BAR)
Parameter Name HMI Name AUTO_BAR_EC
Logical Name EC_BAR
Definition This flag enables/disables automatic barring of Emergency Class.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 255 / 1278

5.2.50 (Automatic AC barring on TCH load) - (EN_LOAD_MNGT)
Parameter Name HMI Name Automatic AC barring on TCH load
Logical Name EN_LOAD_MNGT
Definition This flag enables/disables automatic barring of access classes on

TCH load criterion.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
256 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.51 (B_NUM) - (B_NUM)
Parameter Name HMI Name B_NUM
Logical Name B_NUM
Definition Number of BLOCK/UNBLOCK messages sent in one burst.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 35 5
External Comment Default value depends on MSC type.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 257 / 1278

5.2.52 (BCC) - (BCC (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name BCC
Logical Name BCC (BSC)
Definition BTS colour code of the cell.
Mandatory rules Equal to BCC (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
External Comment Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here
is for implementation purposes.
258 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.53 (BCC) - (BCC (MFS))
Logical Name BCC (MFS)
Definition BTS colour code of the cell.
Mandatory rules Equal to BCC (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 259 / 1278

5.2.54 (BCC) - (BCC (n))
Logical Name BCC (n)
Definition BTS colour code of the adjacent cell.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
None 0 7 0
260 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.55 (BCCH_ARFCN) - (BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name BCCH_ARFCN
Logical Name BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC)
Definition Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number of the

frequency used as BCCH in the adjacent cell.
Coding rules The coded default value of -1 is for implementation purposes only;
this dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any
BCCH yet.
Mandatory rules - BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC) = BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS)
For Evolium serving cell:

- there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of
all the target cells for reselection (no matter the 2G/3G neighborhood
of the serving cell for reselection) .
- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is 2G only, then
there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all
the target cells for handover.
- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is mixed 2G/3G,
then there shall be no more than 31 different BCCH 2G frequencies
for the set of all the target cells for handover.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1023 None
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 261 / 1278

5.2.56 (BCCH_ARFCN) - (BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name BCCH_ARFCN
Logical Name BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS)
Definition Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number of the

frequency used as BCCH in the adjacent cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules - BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC) = BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS)
For Evolium serving cell:

- there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of
all the target cells for reselection (no matter the 2G/3G neighborhood
of the serving cell for reselection) .
- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is 2G only, then
there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all
the target cells for handover.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
None 0 1023 None
262 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.57 (BCCH_EXT) - (BCCH_EXT)
Parameter Name HMI Name BCCH_EXT
Logical Name BCCH_EXT
Definition This flag enables / disables the use of extended BCCH.
Coding rules 0: false, 1:true
Mandatory rules -When EN_SOLSA is enabled, the BCCH_EXT shall be set to true.
-When EN_VGCS is disabled :
. if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= 1
-When EN_VGCS is enabled :
. if BCCH_EXT = false, BS_AG_BLKS_RES >=
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
. if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
Recommended rules The support of extended BCCH (parameter BCCH_EXT) is HIGHLY

recommended in cells having adjacent cells in several frequency
bands and at least 18 adjacent BCCH within the same band.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 263 / 1278

5.2.58 (BS_AG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_AG_BLKS_RES
Logical Name BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC)
Definition Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the access grant channel
(AGCH).
Coding rules coded on 3 bits (000 : 0, ...111 : 7)
Mandatory rules -BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS) = BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC) for a given

cell
-when CCCH_CONF=0 and CBCH is configured in the cell,
BS_AG_BLKS_RES>0
- when CCCH_CONF=2, max value of BS_AG_BLKS_RES is 7 and
BS_AG_BLKS_RES must be > 0 if CBCH is configured in the cell.
. if BCCH_EXT = false, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >=
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 4
External Comment - Maximum and Default values given for CCCH_CONF=0

- For CCCH_CONF=1, max=2, def=1
- Parameter change:
no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted.
But any modification impacts Paging (paging queues are reset and
paging is suspended until the reconfiguration is completed).
264 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.59 (BS_P_CON_ACK) - (BS_P_CON_ACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_P_CON_ACK
Logical Name BS_P_CON_ACK
Definition Supervision of the BS Power Control procedure.
Coding rules step size=1 (2 x Samfr)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
2 x Samfr 0 31 3
Umbrella 3
Concentric 3
Microcell 2
Minicell 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 265 / 1278

5.2.60 (BS_P_CON_INT) - (BS_P_CON_INT)
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_P_CON_INT
Logical Name BS_P_CON_INT
Definition Minimum delay between two consecutive BS power commands.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
2 x Samfr 0 31 1
Umbrella 1
Concentric 1
Microcell 0
Minicell 1
266 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.61 (BS_PA_MFRMS) - (BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_PA_MFRMS
Logical Name BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC)
Definition Number of 51 frame multiframes between consecutive occurrences

of a Paging Group.
Coding rules coded on 3 bits (000 : 2, ... 111: 9)
Mandatory rules BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC) = BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS) for a given cell
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 2 9 5
External Comment The bigger this parameter is, the lesser the MS power consumption
is.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 267 / 1278

5.2.62 (BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION) - (BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION)
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION
Logical Name BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION
Definition This parameter defines the power reduction, expressed in 0.1dB,

applied on the output power (after leveling). In a concentric or
multi-band cell, this attenuation applies on the output power of the
TRX(s) of the outer zone.
Coding rules step size = 0.1dB.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 31.9 0
268 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.63 (BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER) -
(BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER)
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER
Logical Name BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER
Definition This parameter defines the power reduction, expressed in 0.1dB,

applied on the output power of the TRX(s) of the inner zone in a
concentric or multi-band cell (after leveling).
Coding rules step size = 0.1dB.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 31.9 0
External Comment The parameter value depends on configuration. The default value
indicated here is for implementation purposes
Umbrella N/A
Concentric #
Concentric Umbrella #
Microcell N/A
Minicell N/A
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 269 / 1278

5.2.64 (BS_TXPWR_MAX) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC))

When a cell is shared, the BS_TX_POWER_MAX and
BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER powers must always be defined against the
actual physical power of the main sector. If the actual power of the secondary
sector is lower than the actual power of the main sector, the operator has to
adjust the values of BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER
to avoid requiring too high an output power than is actually available.
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_TXPWR_MAX
Logical Name BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC)
Definition This parameter defines the power reduction relative to the attenuated
maximum GMSK output power of the BTS.
It is always set to 0 by the OMC.
A finer power attenuation, BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION defined in
step of 0.1dB, is managed instead.
Coding rules step size = 2dB. 0: 0 dB, 1: -2dB, ..., 15: -30dB
Mandatory rules Equal to BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -30 0 0
External Comment The BTS maximum allowed transmit power is defined relatively to
the sector maximum RF transmit power in GMSK (due to hardware
limitation).
270 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.65 (BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER
Logical Name BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER (BSC)
maximum GMSK output power of the TRX of the inner zone in a
concentric or multi-band cell.
A finer power attenuation, BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER
defined in step of 0.1dB, is managed instead.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -30 0 0
limitation).
The parameter value depends on configuration. The default value

indicated here is for implementation purposes.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 271 / 1278

Umbrella N/A
Concentric #
Microcell N/A
Minicell N/A
272 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.66 (BS_TXPWR_MIN) - (BS_TXPWR_MIN)
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_TXPWR_MIN
Logical Name BS_TXPWR_MIN
Definition This parameter defines the maximum value of the power attenuation
(so the minimum allowed transmission power) relative to the
attenuated maximum GMSK output power of the BTS.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -30 0 -24
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 273 / 1278

5.2.67 (BSC Primary X25 Address) - (BSC_X25_primary_address)
Parameter Name HMI Name BSC Primary X25 Address
Logical Name BSC_X25_primary_address
Definition BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules 0 to 15 characters string. *: default = empty string
Mandatory rules changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem OMC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 *
External Comment The minimum, maximum and default values indicated are only for
274 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.68 (BSC Primary X25 Address [1]) - (BSC_X25_primary_address_i [1])
Parameter Name HMI Name BSC Primary X25 Address [1]
Logical Name BSC_X25_primary_address_i [1]
Definition First character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules 1character of a string. default = blank character
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 275 / 1278

5.2.69 (BSC Primary X25 Address [10]) - (BSC_X25_primary_address_i

[10])
Definition Tenth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
276 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


[11])
Definition Eleventh character of BSC X25 primary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 277 / 1278


[12])
Definition Twelfth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
278 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


[13])
Definition Thirteenth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 279 / 1278


[14])
Definition Fourteenth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
280 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


[15])
Definition Fifteenth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 281 / 1278

Definition Second character of BSC X25 primary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
282 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Third character of BSC X25 primary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 283 / 1278

Definition Fourth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
284 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Fifth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 285 / 1278

Definition Sixth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
286 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Seventh character of BSC X25 primary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 287 / 1278

Definition Eighth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
288 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Ninth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 289 / 1278

5.2.83 (BSC Secondary X25 Address) - (BSC_X25_secondary_address)
Parameter Name HMI Name BSC Secondary X25 Address
Logical Name BSC_X25_secondary_address
Definition BSC X25 secondary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem OMC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 *
290 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.84 (BSC Secondary X25 Address [1]) -

(BSC_X25_secondary_address_i [1])
Parameter Name HMI Name BSC Secondary X25 Address [1]
Logical Name BSC_X25_secondary_address_i [1]
Definition First character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 291 / 1278


Definition Tenth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
292 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Definition Eleventh character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 293 / 1278


Definition Twelfth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
294 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Definition Thirteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 295 / 1278


Definition Fourteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
296 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Definition Fifteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 297 / 1278


Definition Second character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
298 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Definition Third character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 299 / 1278


Definition Fourth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
300 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Definition Fifth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 301 / 1278


Definition Sixth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
302 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Definition Seventh character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 303 / 1278


Definition Eighth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
304 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Definition Ninth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 305 / 1278

5.2.99 (BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND) - (BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND)
Parameter Name HMI Name BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND
Logical Name BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND
Definition Enables/disables the RF RESOURCE INDICATION processing by

the BSC.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
306 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.100 (BSIC) - (BSIC (GSM))
Parameter Name HMI Name BSIC
Logical Name BSIC (GSM)
Definition Concatenation of the NCC and the BCC.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Abstract
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None # # #
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 307 / 1278

5.2.101 (BTS_Queue_Length) - (BTS_Q_LENGTH)
Parameter Name HMI Name BTS_Queue_Length
Logical Name BTS_Q_LENGTH
Definition Maximum number of Assignment Requests and Handover Requests

that can be queued simultaneously.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 64 3
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
4 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
308 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.102 (CALL_RE_ESTABLISHMENT) - (RE)
Parameter Name HMI Name CALL_RE_ESTABLISHMENT
Logical Name RE
Definition This flag indicates to the MS if call reestablishment is allowed in the

cell.
Coding rules 0: allowed, 1: not allowed
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 309 / 1278

5.2.103 (Call_User_Data_Selector) - (Call_user_data_sel)
Parameter Name HMI Name Call_User_Data_Selector
Logical Name Call_user_data_sel
Definition Identifies the higher protocol selector for an outgoing connection.
Coding rules 0 to 16 bytes string
Mandatory rules Can be changed only when SMSCB_State is disabled
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 0
External Comment Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is
Each byte of the string can get a value in the range [0..255].
310 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.104 (Candidate cell priority) - (PRIORITY(0,n))
Parameter Name HMI Name Candidate cell priority
Logical Name PRIORITY(0,n)
Definition Priority of the cell n in the HO candidate cell evaluation process.
Coding rules 0: highest priority, 5: lowest priority
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance adj
None 0 5 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 311 / 1278

5.2.105 (CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION) -
(CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION)
Parameter Name HMI Name CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION
Logical Name CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION
Definition This parameter determines the condition on traffic load in the serving
cell to trigger a "general capture" handover.
Coding rules 0: Any load, 1: Not low, 2: High
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 2 0
312 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.106 (CBC Primary X25 Address) - (CBC_X25_primary_address)
Parameter Name HMI Name CBC Primary X25 Address
Logical Name CBC_X25_primary_address
Definition CBC X25 primary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 32
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 313 / 1278

5.2.107 (CBC Secondary X25 Address) - (CBC_X25_secondary_address)
Parameter Name HMI Name CBC Secondary X25 Address
Logical Name CBC_X25_secondary_address
Definition CBC X25 secondary address.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 32
314 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.108 (CBC_Operator) - (Operator)
Parameter Name HMI Name CBC_Operator
Logical Name Operator
Definition Identifies the CBC operator.
Coding rules 0 to 20 characters string (default = empty string) are sent by the
OMC on the OMC/BSC interface . BSC performs the padding of
OMC string with space characters on the right side of the string until
20 bytes are reached. At Upload, OMC RNL removes padded space
characters from the retrieved BSC value.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 32
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 315 / 1278

5.2.109 (CBC_Password) - (Password)
Parameter Name HMI Name CBC_Password
Logical Name Password
Definition CBC password.
Coding rules 0 to 20 characters string (default = empty string) are sent by the
OMC on the OMC/BSC interface. BSC performs the padding of OMC
string with space characters on the right side of the string until 20
bytes are reached. At Upload, OMC RNL removes padded space
characters from the retrieved BSC value.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 32
316 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.110 (CBC_Window) - (CBC_window)
Parameter Name HMI Name CBC_Window
Logical Name CBC_window
Definition Maximum number of outstanding primitives on the BSC/CBC

interface for both incoming and outgoing primitives.
Coding rules –

shall be set to "1" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1"
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 3 1
External Comment Default value corresponds to SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS1.

If SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS2, CBC_Window should be set to 3.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 317 / 1278

5.2.111 (CCCH_LOAD_IND_PERIOD) - (RACHRT)
Parameter Name HMI Name CCCH_LOAD_IND_PERIOD
Logical Name RACHRT
Definition Minimum delay between two consecutive sendings of CCCH LOAD

INDICATION messages.
Coding rules step size=1 (51mfr)
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules RACHRT > RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
51mfr 1 255 255
318 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.112 (CCCH_LOAD_MEAS_PERIOD) - (RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER)
Parameter Name HMI Name CCCH_LOAD_MEAS_PERIOD
Logical Name RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER
Definition Period over which CCCH load measurements are made.
Coding rules step size=1
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER < RACHRT
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
51mfr 1 255 32
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 319 / 1278

5.2.113 (Cell Type) - (Cell_Type)
Parameter Name HMI Name Cell Type
Logical Name Cell_Type
Definition Combination of CELL_DIMENSION_TYPE, CELL_LAYER_TYPE,

CELL_PARTITION_TYPE, CELL_RANGE for an OMC own cell.
Used for cell default parameter template.
Coding rules Single (0), Concentric (1), Umbrella (2), Micro (3), Umbrella
Concentric (4), Mini (5), Extended Inner (6), Extended Outer (7),
Mini Concentric (8), Micro Concentric (9), Indoor (10), Indoor
Concentric(11)
Mandatory rules - EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled when

CELL_TYPE is equal to "Extended inner" or "Extended outer".
A couple of mate cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have
the same LAC (respectively RAC when they are PS capable).
- The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric"
cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE is
"PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does not
apply to the external cells.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Abstract
SubSystem OMC
Instance cell
None * * #
External Comment *: possible values are:

- Single
- Umbrella
- Umbrella Concentric
- Micro
- Mini
- Micro Concentric
- Mini Concentric
- Indoor
- Indoor Concentric (labelled "Indoor Multiband" on the HMI)
- Extended Inner
- Extended Outer
320 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.114 (Cell Type) - (Cell_Type(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name Cell Type
Logical Name Cell_Type(n)
Definition Combination of CELL_DIMENSION_TYPE, CELL_LAYER_TYPE,

CELL_PARTITION_TYPE, CELL_RANGE for an adjacent cell (OMC
own cell or OMC external cell).
Coding rules Single (0), Concentric (1), Umbrella (2), Micro (3), Umbrella
Concentric (4), Mini (5), Extended Inner (6), Extended Outer (7),
Mini Concentric (8), Micro Concentric (9), Indoor (10), Indoor
Concentric(11), GAN(12)
Mandatory rules - EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled when

A couple of mate cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have
the same LAC (respectively RAC when they are PS capable).
- The "GAN" value is allowed only for external cells
Category Site (CAE)
Type Abstract
SubSystem OMC
Instance cell
None * * #
External Comment *: possible values are:

- Single
- Umbrella
- Umbrella Concentric
- Micro
- Mini
- Micro Concentric
- Mini Concentric
- Indoor
- Indoor Concentric (labelled "Indoor Multiband" on the HMI)
- Extended Inner
- Extended Outer
- GAN
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 321 / 1278

5.2.115 (CELL_BAR_QUALIFY) - (CELL_BAR_QUALIFY)
Parameter Name HMI Name CELL_BAR_QUALIFY
Logical Name CELL_BAR_QUALIFY
Definition Indicates the priority of the cell for cell selection.
Coding rules 0: normal priority, 1: low priority
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
322 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.116 (CELL_CIPH_SET) - (CELL_CIPH_SET)
Parameter Name HMI Name CELL_CIPH_SET
Logical Name CELL_CIPH_SET
Definition List of flag indicating what are the ciphering algorithms allowed by
the operator (each bit represents an A5 algorithm).
When several algorithms can be selected (depending on network
configuration, MS capabilities and operator choice), the one with
the highest A5 number is used.
Coding rules Coded as a 8 bits bitmap. Each bit indicates if corresponding

encryption algorithm is permitted.
Bit x=’0’ : algorithm A5/x not permitted
Bit x=’1’ : algorithm A5/x permitted
bit 0 : A5/0 (no ciphering)

bit 1 : A5/1.
bit 2 : A5/2
bit 3 : A5/3
bit 4 : A5/4
...
bit 7 : A5/7.
Mandatory rules The possible values are :

- A5/0
- A5/0 + A5/1
- A5/0 + A5/1 +A5/3
- The value A5/0 + A5/3 is not allowed because today not all mobiles
support A5/3.
- If CELL_CIPH_SET does not allow the A5/3 usage in the cell, then
EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY cannot be enabled.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Bitmap
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 255 1
External Comment A5/2 is not supported by the BSS.

In cells where EN_DTM = enabled, the algorithm A5/3 is not used
for MS, DTM capable but not supporting ciphering changes in DTM
mode.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 323 / 1278

324 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.117 (CELL_EVALUATION) - (CELL_EV)
Parameter Name HMI Name CELL_EVALUATION
Logical Name CELL_EV
Definition Handover cell evaluation process applied in the cell.
Coding rules 0: Order, 1: Grade
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
Cell Type Dependent Single grade (1)
Umbrella grade (1)
Concentric grade (1)
Concentric Umbrella grade (1)
Microcell order (0)
Minicell grade (1)
Extended inner cell grade (1)
Extended outer cell grade (1)
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 325 / 1278

5.2.118 (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) -
(CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)
Parameter Name HMI Name CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Definition Level hysteresis for cell reselection applied when the new cell is in a
different location area or, for a GPRS MS, in a different routing area,
or when a GPRS MS is in GMM ready state.
Coding rules step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits (000 : 0 dB, 111 : 14 dB)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 14 6
External Comment If the VGCS is licensed, the parameter is modifiable only via the
provisioning context of the OMC.
326 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.119 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) - (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET

(BSC))
Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (BSC)
Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS) = CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET

(BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 126 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 327 / 1278

5.2.120 (CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND) -
(CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND)
Parameter Name HMI Name CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND
Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND
Definition Indicates to the MS if parameters for C2 reselection criterion are

broadcast.
Coding rules 0: not present, 1: present
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
328 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.121 (CI) - (CI (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name CI
Logical Name CI (BSC)
Definition Cell Identity.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time
Equal to CI (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 65535 65535
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 329 / 1278

5.2.122 (CI) - (CI(n) (BSC))
Logical Name CI(n) (BSC)
Definition Cell Identity of adjacent cell.
Coding rules –
Equal to CI(n)(MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 65535 65535
330 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.123 (CI_SI) - (CI_SI)
Parameter Name HMI Name CI_SI
Logical Name CI_SI
Definition Specific Cell Identity to be broadcasted in the SI3 and SI6 messages
instead of the value of the other O&M parameter "CI".
Coding rules When set to "0", it indicates that the feature is de-activated, i.e the
existing CI is sent in SI3 and SI6 messages
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 65535 0
External Comment Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic
is not disrupted. But any modification impacts System Information
Broadcasting. Change applied immediately after modification, in
broadcasted SI3 messages and in dedicated SI6 messages of the
current calls.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 331 / 1278

5.2.124 (Circuit Identity Code) - (CIC)
Parameter Name HMI Name Circuit Identity Code
Logical Name CIC
Definition Circuit Identity Code of an A interface circuit.
Coding rules Coded over 16 bits: top 11 bits = pcm number, remaining 5 bits =
TS number
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance A ch
None 0 65535 65535
332 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.125 (DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGIN) - (DELTA_DEC_HO_margin)
Parameter Name HMI Name DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGIN
Logical Name DELTA_DEC_HO_margin
Definition Correction factor favouring handover cause "Power budget" when

traffic is high in the serving cell and low in neighbour cell(s).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 24 0
Umbrella 5 dB (5)
Concentric 5 dB (5)
Microcell 4 dB (4)
Minicell 5 dB (5)
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 333 / 1278

5.2.126 (DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN) - (DELTA_INC_HO_margin)
Parameter Name HMI Name DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN
Logical Name DELTA_INC_HO_margin
Definition Correction factor penalizing handover cause "Power budget" when

traffic is low in the serving cell and high in neighbour cell(s).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 24 0
Umbrella 5 dB (5)
Concentric 5 dB (5)
Microcell 4 dB (4)
Minicell 5 dB (5)
334 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.127 (Directed_Retry) - (EN_DR)
Parameter Name HMI Name Directed_Retry
Logical Name EN_DR
Definition This flag enables/disables the execution of Directed Retry.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 335 / 1278

5.2.128 (DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK) - (DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK)
Parameter Name HMI Name DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK
Definition This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-WB
GMSK speech calls.
Coding rules 0 : DL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK disabled,

1 : DL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK enabled
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules - The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_WB =1

- If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which
"dynamic power allocation" is applied (cf. BOP), then it is
recommended to enable the use of downlink DTX, so as to limit the
potential degradations during the downlink transmissions on the TSs
of the MC modules.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
336 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.129 (Downlink DTX) - (DOWNLINK_DTX_ENABLE)
Parameter Name HMI Name Downlink DTX
Logical Name DOWNLINK_DTX_ENABLE
Definition This flag defines if downlink DTX is allowed for FR and EFR calls.
Coding rules 0: DTX not allowed, 1: DTX allowed
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules - should be enabled when EN_TFO = 1

of the MC modules.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 337 / 1278

5.2.130 (DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_FR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_FR)
Parameter Name HMI Name DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_FR
Logical Name Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_FR
Definition This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-NB
FR speech calls.
Coding rules 0 : DL DTX for AMR FR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for AMR FR enabled
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules - The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1

of the MC modules.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
338 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.131 (DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_HR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_HR)
Parameter Name HMI Name DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_HR
Logical Name Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_HR
Definition This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-NB
HR speech calls.
Coding rules 0 : DL DTX for AMR HR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for AMR HR enabled
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules - The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1

of the MC modules.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 339 / 1278

5.2.132 (DOWNLINK_DTX_HR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_HR)
Parameter Name HMI Name DOWNLINK_DTX_HR
Logical Name Downlink_DTX_enable_HR
Definition This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for HR speech
calls.
Coding rules 0 : DL DTX for HR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for HR enabled
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules - should be enabled when EN_TFO = 1

of the MC modules.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
340 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.133 (DTX_FR_INDICATOR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_FR)
Parameter Name HMI Name DTX_FR_INDICATOR
Logical Name DTX_INDICATOR_FR
Definition Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM Phase 1 and 2 for FR. Applies
for all codec types except AMR-NB and AMR-WB.
Coding rules 0: MS May Use DTX for FR

1: MS Shall Use DTX for FR,
2: MS shall not use DTX for FR
Mandatory rules The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR /

DTX_INDICATOR_HR are possible (FR/HR):
may/shall, may/shall not, may/may, shall/shall, shall/shall not,
shall/may, shall not/shall and shall not/shall not.
The only combination that is NOT allowed is: DTX_INDICATOR_FR
= shall not and DTX_INDICATOR_HR = may, I.e. shall not/may.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem OMC
Instance cell
None 0 2 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 341 / 1278

5.2.134 (DTX_FR_INDICATOR_AMR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR)
Parameter Name HMI Name DTX_FR_INDICATOR_AMR
Logical Name DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR
Definition Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only for
AMR-NB FR.
Coding rules 0: MS may use DTX for AMR-NB FR,

1: MS shall use DTX for AMR-NB FR,
2: MS shall not use DTX for AMR-NB FR
Mandatory rules The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR /

DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR are possible (FR_AMR / HR_AMR):
The only combination that is NOT allowed is:
DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR = shall not and
DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR = may, I.e. shall not/may.
Recommended rules The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem OMC
Instance cell
None 0 2 2
342 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.135 (DTX_HR_INDICATOR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_HR)
Parameter Name HMI Name DTX_HR_INDICATOR
Logical Name DTX_INDICATOR_HR
Definition Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 for HR. Applies for all
codec types except AMR-NB and AMR-WB.
Coding rules 0: MS May Use DTX for HR

1: MS Shall Use DTX for HR,
2: MS shall not use DTX for HR
Mandatory rules The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR /

DTX_INDICATOR_HR are possible (FR/HR):
The only combination that is NOT allowed is: DTX_INDICATOR_FR
= shall not and DTX_INDICATOR_HR = may, I.e. shall not/may.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem OMC
Instance cell
None 0 2 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 343 / 1278

5.2.136 (DTX_HR_INDICATOR_AMR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR)
Parameter Name HMI Name DTX_HR_INDICATOR_AMR
Logical Name DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR
Definition Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only for
AMR-NB HR.
Coding rules 0: MS may use DTX for AMR-NB HR,

1: MS shall use DTX for AMR-NB HR,
2: MS shall not use DTX for AMR-NB HR
Mandatory rules The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR /

DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR are possible (FR_AMR / HR_AMR):
The only combination that is NOT allowed is:
DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR = shall not and
DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR = may, I.e. shall not/may.
Recommended rules The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem OMC
Instance cell
None 0 2 2
344 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.137 (DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK) -
(DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK)
Parameter Name HMI Name DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK
Definition Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only to
AMR-WB GMSK.
Coding rules 0= the MS may use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK,

1= the MS shall use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK,
2=the MS shall not use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_WB =1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 2 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 345 / 1278

5.2.138 (DWELL_TIME_STEP) - (DWELL_TIME_STEP)
Parameter Name HMI Name DWELL_TIME_STEP
Logical Name DWELL_TIME_STEP
Definition Step value for the modification (increasing or decreasing) of

MIN_DWELL_TIME.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
sec 0 30 2
346 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.139 (EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE) - (EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE)
Parameter Name HMI Name EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE
Logical Name EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE
Definition This parameter determines the cause filled in ASSIGNMENT

FAILURE sent in case of External Directed Retry.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 127 13
External Comment Default value depends on MSC type
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 347 / 1278

5.2.140 (EDR_MSG_ORDER) - (EDR_MSG_ORDER)
Parameter Name HMI Name EDR_MSG_ORDER
Logical Name EDR_MSG_ORDER
Definition This parameter determines the order of transmission of

ASSIGNMENT FAILURE and HANDOVER REQUIRED on the A
interface in case of an External Directed Retry.
Coding rules 0: Ass Failure before HO Reqd, 1: Ass Failure after HO Reqd
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
348 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.141 (EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED) - (EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED)
Parameter Name HMI Name EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED
Logical Name EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED
Definition This flag indicates whether or not Assignment Request is maintained

in queue during External Directed Retry attempt.
Coding rules 0: Request not maintained in queue, 1: Request maintained in queue
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 349 / 1278

5.2.142 (EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL) - (EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL)
Parameter Name HMI Name EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL
Logical Name EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL
Definition This flag indicates whether ASSIGNMENT FAILURE is sent to the

MSC in case of External Directed Retry.
Coding rules 0: Assignment Failure not sent, 1: Assignment Failure sent
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
350 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.143 (EFR_ENABLED) - (EFR_ENABLED)
Parameter Name HMI Name EFR_ENABLED
Logical Name EFR_ENABLED
Definition This flag indicates whether the operation of enhanced full rate (EFR)
is allowed in the cell.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 351 / 1278

5.2.144 (EMERGENCY_CALL) - (EC)
Parameter Name HMI Name EMERGENCY_CALL
Logical Name EC
Definition Indicates if Emergency calls are allowed for all access classes or
only for access classes 11 to 15.
Coding rules 0: all access classes, 1: access classes 11 to 15 only
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
352 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.145 (EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU) - (EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU
Logical Name EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU
Definition Defines if the limitation of TRE is static or dynamic.

For static limitation only Nb FR TRE + 2 x DR TRE < 200 is allowed.
For dynamic limitation only Nb TRE < 200 is allowed.
Coding rules 0: static

1:dynamic
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 353 / 1278

5.2.146 (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR) - (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR
Logical Name EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR
Definition This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR-NB FR-to-HR

channel adaptation (Handover Cause 27). According to the load
of the serving cell (high or normal), the handover is triggered with
different thresholds values.
Mandatory rules EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR can be enabled only if {EN_AMR_FR=1 AND

EN_AMR_HR=1}
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment - When EN_TFO_AMR_NB is enabled in the cell, the cause 27

triggering will be automatically inhibited for the AMR-NB ongoing call
with TFO (and uninhibited if TFO is given up for any reason).
- When EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED is enabled,
then the cause 27 triggering under normal load is automatically
inhibited.
354 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.147 (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED) -
(EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED
Logical Name EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED
Definition This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR-NB FR-to-HR

channel adaptation (Handover Cause 27) under high load only.
Coding rules 0: disabled

1: enabled
Mandatory rules EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED can be enabled

only if EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR =1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment - When EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED is enabled,

then the cause 27 triggering under normal load is automatically
inhibited (even if EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR is enabled).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 355 / 1278

5.2.148 (EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR) - (EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR
Logical Name EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR
Definition This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR-NB channel

adaptation (Handover Cause 26).
Mandatory rules EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR can be enabled only if {EN_AMR_FR=1 AND

EN_AMR_HR=1}
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment When EN_TFO_AMR_NB is enabled in the cell, the cause 26

triggering will be automatically inhibited for the AMR-NB ongoing call
with TFO (and uninhibited if TFO is given up for any reason).
356 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.149 (EN_AMR_FR) - (EN_AMR_FR)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_AMR_FR
Logical Name EN_AMR_FR
Definition This flag controls whether or not AMR-NB full rate is allowed in the
cell.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 357 / 1278

5.2.150 (EN_AMR_HR) - (EN_AMR_HR)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_AMR_HR
Logical Name EN_AMR_HR
Definition This flag controls whether or not AMR-NB half rate is allowed in the
cell.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
358 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.151 (EN_AMR_WB_GMSK) - (EN_AMR_WB_GMSK)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name EN_AMR_WB_GMSK
Definition This flag controls whether or not AMR-WB GMSK is allowed in the
cell.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 359 / 1278

5.2.152 (EN_BALANCED_CI) - (EN_BALANCED_CI)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_BALANCED_CI
Logical Name EN_BALANCED_CI
Definition This flag enables/disables to balance the C/I measure.
Coding rules 0:disable, 1: enable
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 1
External Comment Up to 16 instances of this parameter with different values can be

defined. This allows to define "RMS templates" (see parameter
RMS_template).
360 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.153 (EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO) - (EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO
Logical Name EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "too high level in outer
zone" handover cause (cause 13).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
Umbrella N/A
Concentric enable (1)
Concentric Umbrella enable (1)
Microcell N/A
Minicell N/A
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 361 / 1278

5.2.154 (EN_BI-BAND_MS(n)) - (EN_BI-BAND_MS(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_BI-BAND_MS(n)
Logical Name EN_BI-BAND_MS(n)
Definition This flag enables/disables the incoming handovers of bi-band MSs

from the preferred band.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
362 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.155 (EN_BS_PC) - (EN_BS_PC)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_BS_PC
Logical Name EN_BS_PC
Definition This flag enables/disables BS Power Control.
Coding rules 0: disabled1: enabled
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 363 / 1278

5.2.156 (EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP) - (EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP
Logical Name EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP
Definition This flag enables/disables the sending of Circuit group messages.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
364 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.157 (EN_DIST_HO) - (EN_DIST_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_DIST_HO
Logical Name EN_DIST_HO
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "distance" handover

cause (cause 6).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
Cell Type Dependent Single enable (1)
Umbrella enable (1)
Microcell disable (0)
Minicell enable (1)
Extended inner cell enable (1)
Extended outer cell enable (1)
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 365 / 1278

5.2.158 (EN_EDR) - (EN_EXT_DR)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_EDR
Logical Name EN_EXT_DR
Definition This flag enables/disables the Outgoing External Directed Retry

procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules EN_EXT_DR should be set to enable when EN_TCH_PREEMPT is

set to enable.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 1
External Comment For external directed retries, the serving BSC does not know whether
or not the external target cells (towards which the directed retry
is triggered) are congested. Therefore, Alcatel recommend to set
RESP_REQ to 1 if EN_EDR is enabled in order to get a Handover
Reject message from the MSC in case all target cells are congested
and thus to attempt other procedures.
366 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.159 (EN_EXT_MEAS_REP) - (EN_EXT_MEAS_REP)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_EXT_MEAS_REP
Logical Name EN_EXT_MEAS_REP
Definition This flag enables/disables the extended measurement reporting for

Mobile Assisted Frequency Allocation.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 367 / 1278

5.2.160 (EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO) - (EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO
Logical Name EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO
Definition This flag enables/disables the use of Fast traffic handovers.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
368 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.161 (EN_FORCED_DR) - (EN_FORCED_DR)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_FORCED_DR
Logical Name EN_FORCED_DR
Definition This flag enables/disables the "Forced Directed Retry" handover

cause detection.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 369 / 1278

5.2.162 (EN_GAN_HO) - (EN_GAN_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_GAN_HO
Logical Name EN_GAN_HO
Definition This flag enables/disables the handover to GAN
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
370 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.163 (EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO) - (EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO
Logical Name EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "general capture"

handover cause (cause 24).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 371 / 1278

5.2.164 (EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK) -
(EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK
Definition Enables/disables, when the cell is loaded, the support of the Half
Rate allocation (at new call establishment and during inter-cell
handover) for possible AMR-WB calls.
This feature deals with the possible AMR-WB calls, ie calls for which
AMR-WB is supported by the MS, and supported by the TC, and
allowed by the MSC, and allowed in the cell.
Coding rules 0: disabled,

1: enabled
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment - Significant if EN_AMR_WB_GMSK is enabled

- Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, calls on
going in the cell are not disrupted. Change applied only on new calls
(establishment or handover) allocated in the cell after modification.
372 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.165 (EN_HSL) - (EN_HSL)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_HSL
Logical Name EN_HSL
Definition Enables SS7 HSL (High speed Signalling Link).
Coding rules 0: HSL disabled

1: HSL enabled
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
External Comment Changeable on the BSC terminal.

if EN_HSL = 1 the following new Q703 parameters:
Q703_N1_HSL, Q_703_N2_HSL, Q703_T1_HSL, Q703_T4E_HSL
and Q703_T4N_HSL
replaces the old ones:
Q703_N1, Q_703_N2, Q703_T1, Q703_T4E and Q703_T4N.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 373 / 1278

5.2.166 (EN_IMM_ASS_REJ) - (EN_IM_ASS_REJ)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_IMM_ASS_REJ
Logical Name EN_IM_ASS_REJ
Definition This flag indicates if the Immediate Assignment Reject procedure

is enabled.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
External Comment This parameter is only valid for circuit switched traffic. For packet
traffic (GPRS or EGPRS) sending of IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT
REJECT messages cannot be disabled.
374 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.167 (EN_INCOMING_HO) - (EN_IC_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_INCOMING_HO
Logical Name EN_IC_HO
Definition This flag enables/disables incoming handovers in the cell.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 375 / 1278

5.2.168 (EN_INTERBAND_HO) - (EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_INTERBAND_HO
Logical Name EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH
Definition This flag enables / disables the multiband operation by filtering the
sending of SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE 2ter/5ter.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
376 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.169 (EN_INTRA_DL) - (EN_INTRA_DL)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_INTRA_DL
Logical Name EN_INTRA_DL
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell downlink"

handover cause (cause 16) for non AMR calls (neither AMR-NB nor
AMR-WB).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 377 / 1278

5.2.170 (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR) - (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_INTRA_DL_AMR
Logical Name EN_INTRA_DL_AMR

handover cause (cause 16) for AMR-NB calls.
Coding rules 0: disable, 1: enable
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules It is recommended to disable this intracell downlink handover when

frequency hopping is applied
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
378 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.171 (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK) -
(EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK

handover cause (cause 16) for AMR-WB GMSK calls.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules It is recommended to disable this intracell downlink handover when

Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 379 / 1278

5.2.172 (EN_INTRA_UL) - (EN_INTRA_UL)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_INTRA_UL
Logical Name EN_INTRA_UL
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell uplink" handover

cause (cause 15) for non AMR calls (neither AMR-NB nor AMR-WB).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
380 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.173 (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR) - (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_INTRA_UL_AMR
Logical Name EN_INTRA_UL_AMR

cause (cause 15) for AMR-NB calls.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules It is recommended to disable this intracell uplink handover when

Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 381 / 1278

5.2.174 (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK) -
(EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK

cause (cause 15) for AMR-WB GMSK calls
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules It is recommended to disable this intracell uplink handover when

Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
382 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.175 (EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED) - (EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED
Logical Name EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED
Definition This flag enables/disables the repetition of intracell handover

attempts.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 383 / 1278

5.2.176 (EN_LOAD_BALANCE) - (EN_LOAD_BALANCE)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_LOAD_BALANCE
Logical Name EN_LOAD_BALANCE
Definition Flag to enable/disable the balancing of load between the inner and
outer zone of a multiband cell.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules EN_LOAD_BALANCE & EN_LOAD_OUTER should not be both

"Enabled".
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment EN_LOAD_BALANCE significant only if EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO

is enabled
Umbrella N/A
Concentric disable (0)
Concentric Umbrella disable (0)
Microcell N/A
Minicell N/A
384 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.177 (EN_LOAD_ORDER) - (EN_LOAD_ORDER)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_LOAD_ORDER
Logical Name EN_LOAD_ORDER
Definition This flag indicates whether or not traffic load has to be taken into
account when setting up the list of target cells.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 385 / 1278

5.2.178 (EN_MA_SELECTION) - (EN_MA_SELECTION)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_MA_SELECTION
Logical Name EN_MA_SELECTION
Definition This flag enables/disables channel selection according to Mobile

Allocation criterion.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
386 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.179 (EN_MCHO_H_DL) - (EN_MCHO_H_DL)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_MCHO_H_DL
Logical Name EN_MCHO_H_DL
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "level downlink micro-cell"

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
Cell Type Dependent Single disable (0) *
Umbrella disable (0) *
Concentric disable (0) *
Concentric Umbrella disable (0) *
Microcell enable (1)
Minicell disable (0) *
Extended inner cell disable (0) *
Extended outer cell disable (0) *
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 387 / 1278

5.2.180 (EN_MCHO_H_UL) - (EN_MCHO_H_UL)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_MCHO_H_UL
Logical Name EN_MCHO_H_UL
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "level uplink mirco-cell "
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
388 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.181 (EN_MCHO_NCELL) - (EN_MCHO_NCELL)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_MCHO_NCELL
Logical Name EN_MCHO_NCELL
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "high level in neighbour

lower or indoor cell" handover cause (cause 14).
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules In a lower layer cell, the flag shall be disabled if there is no indoor
layer.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
Umbrella enable (1)
Minicell disable (0)
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 389 / 1278

5.2.182 (EN_MCHO_RESCUE) - (EN_MCHO_RESCUE)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_MCHO_RESCUE
Logical Name EN_MCHO_RESCUE
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "consecutive bad SACCH

frames" handover cause (cause 7).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
390 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.183 (EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC) - (EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC
Logical Name EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC
Definition Enables/disables the "RMS improvement" feature, which allows

reporting more than 42 neighbour frequencies per TRX in the 2G
radio link measurements performed by the MS.
When enabled, the parameter RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB gives the
maximum number of frequencies reported by the BTS.
When disabled, that maximum is not configurable (42, per default).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
External Comment -Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.

-Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going
calls are not disrupted. But the RMS jobs, ongoing on the BTSs, are
restarted (all data already collected are discarded).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 391 / 1278

5.2.184 (EN_MS_PC) - (EN_MS_PC)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_MS_PC
Logical Name EN_MS_PC
Definition This flag enables/disables MS Power Control.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
392 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.185 (EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO) - (EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO
Logical Name EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO
Definition This flag enables/disables the power budget handovers Cause 12

and the traffic handovers Cause 23 between cells belonging to
different frequency bands.
Coding rules 0 : function disabled, 1 : function enabled
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 393 / 1278

5.2.186 (EN_PBGT_FILTERING) - (EN_PBGT_FILTERING)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_PBGT_FILTERING
Logical Name EN_PBGT_FILTERING
Definition This flag enables/disables filtering of candidate neighbour cells on

HO_MARGIN_DIST/LEV/QUAL criterion.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules This parameter must be set to disabled in case of extended cell
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
Umbrella enable (1)
Minicell enable (1)
Extended inner cell disable (0)
Extended outer cell disable (0)
394 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.187 (EN_PBGT_HO) - (EN_PBGT_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_PBGT_HO
Logical Name EN_PBGT_HO
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "power budget" handover

cause (cause 12).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 395 / 1278

5.2.188 (EN_POWER_SAVING) - (EN_POWER_SAVING)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_POWER_SAVING
Logical Name EN_POWER_SAVING
Definition Enables power saving on all TRXs in the cell.
Coding rules 0: the power saving is "disabled",

1: the power saving is "enabled".
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment If EN_POWER_SAVING is set to "enabled", the TRX dynamic power

saving feature will be applied on all the TRXs in the cell belonging
to G3, G4 or G5 TREs. The feature will however not be applied on
the TRXs in the cell belonging to MC modules, due to the specific
architecture of MC modules (unique power amplifier for all the TRXs).
396 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.189 (EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO) - (EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO
Logical Name EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of handover cause 21 (high

level in neighbour cell in the preferred band).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 397 / 1278

5.2.190 (EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING) - (EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING
Logical Name EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING
Definition This flag enables/disables the use of the parameter PRIORITY(0,n)

in the candidate cell evaluation process.
Coding rules 0: Priority(0,n) not taken into account, 1: Priority(0,n) taken into
account
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
398 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.191 (EN_RADIOLINK_RECOVERY) - (EN_RL_RECOV)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_RADIOLINK_RECOVERY
Logical Name EN_RL_RECOV
Definition This flag enables/disables the Radio Link Recovery procedure.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
Umbrella enable (1)
Minicell enable (1)
Extended inner cell enable (1)
Extended outer cell enable (1)
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 399 / 1278

5.2.192 (EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2) - (EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2
Logical Name EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2
Definition Enables/disables the support of the "randomisation of fill bits in L2

message" feature on the DL Air interface of the cell. That feature
brings more protection to voice calls using A5/1 encryption algorithm.
Coding rules 0: the DL randomisation is "disabled",

1: the DL randomisation is "enabled".
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Since a MS may move from one cell to another cell, the activation of
the feature on few cells makes no sense. Alcatel-Lucent recommends
on a large set of cells, like the BSS level.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment Parameter change:

No impact on the telecom service, on going calls are not disrupted.
Change applied only on new CS calls established after modification.
400 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.193 (EN_REP_DL_FACCH) - (EN_REP_DL_FACCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_REP_DL_FACCH
Logical Name EN_REP_DL_FACCH
Definition Enables/Disables repeated downlink FACCH for AMR-NB or

AMR-WB GMSK calls.
Coding rules 0: disabled

1: enabled for LAPDm command frames
2: enabled for LAPDm command frames, and also for LAPDm
response frames (valid only for the MS having indicated the support
of the feature by Repeated ACCH Capability bit=1).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 2 0
External Comment Function available on BSC Evolution only.

Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change
applied on new calls (after modification).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 401 / 1278

5.2.194 (EN_REP_SACCH) - (EN_REP_SACCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_REP_SACCH
Logical Name EN_REP_SACCH
Definition Enables/Disables repeated SACCH for SAPI 0 frames in case

of AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls (for mobile station having
indicated the support of the feature).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment Function available on BSC Evolution only.

Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change
402 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.195 (EN_RESCUE_UMBRELLA) - (EN_RESCUE_UM)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_RESCUE_UMBRELLA
Logical Name EN_RESCUE_UM
Definition This flag determines if emergency handovers are directed

preferentially to umbrella cells.
Coding rules 0: disabled, 1: enabled, 2: indefinite
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 2 1
Umbrella N/A
Concentric N/A
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 403 / 1278

5.2.196 (EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO) - (EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO
Logical Name EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO
Definition Flag enabling the intracell handovers allowing to move TCH from the
PS zone to the CS zone of PDCH/TCH allocation (intracell handover
cause 30).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
404 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.197 (EN_RXLEV_DL) - (EN_RXLEV_DL)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_RXLEV_DL
Logical Name EN_RXLEV_DL
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "level downlink" handover

cause (cause 5).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 405 / 1278

5.2.198 (EN_RXLEV_UL) - (EN_RXLEV_UL)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_RXLEV_UL
Logical Name EN_RXLEV_UL
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "level uplink" handover

cause (cause 3).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
406 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.199 (EN_RXQUAL_DL) - (EN_RXQUAL_DL)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_RXQUAL_DL
Logical Name EN_RXQUAL_DL
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "quality downlink"

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 407 / 1278

5.2.200 (EN_RXQUAL_UL) - (EN_RXQUAL_UL)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_RXQUAL_UL
Logical Name EN_RXQUAL_UL
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "quality uplink" handover

cause (cause 2).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
408 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.201 (EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE) - (EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE
Logical Name EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE
Definition This flag controls "Current channel" OIE inclusion in HANDOVER

REQUIRED.
Coding rules 0: IE is not included, 1: IE is included
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 409 / 1278

5.2.202 (EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER) - (EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER
Logical Name EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER
Definition This flag controls "Speech version (used)" OIE inclusion in

HANDOVER REQUIRED.
Coding rules 0: IE is not included, 1: IE is included
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
410 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.203 (EN_SOLSA) - (EN_SOLSA)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_SOLSA
Logical Name EN_SOLSA
Definition This flag enables / disables SoLSA feature.
Mandatory rules May be set to Enabled only if BCCH_EXT=TRUE.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 411 / 1278

5.2.204 (EN_SOLSA) - (EN_SOLSA(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_SOLSA
Logical Name EN_SOLSA(n)
Definition This flag enables / disables SoLSA feature.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
None 0 1 0
External Comment This parameter is for every cell. The operator needs only to configure
the value of that parameter for OMC external cells ; the parameter
is autonomously filled by the OMC in case the adjacent cell is an
OMC internal cell.
412 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.205 (EN_SPEED_DISCRIMINATION) - (EN_SPEED_DISC)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_SPEED_DISCRIMINATION
Logical Name EN_SPEED_DISC
Definition This flag enables/disables the speed discrimination process.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
Umbrella disable (0)
Concentric Umbrella disable (0)
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 413 / 1278

5.2.206 (EN_TCH_PREEMPT) - (EN_TCH_PREEMPT)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_TCH_PREEMPT
Logical Name EN_TCH_PREEMPT
Definition This flag enables/disables the TCH/VGCH pre-emption feature. If

enabled, a point-to-point or voice group call with the pvi (pre-emption
vulnerability indication) bit set might be pre-empted for a point-to-point
or voice group call that has the pci (pre-emption capability indication)
bit set if the concerned cell is in congestion state.
Coding rules 0:disabled, 1:enabled
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules - EN_EXT_DR should be set to enable when EN_TCH_PREEMPT is

set to enable.
- If EN_VGCS = enabled , then Alcatel recommends to set
EN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the value of
MIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
External Comment In case one or more TCHs have been reserved for emergency
handovers (NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO > 0) in the concerned cell,
the BSC will first try to use one of these resources before actually
releasing an ongoing call with lower priority and the pvi bit set.
In case the cell is congested, if EN_TCH_PREEMPT is enabled and
the MSC does not allow the queing, the BSC will queue an incoming
point-to-point request with pre-emption capability indicator set during
at most T11_forced seconds for a normal assignment or during at
most T_qho seconds for an handover request. For the voice group
call request, the BSC will follow the MSC indicator.
414 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.207 (EN_TFO) - (EN_TFO)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_TFO
Logical Name EN_TFO
Definition Flag to enable/ disable the use of the TFO function for FR, EFR and
HR codec types.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 415 / 1278

5.2.208 (EN_TFO_AMR_NB) - (EN_TFO_AMR_NB)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_TFO_AMR_NB
Logical Name EN_TFO_AMR_NB
Definition Flag to enable/ disable the use of the TFO function in case of
AMR-NB codec.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment Function available on BSC Evolution only
416 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.209 (EN_TFO_AMR_WB) - (EN_TFO_AMR_WB)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_TFO_AMR_WB
Logical Name EN_TFO_AMR_WB
Definition Flag to enable/ disable the use of the TFO function in case of
AMR-WB GMSK codec.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 417 / 1278

5.2.210 (EN_TFO_MATCH) - (EN_TFO_MATCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_TFO_MATCH
Logical Name EN_TFO_MATCH
Definition This flag enables/disables TFO codec mismatch resolution function

(for FR, EFR, HR, AMR-NB and AMR-WB codecs).
Mandatory rules - may be set to 1 only if EN_TFO=1

or if EN_TFO_AMR_WB=1 or if EN_TFO_AMR_NB=1
- May be set to 0 only if EN_TFO_OPT = 0
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
418 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.211 (EN_TFO_OPT) - (EN_TFO_OPT)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_TFO_OPT
Logical Name EN_TFO_OPT
Definition This flag enables/disables TFO codec optimisation function.
Mandatory rules may be set to 1 only if EN_TFO_MATCH=1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 419 / 1278

5.2.212 (EN_TRAFFIC_HO) - (EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n))
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_TRAFFIC_HO
Logical Name EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n)
Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "traffic" handover cause

(cause 23).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance adj
None 0 1 0
External Comment As the traffic load of cells external to the BSC is unknown,
no HO cause 23 will be triggered towards these cells, even if
EN_TRAFFIC_HO = 1.
420 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.213 (EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT) - (EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT
Logical Name EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT
Definition This flag enables/disables the sending of UNEQUIPPED CIRCUIT

message.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 421 / 1278

5.2.214 (EXT_HO_FORCED) - (EXT_HO_FORCED)
Parameter Name HMI Name EXT_HO_FORCED
Logical Name EXT_HO_FORCED
Definition This flag, when set, forces internal intercell handovers to be executed
as external HO.
Coding rules 0: BSC performs internal HO, 1: MSC performs internal HO
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
422 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.215 (Extended CBCH) - (Use_of_Extended_CBCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name Extended CBCH
Logical Name Use_of_Extended_CBCH
Definition This flag indicates if the extended CBCH is used.
Coding rules 0: not used, 1: used
Mandatory rules shall be set to "No" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1"

can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE="inactive"
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment Default value correspond to SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS1.

If SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS2, Use_of_Extended_CBCH should
be set to "Yes".
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 423 / 1278

5.2.216 (FORBID_AMR_NS) - (FORBID_AMR_NS)
Parameter Name HMI Name FORBID_AMR_NS
Logical Name FORBID_AMR_NS
Definition Flag to forbid / allow AMR-NB or AMR-WB noise suppressor in the

MS.
Coding rules 0: the MS can use AMR NS, 1: the MS shall not use AMR NS.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
External Comment Significant only if EN_AMR_FR, EN_AMR_HR or

EN_AMR_WB_GMSK is set to TRUE.
424 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.217 (FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F) - (FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F)
Parameter Name HMI Name FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F
Logical Name FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F
Definition Forbid use of downlink DTX on non hopping TCH of the BCCH TRX.
Coding rules 0 : DTX DL on non-hopping BCCH TRX is allowed; 1 : DTX DL on

non-hopping BCCH TRX is forbidden
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which
of the MC modules.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 425 / 1278

5.2.218 (Force TFO versus AMR) - (FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR)
Parameter Name HMI Name Force TFO versus AMR
Logical Name FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR
Definition Flag to enable/disable the basic functions of Tandem Free Operation

(TFO) for GSM FR SV1, FR SV2 and HR SV1 codec types when the
current codec is AMR-NB FR or AMR-NB HR and when TFO is not
possible for the current call (TFO on AMR-NB not supported by the
TC or not configured in the cell).

no TFO negotiation if AMR-NB, FR or HR, is currently used;
1: enabled,
TFO negotiation will start even if AMR-NB, FR or HR, is currently
used
Mandatory rules FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR = 1 only if EN_TFO=1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR relevant only if (EN_AMR_FR = 1 or

EN_AMR_HR = 1) AND (EN_TFO = 1) AND (EN_TFO_AMR_NB =
0 or not supported by the BSS)
426 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.219 (Forced_Queuing) - (QUEUE_ANYWAY)
Parameter Name HMI Name Forced_Queuing
Logical Name QUEUE_ANYWAY
Definition This flag enables/disables forced queuing for Assignment requests

when queuing is not allowed by the MSC.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 427 / 1278

5.2.220 (Forward_CM_3) - (EN_SEND_CM3)
Parameter Name HMI Name Forward_CM_3
Logical Name EN_SEND_CM3
Definition This flag enables/disables sending of "Classmark 3" IE to the MSC.
Coding rules 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Mandatory rules EN_SEND_CM3 and STRIP_O5_CM2 shall not be both set to 1 at

the same time.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 1
External Comment The value of this parameter depends on whether the MSC supports
the MS classmark 3 IE or not: if the MSC supports the MS classmark
3 IE then the parameter shall be set to "1", otherwise the parameter
shall be set to "0".
428 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.221 (Free_Factor_1) - (Freefactor_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name Free_Factor_1
Logical Name Freefactor_1
Definition Correction factor used in the cell evaluation process to take into
account the number of free TCHs in the candidate cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Freefactor_1 <= Freefactor_2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -16 16 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 429 / 1278

Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Freefactor_1 <= Freefactor_2 <= Freefactor_3
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -16 16 0
430 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -16 16 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 431 / 1278

Coding rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -16 16 0
432 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Freefactor_5 >= Freefactor_4
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -16 16 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 433 / 1278

5.2.226 (Free_Level_1) - (Freelevel_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name Free_Level_1
Logical Name Freelevel_1
Definition Boundary on free TCH number for determination of Freefactor of

the cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Freelevel_1 < Freelevel_2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 255 1
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 7 8 8
434 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


the cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Freelevel_3 > Freelevel_2 > Freelevel_1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 255 3
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
2 3 5 6 7 9 10 12 13 14 16 17
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 435 / 1278


the cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Freelevel_4 > Freelevel_3 > Freelevel_2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 255 5
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
4 7 10 12 14 17 20 23 26 28 31 34
436 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


the cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Freelevel_4 > Freelevel_3
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 255 10
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
6 9 12 15 21 26 30 34 38 42 47 51
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 437 / 1278

5.2.230 (Free_Level_DR) - (Freelevel_DR(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name Free_Level_DR
Logical Name Freelevel_DR(n)
Definition Minimum number of free TCHs in neighbour cell n to allow forced

directed retry to cell n.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Freelevel_DR > N_TCH_HO
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 255 4
Cell Type Dependent Single See TRXnb
Umbrella See TRXnb
Concentric See TRXnb
Concentric Umbrella See TRXnb
Microcell See TRXnb
Minicell See TRXnb
Extended inner cell 255 *
Extended outer cell 255 *
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
438 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.231 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE)
Parameter Name HMI Name FREQUENCY_RANGE
Logical Name FREQUENCY_RANGE
Definition This parameter indicates the frequency range of the cell.
Coding rules 0: PGSM (GSM 900), 1: DCS 1800, 2: EGSM, 3: DCS 1900, 4:
PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7..255: for
future use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as a provision
for future frequency bands support.
Mandatory rules - if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM-DCS" then

CELL_PARTITION_TYPE must be equal to "Concentric" .
- The frequency range of an extended inner cell has to be the same
as the frequency range of the corresponding extended outer cell,
where PGSM (0) and EGSM (2) are here considered as belonging to
the same frequency range.
The OMC-R checks the consistency between the setting of

FREQUENCY_RANGE and PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS
parameters:
- At cell creation
- When the value of FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter is modified.
However, no check is performed when the
PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is modified.
Only the following values of the FREQUENCY_RANGE

parameter are allowed depending on the value of the
PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS parameter:
- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM (GSM900)"
or "DCS1800" or "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800" if the
PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and DCS1800
bands",
- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM850" or "DCS1800" if the
bands",
bands",
- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM
(GSM900)" or "DCS1900" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set
to "GSM900 and DCS1900 bands".
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 439 / 1278

Instance cell
None 0 6 0
External Comment When the frequency range is changed from EGSM (resp.
EGSM-DCS) to PGSM (resp. PGSM-DCS) or from PGSM (resp.
PGSM-DCS) to EGSM (resp. EGSM-DCS), then all TRXs of the cell
have the preserve call flag set to FALSE
440 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.232 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (MFS))
Logical Name FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (MFS)
Definition This parameter indicates the frequency range of the adjacent cell
(GAN cell excluded).
PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7..255: for
future use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as a provision
for future frequency bands support.
Mandatory rules - If FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) = "GSM-DCS" then

CELL_PARTITION_TYPE(n) must be equal to "Concentric".
cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) is
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
None 0 6 0
External Comment Within the same PLMN, the FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter of a

given cell shall be selected among one of the following values:
- PGSM (GSM900) or EGSM (GSM900) or DCS1800
or PGSM-DCS1800 or EGSM-DCS1800 if the
PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and
DCS1800 bands",
- GSM850 or DCS1800 if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to
"GSM850 and DCS1800 bands",
- GSM850 or DCS1900 if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to
"GSM850 and DCS1900 bands.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 441 / 1278

5.2.233 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (OMC))
Logical Name FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (OMC)
Definition This parameter indicates the frequency range of the adjacent cell
(internal or external to the OMC).
PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7: GAN,
8..255: for future use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as a
provision for future frequency bands support.
Mandatory rules - if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM-DCS" then

CELL_PARTITION_TYPE must be equal to "Concentric" .
- if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GAN" then CELL_RANGE must be
equal to "GAN".
- the value GAN is only allowed for the OMC external cells
The OMC-R checks the consistency between the setting of

FREQUENCY_RANGE and PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS
parameters:
- At cell creation
- When the value of FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter is modified.
However, no check is performed when the
PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is modified.
Only the following values of the FREQUENCY_RANGE

parameter are allowed depending on the value of the
PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS parameter:
- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM (GSM900)"
or "DCS1800" or "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800" if the
bands",
bands",
bands",
- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM
(GSM900)" or "DCS1900" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set
to "GSM900 and DCS1900 bands".
Category Site (CAE)
442 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Type Enumerated
SubSystem OMC
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 443 / 1278

5.2.234 (GSM_PHASE) - (GSM_PHASE)
Parameter Name HMI Name GSM_PHASE
Logical Name GSM_PHASE
Definition This flag indicates the GSM Phase used by the BSC to format
messages towards the MSC.
Coding rules 0: GSM Phase 1, 1: GSM Phase 2
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 1
External Comment Default value depends on MSC type.The value indicated here is for
444 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.235 (H_LOAD_OBJ) - (H_LOAD_OBJ)
Parameter Name HMI Name H_LOAD_OBJ
Logical Name H_LOAD_OBJ
Definition High threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage to reduce

MIN_DWELL_TIME variable.
Coding rules step size = 10%
Mandatory rules H_LOAD_OBJ >= L_LOAD_OBJ
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 80
Umbrella See TRXnb
Concentric N/A
Microcell N/A
Minicell N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 445 / 1278

5.2.236 (H_MIN_DWELL_TIME) - (H_MIN_DWELL_TIME)
Parameter Name HMI Name H_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Logical Name H_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Definition Maximum allowed value for MIN_DWELL_TIME variable.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules H_MIN_DWELL_TIME >= L_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 120 20
446 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.237 (High Priority Access Class Ordering P1) -

(AC_PRIORITY_LIST(priority=1))
Parameter Name HMI Name High Priority Access Class Ordering P1
Logical Name AC_PRIORITY_LIST(priority=1)
Definition List of access classes 11..15 and EC (=10) in their priority order.
Coding rules Priority 1 is the highest priority, Priority 6 is the lowest priority, 10
(EC) is coded as 5, 11 (access class 11) is coded as 0, 12 (access
class 12) is coded as 1, 13 (access class 13) is coded as 2, 14
(access class 14) is coded as 3, 15 (access class 15) is coded as 4.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 10 15 10
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 447 / 1278


Coding rules Priority 1 is the highest priority, Priority 6 is the lowest priority
10 (EC) is coded as 5, 11 (access class 11) is coded as 0, 12 (access
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 10 15 15
448 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 10 15 14
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 449 / 1278


Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 10 15 13
450 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 10 15 12
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 451 / 1278


Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 10 15 11
452 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.243 (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD)
Parameter Name HMI Name HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Logical Name HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Definition Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is high for circuit
switched calls.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD >= LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 80
External Comment Default value depends on the number of TRX in the cell (see TRXnb
default value). The value indicated here is for implementation
purposes.
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
70 70 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 453 / 1278

5.2.244 (Highest BA range ARFCNs) - (RANGEi_HIGHER (1<=i<=13))
Parameter Name HMI Name Highest BA range ARFCNs
Logical Name RANGEi_HIGHER (1<=i<=13)
Definition Highest ARFCN of range i indicated in "BA Range" Information

Element.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules RANGEi_HIGHER >= RANGEi_LOWER
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None -1 1023 -1
External Comment RANGEi_HIGHER = -1 means that it shall not be included in "BA

Range" IE.
Moreover, all BA RANGE following this one will be considered as not
significant by the OMC and not send to the BSC. (i.e. -1 = indicator
of end of BA Range)
454 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.245 (HO_ALARM_PERSISTENCE) - (T_FILTER)
Parameter Name HMI Name HO_ALARM_PERSISTENCE
Logical Name T_FILTER
Definition Maximum time a handover alarm is maintained while no more alarm

condition is detected.
Coding rules step size = 2 x SACCH frames = 0.96s. Coded over 5 bits:0: 0s,
1: 0.96s, ..., 31: 29.76s
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
2 x Samfr 0 31 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 455 / 1278

5.2.246 (HO_MARGIN) - (HOmargin (0,n))
Parameter Name HMI Name HO_MARGIN
Logical Name HOmargin (0,n)
Definition Difference in power budget (PBGT) between cell(0) and cell(n) which
is required for a power budget HO.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance adj
dB -127 127 5
Cell Type Dependent Single 5 dB
Umbrella 5 dB
Concentric 5 dB
Concentric Umbrella 5 dB
Microcell 4 dB
Minicell 5 dB
Extended inner cell 5 dB
Extended outer cell 5 dB
456 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.247 (HO_MARGIN_DIST) - (HO_MARGIN_DIST(0,n))
Parameter Name HMI Name HO_MARGIN_DIST
Logical Name HO_MARGIN_DIST(0,n)
Definition Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on distance handover

causes.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance adj
dB -127 127 2
Umbrella 2 dB
Concentric 2 dB
Microcell 5 dB
Minicell 2 dB
Extended inner cell -29 dB
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 457 / 1278

5.2.248 (HO_MARGIN_LEV) - (HO_MARGIN_LEV(0,n))
Parameter Name HMI Name HO_MARGIN_LEV
Logical Name HO_MARGIN_LEV(0,n)
Definition Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on level handover

causes.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance adj
dB -127 127 2
Umbrella 2 dB
Concentric 0 dB
Microcell 5 dB
Minicell 0 dB
458 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.249 (HO_MARGIN_QUAL) - (HO_MARGIN_QUAL(0,n))
Parameter Name HMI Name HO_MARGIN_QUAL
Logical Name HO_MARGIN_QUAL(0,n)
Definition Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on quality handover

causes
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance adj
dB -127 127 1
Umbrella 1 dB
Concentric 1 dB
Microcell 5 dB
Minicell 1 dB
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 459 / 1278

5.2.250 (HR_ENABLED) - (HR_ENABLED)
Parameter Name HMI Name HR_ENABLED
Logical Name HR_ENABLED
Definition This flag controls if Half Rate TCH is enabled.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
460 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.251 (IGNORE_2Mbit_FAILURE) - (IGNORE_2MBIT_FAIL)
Parameter Name HMI Name IGNORE_2Mbit_FAILURE
Logical Name IGNORE_2MBIT_FAIL
Definition This flag indicates whether or not a transmission alarm triggers the
telecom defence activities (call release, blocking messages towards
MSC). Note that the O&M activities are not dependent on this flag.
Coding rules 0: transmission alarms are not ignored and the telecom defence
activities (call release, blocking messages towards MSC) are
triggered;
1: transmission alarms are ignored and telecom defence activities
(call release, blocking messages towards MSC) are not triggered;
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules If BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE = IP, should be set to FALSE. Due to

TDM switching on TC side, there is no more interaction between
Atermux and ATR failures.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 461 / 1278

5.2.252 (IMSI Attach/Detach) - (ATT (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name IMSI Attach/Detach
Logical Name ATT (BSC)
Definition This flag indicates to the MS if IMSI Attach/detach procedure is

allowed in the cell.
Coding rules 0: not allowed, 1: allowed
Mandatory rules Equal to ATT (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
462 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.253 (IMSI Attach/Detach) - (ATT (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name IMSI Attach/Detach
Logical Name ATT (MFS)
Definition This flag indicates to the MS whether IMSI Attach/detach procedure

is allowed in the cell.
Coding rules 0: not allowed, 1: allowed
Mandatory rules Equal to ATT (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 463 / 1278

5.2.254 (IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD)
Parameter Name HMI Name IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Logical Name IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Definition Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is indefinite for
circuit switched calls.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD = 0 OR LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD <=

IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD <= HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 0
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
45 45 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
464 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.255 (INTAVE) - (INTAVE)
Parameter Name HMI Name INTAVE
Logical Name INTAVE
Definition Averaging period for interference measurements on idle TCH

timeslots.
Coding rules step size=1 Samfr
Mandatory rules INTAVE < T_INTRF_L3
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 1 31 10
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 465 / 1278

5.2.256 (INTERCELL_HO) - (HO_INTERCELL_ALLOWED)
Parameter Name HMI Name INTERCELL_HO
Logical Name HO_INTERCELL_ALLOWED
Definition This flag enables/disables the execution of all outgoing intercell

handovers.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
External Comment Valid for both TCH and SDCCH. This parameter has no influence
on Directed Retry
466 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.257 (Interference bands 1-2 limit) - (INTFBD1)
Parameter Name HMI Name Interference bands 1-2 limit
Logical Name INTFBD1
Definition Limit between interference band 1 and interference band 2.
Coding rules Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm
Mandatory rules INTFBD1 < INTFBD2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -100
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 467 / 1278

Mandatory rules INTFBD3 > INTFBD2 > INTFBD1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -95
468 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -90
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 469 / 1278

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -85
470 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.261 (INTRACELL_HO) - (HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED)
Parameter Name HMI Name INTRACELL_HO
Logical Name HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED
Definition This flag enables/disables the execution of intracell handovers.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
External Comment Valid for both TCH and SDCCH.

The flags specific to the TFO feature, I.e. EN_TFO,
EN_TFO_MATCH, EN_TFO_OPT,
EN_IPE_PREF_CODEC_TYPE, are set independently of the flag
HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED.
Additionally, the flag related to handover cause 30,
EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO is set
independently of the flag HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED.
The handovers for TFO reasons (cause 29) and RAE4 reasons
(cause 30) can therefore
be performed even if HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED = disabled.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 471 / 1278

5.2.262 (Keep codec on handover) - (KEEP_CODEC_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name Keep codec on handover
Logical Name KEEP_CODEC_HO
Definition Indicates if the BSC tries to keep the same codec for internal
incoming handovers.
Coding rules 0:free choice of the codec ; 1:try to maintain codec for TFO calls
only; 2: try to maintain codec for all calls
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 2 0
472 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.263 (L_LOAD_OBJ) - (L_LOAD_OBJ)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_LOAD_OBJ
Logical Name L_LOAD_OBJ
Definition Low threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage to increase

MIN_DWELL_TIME variable.
Mandatory rules L_LOAD_OBJ <= H_LOAD_OBJ
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 60
Umbrella See TRXnb
Concentric N/A
Microcell N/A
Minicell N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
0 10 20 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 473 / 1278

5.2.264 (L_MIN_DWELL_TIME) - (L_MIN_DWELL_TIME)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Logical Name L_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Definition Minimum allowed value for MIN_DWELL_TIME variable.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules L_MIN_DWELL_TIME <= H_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 120 8
474 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.265 (L_RXLEV_CPT_HO) - (L_RXLEV_CPT_HO(0,n))
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXLEV_CPT_HO
Logical Name L_RXLEV_CPT_HO(0,n)
Definition Minimum received downlink level from cell n for umbrella to neighbour
lower layer cell n handover or from classical band to preferred band
cell n handover.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance adj
dBm -110 -47 -85
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 475 / 1278

5.2.266 (L_RXLEV_DL_H) - (L_RXLEV_DL_H)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXLEV_DL_H
Logical Name L_RXLEV_DL_H
Definition Downlink level threshold for handover.
Mandatory rules L_RXLEV_DL_H < U_RXLEV_DL_P.

L_RXLEV_DL_H < RXLEV_DL_IH
Recommended rules L_RXLEV_D_H < L_RXLEV_DL_P

If CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" AND
FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM" or "DCS1800" or
"EGSM" or "DCS 1900":
RXLEV_DL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_DL_H (This rule only applies to
concentric and monoband cell.)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -96
Cell Type Dependent Single -91 dBm (19)
Umbrella -91 dBm (19)
Concentric -91 dBm (19)
Concentric Umbrella -91 dBm (19)
Microcell -96 dBm (14)
Minicell -91 dBm (19)
Extended inner cell -96 dBm (14)
Extended outer cell -98 dBm (12)
476 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.267 (L_RXLEV_DL_P) - (L_RXLEV_DL_P)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXLEV_DL_P
Logical Name L_RXLEV_DL_P
Definition Lower downlink level threshold for power control.
Mandatory rules L_RXLEV_DL_P < U_RXLEV_DL_P
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -85
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 477 / 1278

5.2.268 (L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR) - (L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR
Logical Name L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n)
Definition Minimum level received from neighbour cell n to allow forced directed
retry to cell n.
Coding rules Coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -110
478 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.269 (L_RXLEV_UL_H) - (L_RXLEV_UL_H)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXLEV_UL_H
Logical Name L_RXLEV_UL_H
Definition Uplink level threshold for handover.
Mandatory rules L_RXLEV_UL_H < U_RXLEV_UL_P

L_RXLEV_UL_H < RXLEV_UL_IH
Recommended rules L_RXLEV_UL_H < L_RXLEV_UL_P

If CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" AND
RXLEV_UL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_UL_H (This rule only applies to
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -100
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 479 / 1278

5.2.270 (L_RXLEV_UL_P) - (L_RXLEV_UL_P)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXLEV_UL_P
Logical Name L_RXLEV_UL_P
Definition Lower uplink level threshold for power control.
Mandatory rules L_RXLEV_UL_P < U_RXLEV_UL_P
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -90
480 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.271 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_H)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXQUAL_DL_H
Logical Name L_RXQUAL_DL_H
Definition Downlink quality threshold for handover for non AMR calls (neither
AMR-NB nor AMR-WB).
Coding rules step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules L_RXQUAL_DL_H >= L_RXQUAL_DL_P
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 4
External Comment Higher value is the worst quality
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 481 / 1278

5.2.272 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR
Logical Name L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR
Definition Downlink quality threshold for handovers (cause 16) on AMR-NB

calls.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 4.5
482 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.273 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK) -
(L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK
Definition Downlink quality threshold for handovers (cause 16) on AMR-WB

GMSK calls.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 4.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 483 / 1278

5.2.274 (L_RXQUAL_DL_P) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_P)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXQUAL_DL_P
Logical Name L_RXQUAL_DL_P
Definition Lower downlink quality threshold for power control of any calls,
except the AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls, where Repeated DL
FACCH and Repeated SACCH are activated.
Coding rules step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules L_RXQUAL_DL_P > U_RXQUAL_DL_P
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 3
External Comment Highest value is the worst quality.

There is a dedicated parameter, L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH,
for AMR-NB or AMR-WB calls and activated repeated DL FACCH
and SACCH.
484 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.275 (L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH) -
(L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH
Logical Name L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH
Definition Lower downlink quality threshold for power control of AMR-NB or

AMR-WB GMSK calls where Repeated DL FACCH (for LAPDm
command and response frames) and Repeated SACCH are
activated.

(1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH > U_RXQUAL_DL_P
Recommended rules To take benefit from the feature repeated ACCH, Alcatel recommends
:
L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH >= L_RXQUAL_DL_P
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 3

- Highest value is the worst quality.
- If the customer has customized the parameter L_RXQUAL_DL_P
in the previous release, then the new parameter
L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH must be updated in the
CDE table with THAT customized value.
-Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 485 / 1278

5.2.276 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_H)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXQUAL_UL_H
Logical Name L_RXQUAL_UL_H
Definition Uplink quality threshold for handover for non AMR calls (nether
AMR-NB nor AMR-WB).
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules L_RXQUAL_UL_H >= L_RXQUAL_UL_P
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 4
External Comment Higher value is the worst quality
486 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.277 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR
Logical Name L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR
Definition Uplink quality threshold for handovers (cause 15) on AMR-NB calls.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 4.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 487 / 1278

5.2.278 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK) -
(L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK
Definition Uplink quality threshold for handovers (cause 15) on AMR-WB

GMSK calls.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 4.5
488 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.279 (L_RXQUAL_UL_P) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_P)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXQUAL_UL_P
Logical Name L_RXQUAL_UL_P
Definition Lower uplink quality threshold for power control of any calls, except
the AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls, where Repeated DL FACCH
and Repeated SACCH are activated.
Mandatory rules L_RXQUAL_UL_P > U_RXQUAL_UL_P
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 3
External Comment Highest value is the worst quality.

There is a dedicated parameter, L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH,
for AMR-NB or AMR-WB calls and activated repeated DL FACCH
and SACCH.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 489 / 1278

5.2.280 (L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH) -
(L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH
Logical Name L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH
Definition Lower uplink quality threshold for power control of AMR-NB or

AMR-WB GMSK calls where Repeated DL FACCH (for LAPDm
command and response frames) and Repeated SACCH are
activated.

(1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH > U_RXQUAL_UL_P
Recommended rules To take benefit from the feature repeated ACCH, Alcatel recommends
:
L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH >= L_RXQUAL_UL_P
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 3

- Highest value is the worst quality.
- If the customer has customized the parameter L_RXQUAL_UL_P
in the previous release, then the new parameter
L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH must be updated in the
CDE table with THAT customized value.
- Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change
490 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.281 (LAC) - (LAC (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name LAC
Logical Name LAC (BSC)
Definition Location Area Code.
Coding rules –
Equal to LAC (MFS)
A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer)
shall have the same LAC.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 65535 65535
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 491 / 1278

5.2.282 (LAC) - (LAC(n) (BSC))
Logical Name LAC(n) (BSC)
Definition Location Area Code of adjacent cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time.
Equal to LAC(n)(MFS).
shall have the same.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 65535 65535
492 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.283 (Link_factor) - (Linkfactor (0,n))
Parameter Name HMI Name Link_factor
Logical Name Linkfactor (0,n)
Definition Correction factor used in cell evaluation process to handicap or

favour cell n.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance adj
dB -24 24 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 493 / 1278

5.2.284 (Load computation in outer zone) - (EN_LOAD_OUTER)
Parameter Name HMI Name Load computation in outer zone
Logical Name EN_LOAD_OUTER
Definition Flag to enable/disable the load computation on the outer zone of a

Concentric/multiband cell instead of the load computation on the
whole cell.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules When enabled, the values of the parameters FREElevel_1 to

FREElevel_4 need to be updated to number of TRX considered in
the load computation.
EN_LOAD_BALANCE & EN_LOAD_OUTER should not be both
"Enabled".
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
External Comment significant only for concentric and multiband cells.
494 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.285 (LOAD_EV_PERIOD) - (LOAD_EV_PERIOD)
Parameter Name HMI Name LOAD_EV_PERIOD
Logical Name LOAD_EV_PERIOD
Definition Number of load samples (received every TCH_INFO_PERIOD) for

load averaging.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 30 12
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 495 / 1278

5.2.286 (Load_Factor_1) - (Loadfactor_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name Load_Factor_1
Logical Name Loadfactor_1
Definition Correction factor used in cell evaluation process to take into account
the TCH load in the candidate cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Loadfactor_1 >= Loadfactor_2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -16 0 0
496 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Loadfactor_1 >= Loadfactor_2 >= Loadfactor_3
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -16 0 0
Cell Type Dependent Single -2
Umbrella -2
Concentric -2
Concentric Umbrella -2
Microcell -2
Minicell -2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 497 / 1278

Coding rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -16 0 0
Umbrella -5
Concentric -5
Microcell -4
Minicell -5
498 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -16 0 0
Umbrella -7
Concentric -7
Microcell -6
Minicell -7
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 499 / 1278

Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Loadfactor_5 <= Loadfactor_4
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -16 0 0
Umbrella -10
Concentric -10
Microcell -8
Minicell -10
500 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.291 (Load_Level_1) - (Loadlevel_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name Load_Level_1
Logical Name Loadlevel_1
Definition Boundary on cell load for determination of Loadfactor of the cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Loadlevel_1 < Loadlevel_2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 50
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 501 / 1278

Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Loadlevel_1 < Loadlevel_2 < Loadlevel_3
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 60
502 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Loadlevel_2 < Loadlevel_3 < Loadlevel_4
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 80
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 503 / 1278

Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Loadlevel_4 > Loadlevel_3
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 90
504 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.295 (LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD)
Parameter Name HMI Name LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Logical Name LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Definition Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is low for circuit
switched calls.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD <= HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 0
External Comment If LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD is set to 0 in a given cell n, then no

Handover Cause 23 (i.e. Traffic Handovers) can be triggered towards
that cell n.
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
20 20 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 505 / 1278

5.2.296 (LOWER_TIMING_ADVANCE) - (L_TIME_ADVANCE)
Parameter Name HMI Name LOWER_TIMING_ADVANCE
Logical Name L_TIME_ADVANCE
Definition Low threshold to trigger handover cause "too short distance" in outer
cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
bper 0 63 0
Umbrella N/A
Concentric N/A
Microcell N/A
Minicell N/A
506 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.297 (Lowest BA range ARFCNs) - (RANGEi_LOWER (1<=i<=13))
Parameter Name HMI Name Lowest BA range ARFCNs
Logical Name RANGEi_LOWER (1<=i<=13)
Definition Lowest ARFCN of range i indicated in "BA Range" Information

Element.
Coding rules Coded on 16 bits.
Mandatory rules RANGEi_HIGHER >= RANGEi_LOWER
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None -1 1023 -1
External Comment RANGEi_LOWER = -1 means that it shall not be included in "BA

Range" IE
Moreover, all BA RANGE following this one will be considered as not
significant by the OMC and not send to the BSC. (i.e. -1 = indicator
of end of BA Range)
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 507 / 1278

5.2.298 (LSA_ID_I) - (LSA_ID_array (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name LSA_ID_I
Logical Name LSA_ID_array (BSC)
Definition List of authorised LSAs on a cell (up to 5).
Coding rules coded on 3 bytes max
Mandatory rules Equal to LSA_ID_array (MFS)
Recommended rules The LSA_ID may either be a Universal LSA identity (in case of odd
number) or a PLMN significant LSA identity (in case of even number),
as defined in GSM 03.03.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 16777215 16777215
External Comment The default value depends on the configuration. The value given
508 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.299 (LSA_ID_I) - (LSA_ID_array (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name LSA_ID_I
Logical Name LSA_ID_array (MFS)
Definition List of authorised LSAs on a cell (up to 5).
Mandatory rules Equal to LSA_ID_array (BSC)
Recommended rules The LSA_ID may either be a Universal LSA identity (in case of odd
number) or a PLMN significant LSA identity (in case of even number),
as defined in GSM 03.03.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 16777215 16777215
External Comment The default value depends on the configuration. The value given
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 509 / 1278

5.2.300 (LSA_ID_I(n)) - (LSA_ID_array (n))
Parameter Name HMI Name LSA_ID_I(n)
Logical Name LSA_ID_array (n)
Definition List of authorised LSAs on a neighbour cell (up to 5).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
None 0 16777215 16777215
External Comment This parameter is for every cell. The operator needs only to configure
the value of that parameter for OMC external cells ; the parameter
is autonomously filled by the OMC in case the adjacent cell is an
OMC internal cell.
510 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.301 (LSA_OFFSET) - (LSA_OFFSET)
Parameter Name HMI Name LSA_OFFSET
Logical Name LSA_OFFSET
Definition Offset to be used for LSA cell reselection between cells with the
same LSA priorities.
Coding rules coded from 0 to 7, where 0 = 0 dB, 1 = 4 dB, 2 = 8 dB, 3 = 16 dB,

4 = 24 dB, 5 = 32 dB, 6 = 48 dB, 7 = 64 dB.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 64 0
External Comment The default value corresponds to an unused parameter for the MS.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 511 / 1278

5.2.302 (LSA_PRIO_THR) - (PRIO_THR)
Parameter Name HMI Name LSA_PRIO_THR
Logical Name PRIO_THR
Definition Signal threshold for applying LSA cell reselection.
Coding rules coded from 0 to 7; step size = 6 dB (i.e. 0 = 0 dB, 1 = 6 dB, 2 = 12

dB, 3 = 18 dB, 4 = 24 dB, 5 = 30 dB, 6 = 36 dB, 7 = infinite = 42 dB).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 42 42
External Comment The default value corresponds to an unused parameter for the MS.
The maximum and default values correspond to an infinite threshold.
512 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.303 (MATE_CI) - (MATE_CI (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name MATE_CI
Logical Name MATE_CI (BSC)
Definition Cell Identity of the Mate cell
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules MATE_CI (BSC) = MATE_CI (MFS)

If one mate cell is configured with GPRS (MAX_PDCH > 0) then the
other mate cell shall also be configured with GPRS (MAX_PDCH > 0)
For an extended cell, MATE_LAC and MATE_CI can not be equal to
65535 at the same time
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 65535 65535
(MATE_LAC + MATE_CI) is relevant for extended cells only
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 513 / 1278

5.2.304 (MATE_LAC) - (MATE_LAC)
Parameter Name HMI Name MATE_LAC
Logical Name MATE_LAC
Definition Location Area Code of the Mate cell.
Mandatory rules For an extended cell, MATE_LAC and MATE_CI can not be equal to
65535 at the same time
shall have the same LAC
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 65535 65535
(MATE_LAC + MATE_CI) is relevant for extended cells only
514 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.305 (MAX_POW_INC) - (MAX_POW_INC)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_POW_INC
Logical Name MAX_POW_INC
Definition Maximum Power increase in one power command.
Coding rules step size = 2dB
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 2 16 8
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 515 / 1278

5.2.306 (MAX_POW_RED) - (MAX_POW_RED)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_POW_RED
Logical Name MAX_POW_RED
Definition Maximum Power reduction in one power command.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 2 16 8
516 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.307 (MAX_RETRANS) - (Max_retrans (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_RETRANS
Logical Name Max_retrans (BSC)
Definition Maximum number of CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissions by the

MS on the RACH.
Coding rules Possible values are:1, 2 ,4 and 7 respectively binary coded:00, 01,
10 and 11
Mandatory rules Max_retrans (BSC) = Max_retrans (MFS) for a given cell
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 7 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 517 / 1278

5.2.308 (MEAS_STAT_BFI_1) - (MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [1])
Parameter Name HMI Name MEAS_STAT_BFI_1
Logical Name MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [1]
Definition Threshold on successive Bad Frame Indication to define bands used

for Radio Measurements Statistics.
Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_BFI2 > MEAS_STAT_BFI1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 24 1

RMS_template).
518 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_BFI3 > MEAS_STAT_BFI2 > MEAS_STAT_BFI1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 24 2

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 519 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 24 4

RMS_template).
520 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 24 6

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 521 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 24 8

RMS_template).
522 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 24 10

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 523 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 24 14

RMS_template).
524 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 24 18

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 525 / 1278


Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_BFI9 > MEAS_STAT_BFI8
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 24 22

RMS_template).
526 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.317 (MEAS_STAT_C_I_1) - (MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [1])
Parameter Name HMI Name MEAS_STAT_C_I_1
Logical Name MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [1]
Definition Threshold on radio C/I (Carrier/Interference) measurements to define

bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics.
Coding rules coded from 1 to +125, step size = 1dB ( 1= -62 db, ..., 125 = +62 dB)
Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_CI1 < MEAS_STAT_CI2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -62 62 -12

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 527 / 1278


Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_CI1 < MEAS_STAT_CI2 < MEAS_STAT_CI3
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -62 62 -9

RMS_template).
528 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -62 62 -6

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 529 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -62 62 -3

RMS_template).
530 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -62 62 0

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 531 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -62 62 3

RMS_template).
532 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -62 62 6

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 533 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -62 62 9

RMS_template).
534 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_CI8 < MEAS_STAT_CI9
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -62 62 12

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 535 / 1278

5.2.326 (MEAS_STAT_LEV_1) - (MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [1])
Parameter Name HMI Name MEAS_STAT_LEV_1
Logical Name MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [1]
Definition Threshold on radio level to define bands used for Radio

Measurements Statistics.
Coding rules coded 1 to 62, 1 = -109 dBm, . . . 62 = -48 dBm, step = 1dBm
Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_LEV_1 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dBm -109 -48 -53

RMS_template).
536 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_LEV_1 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_2 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_3
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dBm -109 -48 -60

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 537 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dBm -109 -48 -66

RMS_template).
538 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dBm -109 -48 -72

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 539 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dBm -109 -48 -79

RMS_template).
540 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dBm -109 -48 -85

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 541 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dBm -109 -48 -91

RMS_template).
542 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dBm -109 -48 -97

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 543 / 1278


Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_LEV_8 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_9
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dBm -109 -48 -104

RMS_template).
544 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.335 (MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_1) - (MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_i [1])
Parameter Name HMI Name MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_1
Logical Name MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_i [1]
Definition Threshold on path balance to define bands used for Radio

Coding rules coded from 1 to +219, step size = 1dB (1 = -109 dB, ... 219 = +109
dB)
Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL1 < MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -109 109 -50

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 545 / 1278


dB)
Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL3 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL2 >

MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -109 109 -30

RMS_template).
546 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


dB)

MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -109 109 -20

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 547 / 1278


dB)

MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL3
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -109 109 -10

RMS_template).
548 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


dB)

MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL4
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -109 109 0

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 549 / 1278


dB)

MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL5
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -109 109 10

RMS_template).
550 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


dB)

MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL6
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -109 109 20

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 551 / 1278


dB)

MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL7
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -109 109 30

RMS_template).
552 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


dB)
Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL9 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL8
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dB -109 109 50

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 553 / 1278

5.2.344 (MEAS_STAT_S_1) - (MEAS_STAT_S_i [1])
Parameter Name HMI Name MEAS_STAT_S_1
Logical Name MEAS_STAT_S_i [1]
Definition Threshold on radio link counter to define bands used for Radio
Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_S1 < MEAS_STAT_S2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
Samfr 1 127 1

RMS_template).
554 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_S3 > MEAS_STAT_S2 > MEAS_STAT_S1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
Samfr 1 127 4

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 555 / 1278

Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
Samfr 1 127 8

RMS_template).
556 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
Samfr 1 127 12

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 557 / 1278

Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
Samfr 1 127 14

RMS_template).
558 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
Samfr 1 127 16

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 559 / 1278

Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
Samfr 1 127 18

RMS_template).
560 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
Samfr 1 127 20

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 561 / 1278

Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_S9 > MEAS_STAT_S8
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
Samfr 1 127 22

RMS_template).
562 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.353 (MEAS_STAT_TA_1) - (MEAS_STAT_TA_i [1])
Parameter Name HMI Name MEAS_STAT_TA_1
Logical Name MEAS_STAT_TA_i [1]
Definition Upper limit of the first TA band, lower limit of the second TA band
(for the RMS TA measurements)
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules 0 < MEAS_STAT_TA_1 < MEAS_STAT_TA_2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
bper 1 62 7

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 563 / 1278

Definition Upper limit of the 2nd TA band, lower limit of the 3rd TA band (for the
RMS TA measurements)
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_TA_1 < MEAS_STAT_TA_2 < MEAS_STAT_TA_3
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
bper 1 62 13

RMS_template).
564 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Upper limit of the 3rd TA band, lower limit of the 4th TA band (for the
Coding rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
bper 1 62 19

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 565 / 1278

Definition Upper limit of the 4th TA band, lower limit of the 5th TA band (for the
Coding rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
bper 1 62 25

RMS_template).
566 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
bper 1 62 31

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 567 / 1278

Coding rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
bper 1 62 37

RMS_template).
568 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
bper 1 62 43

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 569 / 1278

Coding rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
bper 1 62 49

RMS_template).
570 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_TA_8 < MEAS_STAT_TA_9 < 63
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
bper 1 62 55

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 571 / 1278

5.2.362 (MIN_CONNECT_TIME) - (MIN_CONNECT_TIME)
Parameter Name HMI Name MIN_CONNECT_TIME
Logical Name MIN_CONNECT_TIME
Definition Maximum connection time after a handover in an overlaid cell to

declare the MS "fast" when leaving the cell with a handover.
Coding rules step size=1sec
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
sec 0 120 40
Umbrella N/A
Concentric N/A
Microcell 20 s
Minicell 40 s
572 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.363 (MIN_RLF_TIME_DL) - (MIN_RLF_TIME_DL)
Parameter Name HMI Name MIN_RLF_TIME_DL
Logical Name MIN_RLF_TIME_DL
Definition Minimum time before detecting a radio link failure of a DL TBF,

triggered by N3105 or NstagnatingWindowDL.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules It is recommended to set a value close to the time of temporary very
bad radio conditions that the operator would like to support during a
DL TBF. Typically, a few seconds.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
ms 0 25000 4000
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 573 / 1278

5.2.364 (Mobile Country Code (MCC)) - (MCC (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name Mobile Country Code (MCC)
Logical Name MCC (BSC)
Definition Mobile Country Code of the own PLMN.
Mandatory rules The OMC-R shall ensure that the following rules are always fulfilled:
- MCC (BSC) = MCC (MFS).
- The cells belonging to the same BSC shall have the same
(MCC,MNC) couple.
- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells internal to the OMC-R shall be
selected from the set of own PLMNs.
- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells external to the OMC-R can be
selected from the set of own or foreign PLMNs.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 999 999
External Comment The value depends on the configuration. The default value indicated
here is for implementation purposes.
574 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.365 (Mobile Network Code (MNC)) - (MNC (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name Mobile Network Code (MNC)
Logical Name MNC (BSC)
Definition Mobile Network Code of the own PLMN.
- MNC (BSC) = MNC (MFS).
(MCC,MNC) couple.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 999 999
External Comment The value depends on configuration. The default value indicated
The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC in the CDE table.
MNC such as yz or Fyz correspond to a 2 digits MNC (y, z = 0..9). (F
binary coded 1111)
MNC such as xyz correspond to a 3 digits MNC (x = 0..9).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 575 / 1278

5.2.366 (MS_P_CON_ACK) - (MS_P_CON_ACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name MS_P_CON_ACK
Logical Name MS_P_CON_ACK
Definition Supervision of the MS Power Control procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
2 x Samfr 0 31 3
Cell Type Dependent Single 3s
Umbrella 3s
Concentric 3s
Concentric Umbrella 3s
Microcell 2s
Minicell 3s
Extended inner cell 3s
Extended outer cell 3s
576 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.367 (MS_P_CON_INT) - (MS_P_CON_INT)
Parameter Name HMI Name MS_P_CON_INT
Logical Name MS_P_CON_INT
Definition Minimum delay between two consecutive MS power commands.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
2 x Samfr 0 31 1
Cell Type Dependent Single 1s
Umbrella 1s
Concentric 1s
Concentric Umbrella 1s
Microcell 0s
Minicell 1s
Extended inner cell 1s
Extended outer cell 1s
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 577 / 1278

5.2.368 (MS_TXPWR_MAX) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX)
Parameter Name HMI Name MS_TXPWR_MAX
Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MAX
Definition MS maximum allowed transmission power.
Coding rules P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm,...., 19: 5 dBm.
dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm,..., 15: 0 dBm.
DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ...,
15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm.
Mandatory rules MS_TXPWR_MAX >= MS_TXPWR_MIN
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm 5 43 43
differently:
578 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.369 (MS_TXPWR_MAX) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name MS_TXPWR_MAX
Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MAX(n)
Definition MS maximum allowed transmission power.
dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm.
Mandatory rules MS_TXPWR_MAX >= MS_TXPWR_MIN
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm 5 43 43
differently:
-Coded value "2": (interpreted as 39 dBm by both the Phase 1 MS
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 579 / 1278

5.2.370 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (BSC))
Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (BSC)

accessing the cell until otherwise commanded.
dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm 5 43 43
differently:
580 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.371 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER)
Parameter Name HMI Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER
Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER
Definition MS maximum allowed transmission power in the inner zone of a

concentric or multiband cell.
dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm.
Mandatory rules MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER >= MS_TXPWR_MIN
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm 5 43 43
differently:
Meaninful only in cells where: CELL_PARTITION_TYPE =

concentric.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 581 / 1278

Umbrella N/A
Concentric #
Microcell N/A
Minicell N/A
582 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.372 (MS_TXPWR_MIN) - (MS_TXPWR_MIN)
Parameter Name HMI Name MS_TXPWR_MIN
Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MIN
Definition MS minimum allowed transmission power.
Coding rules P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ...,13: 17 dBm,...,
19: 5 dBm.
dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 13: 17 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 13: 4 dBm,...,
15: 0 dBm.
13: 4 dBm,..., 15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm.
Mandatory rules MS_TXPWR_MIN <= MS_TXPWR_MAX and

MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER >= MS_TXPWR_MIN
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm 5 43 17
External Comment The default value depends on the BCCH frequency band:
Default value for P-GSM/G1: 17 dBm
Default value for GSM850: 17 dBm
Default value for DCS1800: 4 dBm
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 583 / 1278

5.2.373 (MSC Signalling Point Code) - (DPC)
Parameter Name HMI Name MSC Signalling Point Code
Logical Name DPC
Definition Signalling Point Code of the MSC.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 16383 12
External Comment - Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is
- Significant only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is set to FALSE.
584 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.374 (MSCR) - (MSCR (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name MSCR
Logical Name MSCR (BSC)
Definition Year corresponding to the version of ETSI/3GPP recommendations

used to implement MSC software.
Coding rules 0 = MSC is release ’98 or older; 1 = MSC is release ’99 onwards
Mandatory rules MSCR (BSC) = MSCR (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 585 / 1278

5.2.375 (MSCR) - (MSCR (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name MSCR
Logical Name MSCR (MFS)

used to implement MSC software.
Coding rules 0 = MSC is release ’98 or older; 1 = MSC is release ’99 onwards
Mandatory rules MSCR (BSC) = MSCR (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
586 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.376 (MTP_Sequence_Number_Format) -
(MTP_Sequence_Number_Format)
Parameter Name HMI Name MTP_Sequence_Number_Format
Logical Name MTP_Sequence_Number_Format
Definition Defines the format to be used for the sequence number of MTP2.
Coding rules 0: Normal

1: Extended
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
External Comment Value "Extended" is refused by the BSC if EN_HSL=0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 587 / 1278

5.2.377 (MULTIBAND_REPORTING) - (MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name MULTIBAND_REPORTING
Logical Name MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC)
Definition Minimum number of cells of each supported frequency band to be

included in MEASUREMENT REPORT by the MS.
Coding rules Coded over 2 bits:

00: normal reporting of the six strongest cells, with known and
allowed NCC part of BSIC, irrespective of the band used;
01: the MS shall report the strongest cell, with known and allowed
NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list,
excluding the frequency band of the serving cell;
10: the MS shall report the two strongest cells, with known and
allowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA
list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell;
11: the MS shall report the three strongest cells, with known and
list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell.
Mandatory rules Equal to MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 3 0
588 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.378 (MULTIBAND_REPORTING) - (MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name MULTIBAND_REPORTING
Logical Name MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS)
Definition Minimum number of cells of each supported frequency band to be

included in MEASUREMENT REPORT by the MS.
Coding rules Coded over 2 bits:

00: normal reporting of the six strongest cells, with known and
allowed NCC part of BSIC, irrespective of the band used;
01: the MS shall report the strongest cell, with known and allowed
NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list,
excluding the frequency band of the serving cell;
10: the MS shall report the two strongest cells, with known and
list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell;
11: the MS shall report the three strongest cells, with known and
list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell.
Mandatory rules Equal to MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 3 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 589 / 1278

5.2.379 (MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION) -
(MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION)
Parameter Name HMI Name MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION
Logical Name MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION
Definition This parameter determines the condition on traffic load in the serving
cell to trigger a multiband handover.
Coding rules 0: Any load, 1: Not low, 2: High
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 2 0
590 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.380 (N_BAD_SACCH) - (N_BAD_SACCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name N_BAD_SACCH
Logical Name N_BAD_SACCH
Definition Number of consecutive bad SACCH frames to trigger a rescue

handover.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules 1) N_BAD_SACCH = RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS - N_BSTXPWR_M

+1
2) In micro cells, it is recommended to set N_BAD_SACCH so that

T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP > N_BAD_SACCH * 480ms + 30
seconds if T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP <> 0.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 0 128 4
Umbrella N/A
Concentric N/A
Microcell 4
Minicell N/A
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 591 / 1278

5.2.381 (N_TCH_HO) - (N_TCH_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name N_TCH_HO
Logical Name N_TCH_HO
Definition Number of less interfered Full Rate TCH reserved for handover.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 255 3
592 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.382 (N_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (N_TRAFFIC_LOAD)
Parameter Name HMI Name N_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Logical Name N_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Definition Number of consecutive load averages used in traffic load evaluation

process.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 8 1
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
6 6 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 593 / 1278

5.2.383 (NB_CLR_REQ) - (N_CLR_REQ)
Parameter Name HMI Name NB_CLR_REQ
Logical Name N_CLR_REQ
Definition Maximum number of CLEAR REQUEST message transmission.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 8 4
594 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.384 (NB_PREF_CELLS) - (N_PREF_CELLS)
Parameter Name HMI Name NB_PREF_CELLS
Logical Name N_PREF_CELLS
Definition Maximum number of candidate cells sent in one HANDOVER

REQUIRED.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 16 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 595 / 1278

5.2.385 (Nbr AC 11-15 unbarred in one step) - (M2)
Parameter Name HMI Name Nbr AC 11-15 unbarred in one step
Logical Name M2
Definition Number of high priority access classes (11..15) are unbarred in one
step.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 5 2
596 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.386 (Nbr. AC 0-9 barred in one step) - (N1)
Parameter Name HMI Name Nbr. AC 0-9 barred in one step
Logical Name N1
Definition Number of low priority access classes (0..9) are barred in one step.
Coding rules Value 0 inhibits the automatic barring of low priority access classes.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 10 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 597 / 1278

5.2.387 (Nbr. AC 0-9 unbarred in one step) - (N2)
Parameter Name HMI Name Nbr. AC 0-9 unbarred in one step
Logical Name N2
Definition Number of low priority access classes (0..9) are unbarred in one step.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 10 2
598 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.388 (Nbr. AC 11-15 barred in one step) - (M1)
Parameter Name HMI Name Nbr. AC 11-15 barred in one step
Logical Name M1
Definition Number of high priority access classes (11..15) are barred in one
step.
Coding rules Value 0 inhibits the automatic barring of high priority access classes
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 5 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 599 / 1278

5.2.389 (NBR_RESET_CIC_REP) - (NBR_RESET_CIC_REP)
Parameter Name HMI Name NBR_RESET_CIC_REP
Logical Name NBR_RESET_CIC_REP
Definition Maximum number of RESET CIRCUIT message repetitions when

not acknowledged by the MSC.
Coding rules 255: RESET CIRCUIT message is indefinitely repeated
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 255 6
600 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.390 (NBR_RESET_REP) - (NBR_RESET_REP)
Parameter Name HMI Name NBR_RESET_REP
Logical Name NBR_RESET_REP
Definition Number of times the RESET message is sent without being

acknowledged by the MSC before an alarm is reported.
Coding rules If NBR_RESET_REP = 0, RESET message is not sent
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 127 6
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 601 / 1278

5.2.391 (NCC) - (NCC (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name NCC
Logical Name NCC (BSC)
Definition Network Colour code of the cell.
Coding rules Coded over 3 bits.
Mandatory rules - Equal to NCC (MFS)

- NCC (BSC) shall be included in NCC_permited
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
602 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.392 (NCC) - (NCC (MFS))
Logical Name NCC (MFS)
Definition Network Colour code of the cell.
Mandatory rules - Equal to NCC (BSC)

- NCC (MFS) shall be included in NCC_permited
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 603 / 1278

5.2.393 (NCC) - (NCC(n))
Logical Name NCC(n)
Definition Network Colour code of the neighbour cell.
Mandatory rules NCC(n) shall be included in NCC_permited of the serving cell
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
None 0 7 0
This parameter is for every cell (OMC external cells and OMC
internal cells). The operator needs to configure the value of that
parameter for every cell.
604 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.394 (NCC permitted) - (NCC_permitted)
Parameter Name HMI Name NCC permitted
Logical Name NCC_permitted
Definition Indicates which NCC values the MS considers as belonging to the

network.
Coding rules Coded over 8 bits. each bit corresponds to a NCC value: MSB
corresponds to NCC = 7, LSB corresponds to NCC = 0. For each
bit:0= NCC not permitted, 1= NCC permitted
Mandatory rules NCC of the serving cell and of its neighbor cells shall be included in
NCC_permited
Category Site (CAE)
Type Bitmap
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 255 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 605 / 1278

5.2.395 (NCI) - (NCI)
Parameter Name HMI Name NCI
Logical Name NCI
Definition This flag indicates to the MS if it reports a HANDOVER FAILURE in

case of out of range timing advance.
Coding rules 0: Out of range timing advance is ignored, 1: Out of range timing
advance triggers a Handover Failure procedure
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
606 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.396 (NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV) - (NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV(0,n))
Parameter Name HMI Name NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV
Logical Name NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV(0,n)
Definition Threshold of maximum received level from the neighbour cells for
cause 13.
Coding rules coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance adj
dBm -110 -47 -47
Umbrella N/A
Microcell N/A
Minicell N/A
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 607 / 1278

5.2.397 (NUM_TCH_EMERGENCY_HO) - (NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name NUM_TCH_EMERGENCY_HO
Logical Name NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO
Definition Number of full rate TCH reserved for incoming emergency handovers
(plus Cause 12 and Cause 27 handovers).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 255 0
External Comment The Pre-emption procedure (in case EN_TCH_PREEMPT =

enabled) might use these reserved TCHs in order to avoid releasing
an on-going call unnecessarily.
608 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.398 (NY_1) - (NY1)
Parameter Name HMI Name NY_1
Logical Name NY1
Definition Maximum number of repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATION.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules For rules, see T3105_D and T3105_F_FR, T3105_F_HR.
Recommended rules For rules, see T3105_D and T3105_F_FR, T3105_F_HR.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 3 35 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 609 / 1278

5.2.399 (OFFSET_CA_HIGH) - (OFFSET_CA_HIGH)
Parameter Name HMI Name OFFSET_CA_HIGH
Logical Name OFFSET_CA_HIGH
Definition Offset for AMR-NB HR-to-FR channel adaptation hysteresis under

high load (Handover Cause 26).
Coding rules step size = 0.1 (0 coded as 0, 0.1 coded as 1 ... 7 coded as 70)
Mandatory rules OFFSET_CA_HIGH >= OFFSET_CA_NORMAL
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 4.5
610 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.400 (OFFSET_CA_NORMAL) - (OFFSET_CA_NORMAL)
Parameter Name HMI Name OFFSET_CA_NORMAL
Logical Name OFFSET_CA_NORMAL
Definition Offset for AMR-NB HR-to-FR channel adaptation hysteresis under

normal load (Handover Cause 26).
Mandatory rules OFFSET_CA_HIGH >= OFFSET_CA_NORMAL
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 4.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 611 / 1278

5.2.401 (OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER) - (OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER)
Parameter Name HMI Name OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
Logical Name OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
Definition Offset which allows to take into account the radio differences
between the inner and the outer zone (especially in multiband cells).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -127 127 0
612 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.402 (OFFSET_HOPPING_HO) - (Offset_Hopping_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name OFFSET_HOPPING_HO
Logical Name Offset_Hopping_HO
Definition Offset applied in the handover quality causes for radio hopping
channels.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 613 / 1278

5.2.403 (OFFSET_HOPPING_PC) - (Offset_Hopping_PC)
Parameter Name HMI Name OFFSET_HOPPING_PC
Logical Name Offset_Hopping_PC
Definition Offset applied in the power control quality causes for hopping radio
channels.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
614 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.404 (OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV) - (OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV(0,n))
Parameter Name HMI Name OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV
Logical Name OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV(0,n)
Definition Minimum received level from umbrella cell n to allow handover cause
"level uplink micro-cell" or "level downlink micro-cell".
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance adj
dBm -110 -47 -80
Umbrella N/A
Concentric N/A
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 615 / 1278

5.2.405 (Own SPC) - (OPC)
Parameter Name HMI Name Own SPC
Logical Name OPC
Definition Signalling Point Code of the BSC.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 16383 12
External Comment - Must be equal to DPC and SSF used by the MSC and RNC and
SMLC for adressing the BSC.
- Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is
- Parameter change: Before any modification of the OPC, the
BSS-TEL is to be previously locked. This procedure leads the BSC
to reject any new calls and wait for some minutes (Wait Traffic Clear)
before shutting down the on going calls.
After modification of the OPC, the operator shall trigger a BSC
restart. The locked objects must be unlocked again to reopen the
telecom service.
616 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.406 (PAGING) - (PAG_BAR)
Parameter Name HMI Name PAGING
Logical Name PAG_BAR
Definition This flag indicates if transmission of Pagings is allowed in the cell.
Coding rules 0: Pagings are not barred, 1: Pagings are barred
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment this flag can be used by an operator to temporarily prevent phones
from ringing in specific cells
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 617 / 1278

5.2.407 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(BSC))
Logical Name PENALTY_TIME(BSC)

criterion.
value
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
sec 20 620 20
Cell Type Dependent Single inhibited (31)
Umbrella inhibited (31)
Concentric inhibited (31)
Concentric Umbrella inhibited (31)
Microcell 20 s (0)
Minicell 20 s (0)
Extended inner cell inhibited (31)
Extended outer cell inhibited (31)
618 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.408 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(MFS))
Logical Name PENALTY_TIME(MFS)

criterion.
value.
Mandatory rules PENALTY_TIME(MFS) = PENALTY_TIME(BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
sec 20 620 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 619 / 1278

5.2.409 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(n)(MFS))
Logical Name PENALTY_TIME(n)(MFS)

criterion.
value
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
sec 20 620 20
620 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.410 (PING_PONG_HANDICAP) - (PING_PONG_HCP)
Parameter Name HMI Name PING_PONG_HANDICAP
Logical Name PING_PONG_HCP
Definition A transient handicap is applied to power budget of previous cell to

avoid a "ping-pong" effect.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 127 15
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 621 / 1278

5.2.411 (POW_INC_FACTOR) - (POW_INC_FACTOR)
Parameter Name HMI Name POW_INC_FACTOR
Logical Name POW_INC_FACTOR
Definition Weighting factor for power increase.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules POW_INC_FACTOR >= POW_RED_FACTOR
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0.8
622 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.412 (POW_INC_STEP_SIZE) - (POW_INC_STEP_SIZE)
Parameter Name HMI Name POW_INC_STEP_SIZE
Logical Name POW_INC_STEP_SIZE
Definition Power increase step size in case of power command triggered on

quality criterion.
Coding rules step size = 2dB. 1: 2dB, 2: 4dB, ..., 7: 14 dB
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules POW_INC_STEP_SIZE > POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 2 14 6
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 623 / 1278

5.2.413 (POW_RED_FACTOR) - (POW_RED_FACTOR)
Parameter Name HMI Name POW_RED_FACTOR
Logical Name POW_RED_FACTOR
Definition Weighting factor for power reduction.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules POW_RED_FACTOR <= POW_INC_FACTOR
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0.5
624 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.414 (POW_RED_STEP_SIZE) - (POW_RED_STEP_SIZE)
Parameter Name HMI Name POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
Logical Name POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
Definition Power reduction step size in case of power command triggered on

quality criterion.
Coding rules step size = 2dB. 1: 2dB, 2: 4dB
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules POW_RED_STEP_SIZE < POW_INC_STEP_SIZE
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 2 4 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 625 / 1278

5.2.415 (Preference Mark) - (TRX_PREF_MARK)
Parameter Name HMI Name Preference Mark
Logical Name TRX_PREF_MARK
Definition Preference mark assigned to a given TRX.
Coding rules 0: PS/CS TRX: This TRX can carry PS and CS traffic and has the
lowest preference in the TCH sub-channel selection process used to
serve a CS call.
1: CS TRX with preference mark 1: This TRX can carry only CS
traffic and has the preference mark 1 in the TCH sub-channel
selection process used to serve a CS call.
...
7: CS TRX with preference mark 7: This TRX can carry only CS
traffic and has the highest preference in the TCH sub-channel
selection process used to served a CS call. It means that this TRX
has the highest priority for CS traffic.
Mandatory rules 1) For a TRX in the inner zone of a monoband or multiband

concentric cell, the parameter TRX_PREF_MARK shall be set to a
non-null value.
2) For a hopping G1 TRX, if EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY

= 0 and BCCH/CCCH are configured on PGSM TRX, then
TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0
3)The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order to

check the upper limit of MAX_PDCH:
i) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 1
if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1:
CCCH combined"
ii) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 2
CCCH not combined"
iii) MAX_PDCH <= NB_TS_MPDCH + 8*(nb of TRXs with
TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX.
4) In case of cell shared over 2 BTSs, the GPRS TRXs of the cell (ie
TRX_PREF_MARK=0) can be either on the main sector or on the
secondary, but not on both.
5) the maximum number of PS capable TRX (ie TRX_PREF_MARK

= 0) defined in one cell is 16.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance TRX
626 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

None 0 7 1
External Comment If EGPRS is activated in the cell, TRX_PREF_MARK (BCCH TRX)

= 0 and the BCCH TRX is associated to a TRE hardware and a
transmission pool allowing the usage of 8-PSK, the operator shall
ensure that the difference in the mean output powers between GSMK
and 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dB in order to be compliant with
3GPP TS 05.05 and 3GPP TS 05.08 requirements (or 4 dB if an
SDCCH timeslot is defined in timeslot number 7 of the BCCH TRX).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 627 / 1278

5.2.416 (PREFERRED_BAND) - (PREFERRED_BAND)
Parameter Name HMI Name PREFERRED_BAND
Logical Name PREFERRED_BAND
Definition Frequency band to which the multiband MS are preferentially

directed.
Coding rules 0: none, 1: GSM, 2: DCS
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 0 2 0
628 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.417 (Preventive cyclic retransmission flag) - (EN_PCR)
Parameter Name HMI Name Preventive cyclic retransmission flag
Logical Name EN_PCR
Definition This flag enables preventive cyclic retransmission.
Coding rules 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
External Comment This parameter is set to 1 by the BSC in case the Ater links of a BSS
are configured as satellite links.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 629 / 1278

5.2.418 (PWRC) - (PWRC (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name PWRC
Logical Name PWRC (BSC)
Definition This flag indicates to the MS if it includes measurements made on

BCCH frequency in case of frequency hopping channel.
Coding rules 0: measurements made on BCCH frequency are included, 1:

measurements made on BCCH frequency are not included.
Mandatory rules Equal to PWRC (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
630 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.419 (PWRC) - (PWRC (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name PWRC
Logical Name PWRC (MFS)
Definition This flag indicates to the MS whether or not it shall include

measurements made on BCCH frequency in case of frequency
hopping channel.
Coding rules 0: measurements made on BCCH frequency shall be included, 1:

measurements made on BCCH frequency shall not be included
Mandatory rules Equal to PWRC (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 631 / 1278

5.2.420 (Q703_N1) - (Q703_N1)
Parameter Name HMI Name Q703_N1
Logical Name Q703_N1
Definition Maximum number of MSU available for retransmission.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 127 127
External Comment not used if EN_HSL = 1
632 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.421 (Q703_N1_HSL) - (Q703_N1_HSL)
Parameter Name HMI Name Q703_N1_HSL
Logical Name Q703_N1_HSL
Definition Maximum number of MSU available for retransmission (if HSL is

used).
Coding rules step size 1
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 4095 4095
External Comment used if EN_HSL = 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 633 / 1278

5.2.422 (Q703_N2) - (Q703_N2)
Parameter Name HMI Name Q703_N2
Logical Name Q703_N2
Definition Maximum number of MSU octets which are available for

retransmission.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
bytes 1 8192 4096
634 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.423 (Q703_N2_HSL) - (Q703_N2_HSL)
Parameter Name HMI Name Q703_N2_HSL
Logical Name Q703_N2_HSL
Definition Maximum number of MSU octets which are available for

retransmission (if HSL is used).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
bytes 1 65535 32767
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 635 / 1278

5.2.424 (Q703_T1) - (Q703_T1)
Parameter Name HMI Name Q703_T1
Logical Name Q703_T1
Definition MTP2 timer "alignment ready".
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
1/10 sec 40 50 50
636 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.425 (Q703_T1_HSL) - (Q703_T1_HSL)
Parameter Name HMI Name Q703_T1_HSL
Logical Name Q703_T1_HSL
Definition MTP2 timer "alignment ready" for 2Mbit/s (if HSL is used).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 25 350 300
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 637 / 1278

5.2.426 (Q703_T2) - (Q703_T2)
Definition MTP2 timer "not aligned".
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
1/10 sec 5 150 30
638 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.427 (Q703_T3) - (Q703_T3)
Definition MTP2 timer "aligned".
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 1 2 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 639 / 1278

5.2.428 (Q703_T4E) - (Q703_T4E)
Parameter Name HMI Name Q703_T4E
Logical Name Q703_T4E
Definition MTP2 Emergency proving period.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0.4 0.6 0.5
External Comment Applicable to LSL and HSL.
640 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.429 (Q703_T4N) - (Q703_T4N)
Parameter Name HMI Name Q703_T4N
Logical Name Q703_T4N
Definition MTP2 Normal proving period.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 7.5 9.5 8.2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 641 / 1278

5.2.430 (Q703_T4N_HSL) - (Q703_T4N_HSL)
Parameter Name HMI Name Q703_T4N_HSL
Logical Name Q703_T4N_HSL
Definition MTP2 Normal proving period for 2Mbit/s (if HSL is used).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 3 70 30
642 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.431 (Q703_T5) - (Q703_T5)
Definition MTP2 timer "sending SIB".
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
ms 80 120 100
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 643 / 1278

5.2.432 (Q703_T6) - (Q703_T6)
Definition MTP2 timer "remote congestion".
Mandatory rules Q707_T1 >= Q703_T6
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 3 6 5.4
644 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.433 (Q703_T7) - (Q703_T7)
Definition MTP2 timer "excessive delay of acknowledgement".
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0.5 2 1
External Comment In case of a Ater satellite connection, this parameter is set to 2

seconds by the BSC.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 645 / 1278

5.2.434 (Q704_T2) - (Q704_T2)
Definition MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changeover

acknowledgement.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0.7 2 2
646 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.435 (Q704_T4) - (Q704_T4)
Definition MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changeback

acknowledgement (first attempt).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0.5 1.2 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 647 / 1278

5.2.436 (Q704_T5) - (Q704_T5)
Definition MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changeback

acknowledgement (second attempt).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0.5 1.2 1
648 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.437 (Q707_T1) - (Q707_T1)
Definition MTP3 timer supervising the reception of signalling link test

acknowledgement.
Mandatory rules Q707_T1 >= Q703_T6
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 4 12 6.4
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 649 / 1278

5.2.438 (Q707_T2) - (Q707_T2)
Definition MTP3 delay between transmission of consecutive signalling link

test message.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 30 90 60
650 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.439 (RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER) - (RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER
Logical Name RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC)
Definition Timing Advance threshold for CHANNEL REQUIRED and PACKET

CHANNEL REQUEST filtering.
Coding rules 64: no filtering
Mandatory rules Equal to RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS).
Recommended rules Disable the filtering for extended cells.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
bper 0 64 64
External Comment One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m. CHANNEL

REQUIRED or PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST messages with
Timing Advance greater or equal to RACH_TA_FILTER are
discarded.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 651 / 1278

5.2.440 (RACH_BUSY_THRES) - (RACH_BUSY_THRES)
Parameter Name HMI Name RACH_BUSY_THRES
Logical Name RACH_BUSY_THRES
Definition Received level above which a RACH TS is deemed busy.
Coding rules This parameter is encoded with a step size of 4 dB as follows:

1: -110 dBm
5: -106 dBm
9: -102 dBm
13: -98 dBm
17: -94 dBm
21: -90 dBm
25: -86 dBm
29: -82 dBm
33: -78 dBm
37: -74 dBm
41: -70 dBm
45: -66 dBm
49: -62 dBm
53: -58 dBm
57: -54 dBm
61: -50 dBm
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -50 -106
652 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.441 (RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS)
Parameter Name HMI Name RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES
Logical Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS
Definition Counter threshold to detect a radio link failure on the uplink path, for
non AMR calls, or for AMR calls (NB or WB) for which Repeated
SACCH and Repeated DL FACCH are activated.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS > N_BSTXPWR_M
Recommended rules Values higher than 128 are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent
(very far to the 3GPP values):
It will significantly increase the delay for retransmission of a message.
For instance, if a HANDOVER COMMAND is sent to a given MS, but
not received, the MS will have to wait longer to get the repeated HO
CMD, which may lead to call drop in the meantime.
Moreover, it can increase congestion in the BSS, as the call duration
is artificially increased.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 1 255 18
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 653 / 1278

5.2.442 (RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES_AMR) -
(RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR)
Parameter Name HMI Name RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES_AMR
Logical Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR
Definition Counter threshold to detect a radio link failure on the uplink path
for calls using an AMR codec (NB or WB) and for which Repeated
SACCH and/or Repeated DL FACCH are not activated.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR > N_BSTXPWR_M
Recommended rules Values higher than 128 are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 1 255 18
654 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.443 (RADIOLINK_RECOVERY_THRES) - (N_BSTXPWR_M)
Parameter Name HMI Name RADIOLINK_RECOVERY_THRES
Logical Name N_BSTXPWR_M
Definition Counter threshold to trigger a radio link recovery.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules N_BSTXPWR_M < RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 0 127 13
Umbrella 13
Concentric 13
Microcell 15
Minicell 13
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 655 / 1278

5.2.444 (RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH) - (RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH
Logical Name RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH
Definition Repeated DL SACCH activation threshold for UL RLT (Radio Link

Timer) counter.
Dynamic activation is triggered in the BTS when the UL RLT counter
is inferior or equal to that threshold.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 0 127 10
External Comment - Function available on BSC Evolution only

- The setting of this value is a trade-off between "triggering
REP_DL_SACCH soon enough to take benefit from it before drop"
and "triggering REP_DL_SACCH not too soon to let time to the
recovery mechanism to increase the output power of the BTS to its
max level before".
656 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.445 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT
Logical Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC)
Definition Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision.

This applies to non AMR calls or to AMR (NB or WB) calls for which
Repeated SACCH and Repeated DL FACCH are activated.
Coding rules step size = 4 Samfr, coded from 0 to 15 (0 == 4 Samfr, 1 == 8 Samfr

... 15 == 64 Samfr
Mandatory rules Equal to RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 4 64 16
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 657 / 1278

5.2.446 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT
Logical Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS)
Definition Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision.

This applies to non AMR calls or to AMR (NB or WB) calls for which
Repeated SACCH and Repeated DL FACCH are activated.

... 15 == 64 Samfr
Mandatory rules Equal to RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
Samfr 4 64 16
658 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.447 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR)
Parameter Name HMI Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR
Logical Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR
Definition Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision, for a call using
an AMR codec (NB or WB) and for which Repeated SACCH and/or
Repeated DL FACCH are not activated.

... 15 == 64 Samfr
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 4 64 16
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 659 / 1278

5.2.448 (REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT) -
(REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT)
Parameter Name HMI Name REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT
Logical Name REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT
Definition Legacy support for repeated downlink FACCH for AMR-NB or

AMR-WB GMSK calls.
This parameter concerns only the LAPDm command frames.
Coding rules 0: repeated DL FACCH enabled only for the AMR mobile stations
having indicated the support of the feature by repeated ACCH
Capability bit = 1
1: repeated DL FACCH enabled for all AMR mobile stations
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment - This parameter is relevant only if repeated downlink FACCH

(EN_REP_DL_FACCH) is enabled.
- Function available on BSC Evolution only.
- The value 1 is used to tackle early implementations, ie for MS with
repeated ACCH Capability bit=0 or MS without Repeated ACCH
Capability bit (legacy MS).
660 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.449 (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR) -
(REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR)
Parameter Name HMI Name REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR
Logical Name REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR
Definition Repeated DL FACCH activation threshold for AMR-NB FR calls.

Dynamic activation is done as long as the codec mode request (CMR
value) is inferior or equal to that threshold.
Coding rules 0: off

1: 4,75 kbit/s
2: 5,15 kbit/s
3: 5,90 kbit/s
4: 6,70 kbit/s
5: 7,40 kbit/s
6: 7,95 kbit/s
7: 10,2 kbit/s
8: 12,2 kbit/s
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 8 3

- When setting the threshold to the max value, the repeated DL
FACCH is always activated for AMR-NB FR codec (if allowed for the
call).
-Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 661 / 1278

5.2.450 (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR) -
(REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR)
Parameter Name HMI Name REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR
Logical Name REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR
Definition Repeated DL FACCH activation threshold for AMR-NB HR calls.

Coding rules 0: off

1: 4,75 kbit/s
2: 5,15 kbit/s
3: 5,90 kbit/s
4: 6,70 kbit/s
5: 7,40 kbit/s
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 5 3

FACCH is always activated for AMR-NB HR codec (if allowed for the
call).
662 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.451 (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB) -
(REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB)
Parameter Name HMI Name REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB
Logical Name REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB
Definition Repeated DL FACCH activation threshold for AMR-WB GMSK calls.

Coding rules 0: off

1: 6,60 kbit/s
2: 8,85 kbit/s
3: 12,65 kbit/s
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 3 1

FACCH is always activated for AMR-WB GMSK codec (if allowed for
the call).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 663 / 1278

5.2.452 (Reserved Slots Number for Basic CBCH) -

(Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name Reserved Slots Number for Basic CBCH
Logical Name Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH
Definition This parameter indicates the number of slots reserved for high
priority messages within the schedule period for basic CBCH.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules shall be set to "0" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1"
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 40 0
664 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.453 (Reserved Slots Number for Extended CBCH) -

(Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_extended_CBCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name Reserved Slots Number for Extended CBCH
Logical Name Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_extended_CBCH
Definition This parameter indicates the number of slots reserved for high
priority messages within the schedule period for extended CBCH.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 40 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 665 / 1278

5.2.454 (RESET_INDEFINITE) - (RESET_INDEFINITE)
Parameter Name HMI Name RESET_INDEFINITE
Logical Name RESET_INDEFINITE
Definition This flag determines whether or not the RESET message shall be
sent indefinitely (as long as it is not acknowledged).
Coding rules 0: RESET message is sent a maximum of NBR_RESET_REP times,

1: The Reset procedure is repeated until a RESET or RESET ACK
message is received.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
666 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.455 (RESP_REQ) - (RESP_REQ)
Parameter Name HMI Name RESP_REQ
Logical Name RESP_REQ
Definition This flag controls "Response request" OIE inclusion in HANDOVER

REQUIRED.
Coding rules 0: IE not included, 1: IE included
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules When the VGCS feature (EN_VGCS) is activated, it is recommended

to include the Response Request in the HANDOVER REQUIRED
message (RESP_REQ).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0

For external directed retries, the serving BSC does not know whether
or not the external target cells (towards which the directed retry
is triggered) are congested. Therefore, Alcatel recommend to set
RESP_REQ to 1 if EN_EXT_DR is set to enabled in order to get a
Handover Reject message from the MSC in case all target cells are
congested and thus to attempt other procedures.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 667 / 1278

5.2.456 (RF_RES_IND_PERIOD) - (T_INTRF_L3)
Parameter Name HMI Name RF_RES_IND_PERIOD
Logical Name T_INTRF_L3
Definition Delay between two consecutive RF RESOURCE INDICATION.
Mandatory rules T_INTRF_L3 > Max (T11, T_qho, T11_FORCED) & T_INTRF_L3 >
INTAVE
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
sec 10 180 60
668 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.457 (RMS_TEMPLATE) - (RMS_TEMPLATE_INDEX)
Parameter Name HMI Name RMS_TEMPLATE
Logical Name RMS_TEMPLATE_INDEX
Definition Template of values of RMS parameters to be applied to the

concerned cell (concerns the parameters MEAS_STAT_C_Ix,
MEAS_STAT_BFIx, MEAS_STAT_LEVx, MEAS_STAT_PATH_BALx,
MEAS_STAT_Sx, EN_BALANCED_CI, VQ_AVERAGE,
VQ_BAD_RXFER, VQ_FER_THRESHOLD, VQ_GOOD_RXFER,
VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD, VQ_RXLEV, VQ_RXQUAL,
VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER).
Coding rules coded from 1 to 16
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 16 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 669 / 1278

5.2.458 (ROT) - (ROT)
Parameter Name HMI Name ROT
Logical Name ROT
Definition Indicates to the MS whether or not it shall include "Time Difference"

IE in HANDOVER COMPLETE.
Coding rules 0: "Mobile Time Difference" IE is NOT included in HANDOVER

COMPLETE,
1: "Mobile Time Difference" IE is included in HANDOVER
COMPLETE
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
670 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.459 (RSL_RATE (BSC)) - (RSL_RATE (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name RSL_RATE (BSC)
Logical Name RSL_RATE (BSC)
Definition Rate used on all RSL links towards a BTS.
Coding rules 0: 16 kbit/s, 1: 64 kbit/s
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BTS
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 671 / 1278

5.2.460 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC))
Logical Name RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC)
cell.
Mandatory rules RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -100
672 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.461 (RXLEV_DL_IH) - (RXLEV_DL_IH)
Parameter Name HMI Name RXLEV_DL_IH
Logical Name RXLEV_DL_IH
Definition Downlink level threshold for decision between intracell and intercell
handover in case of bad downlink quality.
Coding rules Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm.
Mandatory rules RXLEV_DL_IH > L_RXLEV_DL_H
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -65
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 673 / 1278

5.2.462 (RXLEV_DL_ZONE) - (RXLEV_DL_ZONE)
Parameter Name HMI Name RXLEV_DL_ZONE
Logical Name RXLEV_DL_ZONE
Definition Downlink level threshold for inner to outer zone handover.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules If CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" AND

RXLEV_DL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_DL_H (This rule only applies to
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -71
Umbrella N/A
Microcell N/A
Minicell N/A
674 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.463 (RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO) - (RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO
Logical Name RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO
Definition Threshold on the downlink received level above which it is not

necessary to trigger a handover on power budget (cause 12).
Coding rules Coded over 6 bits:0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -47
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 675 / 1278

5.2.464 (RXLEV_MIN_n) - (RXLEVmin(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name RXLEV_MIN_n
Logical Name RXLEVmin(n)
Definition Minimum level received from cell n to allow reception of handover.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -96
676 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.465 (RXLEV_UL_IH) - (RXLEV_UL_IH)
Parameter Name HMI Name RXLEV_UL_IH
Logical Name RXLEV_UL_IH
Definition Uplink level threshold for decision between intracell and intercell
handover in case of bad uplink quality.
Mandatory rules RXLEV_UL_IH > L_RXLEV_UL_H
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -65
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 677 / 1278

5.2.466 (RXLEV_UL_ZONE) - (RXLEV_UL_ZONE)
Parameter Name HMI Name RXLEV_UL_ZONE
Logical Name RXLEV_UL_ZONE
Definition Uplink level threshold for inner to outer zone handover.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules If CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" AND

RXLEV_UL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_UL_H (This rule only applies to
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -78
Umbrella N/A
Microcell N/A
Minicell N/A
678 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.467 (Schedule Period for Basic CBCH) -

(Schedule_period_for_basic_CBCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name Schedule Period for Basic CBCH
Logical Name Schedule_period_for_basic_CBCH
Definition Length of the DRX schedule period for the basic CBCH.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
CBper 0 40 32
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 679 / 1278

5.2.468 (Schedule period for Extended CBCH) -

(Schedule_period_for_extended_CBCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name Schedule period for Extended CBCH
Logical Name Schedule_period_for_extended_CBCH
Definition Length of the DRX schedule period for the extended CBCH.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
CBper 0 40 32
680 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.469 (SDCCH_COUNTER) - (SDCCH_COUNTER)
Parameter Name HMI Name SDCCH_COUNTER
Logical Name SDCCH_COUNTER
Definition Time during which SDCCH handovers are forbidden after completion
of the Immediate Assignment procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules SDCCH_COUNTER <= T_SDCCH_PC
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
2 x Samfr 0 31 3
External Comment "0" means that SDCCH handover is immediately allowed after
completion of the Immediate Assignment procedure.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 681 / 1278

5.2.470 (SDCCH_HO) - (HO_SDCCH_INHIBIT)
Parameter Name HMI Name SDCCH_HO
Logical Name HO_SDCCH_INHIBIT
Definition The flag inhibits/enables the execution of SDCCH handovers.
Coding rules 0: SDCCH HO enabled1: SDCCH HO disabled
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
External Comment This parameter has no influence on Directed Retry
Umbrella enable (0)
Minicell enable (0)
Extended inner cell disabled (1) *
Extended outer cell disabled (1) *
682 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.471 (Send_CM_Enquiry) - (BSS_SEND_CM_ENQUIRY)
Parameter Name HMI Name Send_CM_Enquiry
Logical Name BSS_SEND_CM_ENQUIRY
Definition Controls the trigger of Classmark Enquiry procedure at call

establishment time.
Coding rules 0: the classmark enquiry is never initiated by the BSC;

1: on reception of a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message with
ES IND flag set to 0, the BSC will always initiate a classmark enquiry;
2: on reception of a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message
with ES IND flag set to 0, the BSC will initiate the classmark enquiry if
algorithm A5/1 is not available (information available in MS classmark
1 IE sent in the LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 2 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 683 / 1278

5.2.472 (Signalling Link Code) - (SLC)
Parameter Name HMI Name Signalling Link Code
Logical Name SLC
Definition Signalling Link Code.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance N7 ch
None 0 15 0
684 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.473 (SMSCB_Features_Set) - (SMSCB_Features_set)
Parameter Name HMI Name SMSCB_Features_Set
Logical Name SMSCB_Features_set
Definition This parameter indicates which features are usable with the SMSCB
product.
Coding rules 1: Features set 1, 2: Features set 2
Mandatory rules Can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE = "inactive".

If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then CBC_Window shall be equal
to "1"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then SMSCB_Recovery
shall be set to "No"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then
for all the BSC cells Use_of_Extended_CBCH shall be set to
"No"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then for all the BSC cells
Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH shall be set to "0"
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 2 1
External Comment When migrating from FS1 to FS2,

USE_OF_EXTENDED_CBCH shall be set to "Yes",
CBC_WINDOW shall be set to 4.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 685 / 1278

5.2.474 (SMSCB_Phase) - (SMSCB_Phase)
Parameter Name HMI Name SMSCB_Phase
Logical Name SMSCB_Phase
Definition This parameter indicates whether the feature operates in GSM

Phase2 or Phase 2+ mode.
Coding rules 0: Phase 2, 1: Phase 2+
Mandatory rules If SMSCB_FEATURES_SET="FS1", SMSCB_PHASE shall be set to

"phase2"
’If SMSCB_FEATURES_SET="FS2", SMSCB_PHASE shall be set
to "phase2+"
SMSCB_Phase can be changed only when
SMSCB_STATE="inactive"
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
686 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.475 (SMSCB_Recovery) - (SMSCB_Recovery)
Parameter Name HMI Name SMSCB_Recovery
Logical Name SMSCB_Recovery
Definition This parameter indicates if the CBC accepts the recovery-indication

in Restart-Indication message.
Coding rules 0: No, 1: Yes
Mandatory rules shall be set to "No" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1"

can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE="inactive"
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 687 / 1278

5.2.476 (SMSCB_State) - (SMSCB_State)
Parameter Name HMI Name SMSCB_State
Logical Name SMSCB_State
Definition This flag indicates if the feature is activated or deactivated.
Coding rules 0: activated, 1: deactivated
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 1
688 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.477 (Strip_Octet_5_In_CM2) - (STRIP_O5_CM2)
Parameter Name HMI Name Strip_Octet_5_In_CM2
Logical Name STRIP_O5_CM2
Definition This flag controls the format of the "Classmark 2" IE sent to the MSC.
Coding rules 0: no modification on "Classmark2" IE, 1: octet 5 of "Classmark2" IE

is stripped out
Mandatory rules EN_SEND_CM3 and STRIP_O5_CM2 shall not be both set to 1 at

the same time.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
External Comment Default value depends on MSC type.The value indicated here is for
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 689 / 1278

5.2.478 (SYNCHRONISED_HO) - (EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name SYNCHRONISED_HO
Logical Name EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO
Definition This flag enables/disables synchronous handovers between

synchronized cells.
Mandatory rules EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled when

Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
690 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.479 (T(conn est)) - (T(conn est))
Parameter Name HMI Name T(conn est)
Logical Name T(conn est)
Definition SCCP timer supervising the reception of Connection Confirm

message.
Mandatory rules T(conn est) < T9105
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 10 127.5 30
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 691 / 1278

5.2.480 (T(iar)) - (T(iar))
Parameter Name HMI Name T(iar)
Logical Name T(iar)
Definition SCCP timer supervising the activity on SCCP connection.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Must be greater than T(ias) used by the MSC

It is recommended to configure T(iar) > (2 x T(ias) used by the MSC)
+ 1 min
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 402 1530 1260
692 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.481 (T(ias)) - (T(ias))
Parameter Name HMI Name T(ias)
Logical Name T(ias)
Definition SCCP timer supervising the sending of Inactivity Test message.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Must be less than T(iar) used by the MSC

It is recommended to configure T(ias) < (T(iar) used by the MSC
- 1 min) / 2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 96 450 300
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 693 / 1278

5.2.482 (T(rel)) - (T(rel))
Parameter Name HMI Name T(rel)
Logical Name T(rel)
Definition SCCP timer supervising the reception of Release Complete

message.
Coding rules step size = 0.5sec, coded from 16 to 255, 16 == 8 sec, 255 == 127.5
sec
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 8 127.5 15
694 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.483 (T(sst)) - (T(sst))
Parameter Name HMI Name T(sst)
Logical Name T(sst)
Definition SCCP delay between sending of consecutive Subsystem Status Test

messages.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules For BSC Evolution, ALU highly recommends setting this timer to 6
seconds to improve the BSC robustness.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 6 1200 30
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 695 / 1278

5.2.484 (T_BIND_CNF) - (T_BIND_CNF)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_BIND_CNF
Logical Name T_BIND_CNF
Definition Maximum waiting time to get a response to a CBSE-BIND primitive.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 10 300 30
696 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.485 (T_BURST) - (T_BURST)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_BURST
Logical Name T_BURST
Definition Delay between consecutive bursts of BLOCK or UNBLOCK

messages.
Coding rules step size =0.1 sec
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules (31 x T_BURST) / B_NUM < T1_short
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0.1 25.5 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 697 / 1278

5.2.486 (T_HCP) - (T_HCP)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_HCP
Logical Name T_HCP
Definition Time during which PING_PONG_HCP is applied after handover.
Coding rules step size= 1sec
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
sec 0 240 0
698 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.487 (T_HO_REQD_LOST) - (T_HO_REQD_LOST)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_HO_REQD_LOST
Logical Name T_HO_REQD_LOST
Definition Supervision of the MSC response after sending of HANDOVER

REQUIRED.
Mandatory rules T_HO_REQD_LOST > T7
Recommended rules T_HO_REQD_LOST value shall be greater than the maximum time
for external handover execution
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 6 120 30
External Comment Depends on MSC type
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 699 / 1278

5.2.488 (T_IA) - (T_IA)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_IA
Logical Name T_IA
Definition Indicates the maximum time a CS IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT

message remains in the AGCH queue.
Mandatory rules T_IA<T3101
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
sec 0 5 2.5
700 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.489 (T_INHIBIT_CPT) - (T_INHIBIT_CPT)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_INHIBIT_CPT
Logical Name T_INHIBIT_CPT
Definition Time during which the HO Causes 14, 21, and 24 are inhibited.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
sec 0 240 0
External Comment T_INHIBIT_CPT = 0 inhibits the anti ping-pong function.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 701 / 1278

5.2.490 (T_MS_CELL_REJ) - (T_MS_CELL_REJ)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_MS_CELL_REJ
Logical Name T_MS_CELL_REJ
Definition Delay where the cells the MS failed to handover, cannot be selected
as targets in subsequent handover attempts.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 20 5
702 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.491 (T_PAG_CS) - (T_PAG_CS (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name T_PAG_CS
Logical Name T_PAG_CS (BSC)
Definition This timer indicates the maximum time a CS PAGING message can
remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay on
A and A-bis or Gs/Gb and A-bis interface.
Mandatory rules Equal to T_PAG_CS (MFS)
Recommended rules T_PAG_CS<T3113 (MSC timer)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
sec 0 25.5 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 703 / 1278

5.2.492 (T_PAG_CS) - (T_PAG_CS (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name T_PAG_CS
Logical Name T_PAG_CS (MFS)
Definition This timer indicates the maximum time a CS PAGING message can
remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay on
A and A-bis or Gs/Gb and A-bis interface.
Mandatory rules Equal to T_PAG_CS (BSC)
Recommended rules T_PAG_CS<T3113 (MSC timer)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
sec 0 25.5 3
704 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.493 (T_QHO) - (T_qho)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_QHO
Logical Name T_qho
Definition Maximum queuing time for Handover Requests.
Mandatory rules T_INTRF_L3 > Max (T11, T_qho, T11_FORCED)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 20 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 705 / 1278

5.2.494 (T_SDCCH_PC) - (T_SDCCH_PC)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_SDCCH_PC
Logical Name T_SDCCH_PC
Definition Time during which power control on SDCCH is inhibited after

completion of the Immediate Assignment procedure.
Coding rules step size = 1 (2 x Samfr)
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules T_SDCCH_PC >= SDCCH_COUNTER
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
2 x Samfr 0 31 5
706 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.495 (T1) - (T1_short)
Logical Name T1_short
Definition Supervision of the Blocking/Unblocking procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules T1_short > (31 x T_BURST) / B_NUM
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 10 25.5 16
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 707 / 1278

5.2.496 (T11) - (T11)
Logical Name T11
Definition Maximum queuing time for Assignment Requests.
Coding rules step size = 1 s
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 19 6
708 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.497 (T11_FORCED) - (T11_FORCED)
Parameter Name HMI Name T11_FORCED
Logical Name T11_FORCED
Definition Maximum queuing time for Assignment Requests where queuing is

not allowed by the MSC.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
sec 0 19 4
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 709 / 1278

5.2.498 (T13) - (T13)
Logical Name T13
Definition Delay for acknowledgement of RESET received from MSC.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 6553.5 15
710 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.499 (T17) - (T17)
Logical Name T17
Definition Period of time where a new OVERLOAD that is received from the
MSC, is not processed after reception of a processed OVERLOAD.
Coding rules step size: 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules T17 < T18_overload
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 6553.5 30
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 711 / 1278

5.2.500 (T18) - (T18)
Logical Name T18
Definition Delay between consecutive debarring actions after a BSS outage.
Coding rules Step size: 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 6553.5 50
712 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.501 (T18_OVERLOAD) - (T18_Overload)
Parameter Name HMI Name T18_OVERLOAD
Logical Name T18_Overload
Definition Delay between the latest MSC OVERLOAD message or DTC

internal overload detection and debarring action. Also delay between
consecutive debarring actions for overload procedure and Telecom
global reset procedure.
Coding rules step size: 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules T18_OVERLOAD > T17
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 6553.5 50
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 713 / 1278

5.2.502 (T19) - (T19)
Logical Name T19
Definition Supervision of the Reset Circuit procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0.1 25.5 10
714 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.503 (T20) - (T20)
Logical Name T20
Definition Supervision of Circuit Group Blocking procedure.
Coding rules step size=0.1 sec
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 10 25.5 16
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 715 / 1278

5.2.504 (T200 (BSC)) - (T200 (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name T200 (BSC)
Logical Name T200 (BSC)
Definition Supervision of acknowledgements.
Coding rules step size: 100ms; (1: 100ms, 2: 200ms, 3: 300ms, 4: 400ms, .. .
, 10: 1000ms
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules The recommended value for Abis via satellite is 1000 ms.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance A-bis link
ms 300 1000 300
External Comment The value of T200 (BSC) is driven by the associated Abis connection
type.
It can be changed indirectly from the OMC (through the change of
Abis connection type)
The default value 300 ms corresponds to Abis terrestrial link.
716 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.505 (T200_TF) - (T200_TF)
Parameter Name HMI Name T200_TF
Logical Name T200_TF
Definition Supervision of acknowledgements for FACCH (TCH FR associated)

SAPI 0.
Coding rules Step size = 20 msec
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Values higher than 1000ms are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
ms 200 5100 200
External Comment Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going

traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately on new CS calls
established after modification.
When Repeated DL FACCH is used, 40msec are automatically

added by the BTS.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 717 / 1278

5.2.506 (T200_TH) - (T200_TH)
Parameter Name HMI Name T200_TH
Logical Name T200_TH
Definition Supervision of acknowledgements for FACCH (TCH HR associated)

SAPI 0.
Coding rules step size = 20 msec.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Values higher than 1000ms are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
ms 180 5100 180
External Comment Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going

traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately on new CS calls
established after modification.
When Repeated DL FACCH is used, 40msec are automatically

added by the BTS.
718 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.507 (T3101) - (T3101)
Logical Name T3101
Definition Supervision of the Immediate Assignment procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules T3101 > 2s
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
sec 0 25.5 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 719 / 1278

5.2.508 (T3103) - (T3103)
Logical Name T3103
Definition Supervision of the Internal Handover procedure.
Mandatory rules T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_D.

T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_F_FR.
T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_F_HR.
T3103 > T3106_D.
T3103 > T3106_F
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 25.5 16.5
720 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.509 (T3105D) - (T3105_D)
Parameter Name HMI Name T3105D
Logical Name T3105_D
Definition Delay between consecutive repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATION

on SDCCH.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules T3105_D x Ny1 < T3103

T3105_D x Ny1 < T9113
Recommended rules T3105_D x Ny1 > T3124

T3105_D << T3124 (T3124 = 675 ms on SDCCH)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
ms 200 220 200
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 721 / 1278

5.2.510 (T3105D_STOP) - (T3105_D_STOP)
Parameter Name HMI Name T3105D_STOP
Logical Name T3105_D_STOP
Definition Criterion to stop T3105_D timer.
Coding rules 0: stopped on reception of SABM frame, 1: stopped on reception of

any correct L2 signalling frame
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
722 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.511 (T3105F_FR) - (T3105_F_FR)
Parameter Name HMI Name T3105F_FR
Logical Name T3105_F_FR

on FACCH for FR channels.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules T3105_F_FR x Ny1 < T3103

T3105_F_FR x Ny1 < T9113
Recommended rules T3105_F_FR x Ny1 > T3124

T3105_F_FR << T3124 (T3124 = 320 ms on TCH)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
ms 20 250 50
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 723 / 1278

5.2.512 (T3105F_HR) - (T3105_F_HR)
Parameter Name HMI Name T3105F_HR
Logical Name T3105_F_HR

on FACCH for HR channels.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules T3105_F_HR x Ny1 < T3103

T3105_F_HR x Ny1 < T9113
Recommended rules T3105_F_HR x Ny1 > T3124

T3105_F_HR << T3124 (T3124 = 320 ms on TCH)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
ms 20 250 100
724 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.513 (T3105F_STOP) - (T3105_F_STOP)
Parameter Name HMI Name T3105F_STOP
Logical Name T3105_F_STOP
Definition Criterion to stop T3105_F timer.

any correct L2 signalling frame or of a correct traffic frame
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 725 / 1278

5.2.514 (T3106D) - (T3106_D)
Parameter Name HMI Name T3106D
Logical Name T3106_D
Definition Supervision of the reception of valid frame from the MS on the target
cell in case of SDCCH synchronous handover.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules T3106_D < T3103

T3106_D < T9113
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
ms 1100 1500 1200
726 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.515 (T3106D_STOP) - (T3106_D_STOP)
Parameter Name HMI Name T3106D_STOP
Logical Name T3106_D_STOP
Definition Criterion to stop T3106_D timer.

any correct L2 signalling frame
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 727 / 1278

5.2.516 (T3106F) - (T3106_F)
Parameter Name HMI Name T3106F
Logical Name T3106_F
Definition Supervision of the reception of valid frame from the MS on the target
cell in case of TCH synchronous handover.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules T3106_F < T3103

T3106_F < T9113
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
ms 500 1000 1000
728 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.517 (T3106F_STOP) - (T3106_F_STOP)
Parameter Name HMI Name T3106F_STOP
Logical Name T3106_F_STOP
Definition Criterion to stop T3106_F timer.

any correct L2 signalling frame or of a correct traffic frame
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 729 / 1278

5.2.518 (T3107) - (T3107)
Logical Name T3107
Definition Supervision of the Assignment procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 25.5 14
730 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.519 (T3109) - (T3109)
Logical Name T3109
Definition Supervision of the Channel Release procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules T3109 > RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT + 1s
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 35 12
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 731 / 1278

5.2.520 (T3111) - (T3111)
Logical Name T3111
Definition Delay of the RF Channel Release procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules T3111 > 2 x T200_D. T3111 > 2 x T200_TH. T3111 = T3110 (MS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 2 0.5
732 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.521 (T3212) - (T3212 (BSC))
Definition This timer indicates to the MS the delay between two consecutive
Periodic Location Update procedures.
Coding rules 0: no periodic location update
Mandatory rules Equal to T3212 (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
6 mn 0 255 30
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 733 / 1278

5.2.522 (T4) - (T4)
Logical Name T4
Definition Supervision of RESET message sent to the MSC.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 2 6553.5 3
External Comment T4 shall be set greater than T2 (timer in MSC).
734 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.523 (T7) - (T7)
Logical Name T7
Definition Timer controlling the repetition of HANDOVER REQUIRED.
Mandatory rules T7 < T_HO_REQD_LOST
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 20 5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 735 / 1278

5.2.524 (T8) - (T8)
Logical Name T8
Definition Supervision of the External Handover procedure in the serving BSC.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 25.5 14
736 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.525 (T9104) - (T9104)
Logical Name T9104
Definition Supervision of the call clearing procedure when triggered by the BSC.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 25.5 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 737 / 1278

5.2.526 (T9105) - (T9105)
Logical Name T9105
Definition Supervision of the SCCP Connection procedure.
Mandatory rules T9105 > T(conn est)
Recommended rules T9105 > max T3210. T9105 > max T3220. T9105 > max T3230
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 11 6553,5 31
738 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.527 (T9112) - (T9112)
Logical Name T9112
Definition Supervision of the channel modification in the MS.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules T9112 >= 15s. T9112 <= T9114. T9112 is inferior to the MSC timer
supervising the Modify procedure.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0.1 6553.5 15
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 739 / 1278

5.2.528 (T9113) - (T9113)
Logical Name T9113
Definition Supervision of the External Handover procedure in the target BSC.
Mandatory rules T9113 > T3105_D x Ny1. T9113 > T3105_F x Ny1. T9113 >
T3106_D. T9113 > T3106_F
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 25.5 20
740 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.529 (TA_STAT) - (TA_STAT)
Parameter Name HMI Name TA_STAT
Logical Name TA_STAT
Definition Threshold on timing advance to define the cell limit used for Radio
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
bper 0 63 8
External Comment 1 bper corresponds to about 550m
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 741 / 1278

5.2.530 (TCH load threshold for Auto AC) - (N_threshold)
Parameter Name HMI Name TCH load threshold for Auto AC
Logical Name N_threshold
Definition Threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage for automatic barring

of access classes.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 100
742 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.531 (TEMPORARY_OFFSET) - (TEMPORARY_OFFSET)
Parameter Name HMI Name TEMPORARY_OFFSET
Logical Name TEMPORARY_OFFSET
Definition Offset applied to C2 criterion for the duration of PENALTY_TIME.
Coding rules step size = 10dB. 0: 0dB, 1:10dB, 6: 60dB, 7: infinity
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 infinity 0
External Comment If the VGCS is licensed, the parameter is modifiable only via the
provisioning context of the OMC.
Umbrella 0 dB (0)
Concentric 0 dB (0)
Microcell infinity (7)
Minicell infinity (7)
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 743 / 1278

5.2.532 (TFO HR when loaded) - (FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED)
Parameter Name HMI Name TFO HR when loaded
Logical Name FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED
Definition Flag to control the establishment of TFO in Half Rate, when the cell
is loaded and the call is currently allocated with an Half Rate codec
type (HR or AMR-NB HR) for load reason.
Coding rules 0 : "TFO with Half Rate codec not forced",

if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec,
the BSC will propose to establish TFO with all the supported codec
types, including the Full Rate ones (except the FR AMR-WB codec).
1 : "TFO with Half Rate codec only",
if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec, it
will stay in Half Rate even in case of TFO mismatch situation (if TFO
is not possible in Half Rate on remote side, TFO is not established).
2 : "TFO with Half Rate codec preferred",
if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec,
the BSC will propose in a first step to establish TFO providing only
the supported Half Rate codecs only. If TFO is not possible in Half
Rate on remote side, the BSC will try to establish TFO with all the
supported codec types, including the Full Rate ones (except the FR
AMR-WB codec), provided that EN_TFO_MATCH=1.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules If FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED=2, EN_TFO_MATCH should

be set to 1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 2 0
External Comment When the call is currently allocated with AMR-NB HR for load reason
and when TFO is possible for that call (TFO on AMR-NB supported
by the TC and configured in the cell), then the BSC automatically
behaviors as "TFO with Half Rate codec only", and set the list of the
supported codec types according to the ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST
parameter.
744 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.533 (THR_CCCH_LOAD) - (THR_CCCH_LOAD)
Parameter Name HMI Name THR_CCCH_LOAD
Logical Name THR_CCCH_LOAD
Definition Threshold triggering the sending of CCCH LOAD INDICATION

message.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 100 3000 500
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 745 / 1278

5.2.534 (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1) - (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1)
Parameter Name HMI Name THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1
Logical Name THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1
Definition Lower load threshold for allocation policy with HR or AMR-NB HR

codec type in a dual rate cell.
Mandatory rules THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 <= THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 &

THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1>=THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3
Recommended rules When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 value, it is

recommended to check that the number of DR TCH in the cell is
greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1) /100*total number of
TCH in the cell.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 100
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
0 20 30 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
746 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.535 (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3) - (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3)
Parameter Name HMI Name THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3
Logical Name THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3
Definition Lower load threshold for allocation policy with AMR-NB HR codec
type and for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover (Cause 26 and
Cause 27) in a dual rate cell.
Coding rules Step size = 10%
Mandatory rules THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 <= THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 &

THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3<=THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1
Recommended rules When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 value, it is

greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3) /100*total number of
TCH in the cell.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 100
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
0 20 30 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 747 / 1278

5.2.536 (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1) - (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1)
Parameter Name HMI Name THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1
Logical Name THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1
Definition Higher load threshold for allocation policy with HR or AMR-NB HR

codec type in a dual rate cell.
Mandatory rules THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 >= THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 &

THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1>=THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3
Recommended rules When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 value, it is

greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1) /100*total number of
TCH in the cell.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 100
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
748 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.537 (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3) - (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3)
Parameter Name HMI Name THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3
Logical Name THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3
Definition Higher load threshold for allocation policy with AMR-NB HR codec
type and for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover (Cause 26 and
Cause 27) in a dual rate cell.
Mandatory rules THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 >= THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 &

THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3<=THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1
Recommended rules When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 value, it is

greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3) /100*total number of
TCH in the cell.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 100
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 749 / 1278

5.2.538 (THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH) - (THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH)
Parameter Name HMI Name THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH
Logical Name THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH
Definition Threshold for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover under high load
(Cause 26 and Cause 27).
Mandatory rules THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH >= THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
750 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.539 (THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL) - (THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL)
Parameter Name HMI Name THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL
Logical Name THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL
Definition Threshold for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover under normal

load (Cause 26 and Cause 27).
Mandatory rules THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH >= THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 751 / 1278

5.2.540 (TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD) - (TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD)
Parameter Name HMI Name TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD
Logical Name TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD
Definition Periodicity of traffic load update in resource allocation algorithms =

N_TRAFFIC_LOAD x A_TRAFFIC_LOAD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem OMC
Instance cell
sec 2 3264 120
External Comment The given default value corresponds to the value calculated by the
OMC, based on the values of N_TRAFFIC_LOAD (which depends
on the nb of TRX in the cell, not reflected by DLS default value),
A_TRAFFIC_LOAD (which depends on the nb of TRX in the cell, not
reflected by DLS default value), TCH_INFO_PERIOD.
752 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.541 (TRX zone) - (ZONE_TYPE)
Parameter Name HMI Name TRX zone
Logical Name ZONE_TYPE
Definition Determines which TRX(s) belong to the inner zone and which TRX(s)
belong to the outer zone of a concentric cell.
Coding rules Coded as a 16 bits bitmap. Each bit specifies the zone the
corresponding TRX (if declared) belongs to. 0: Outer zone, 1: Inner
zone.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Bitmap
SubSystem BSC
Instance TRX
None 0 65535 0
Umbrella N/A
Concentric #
Microcell N/A
Minicell N/A
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 753 / 1278

5.2.542 (TRX_CIPH_CAP) - (TRX_CIPH_CAP)
Parameter Name HMI Name TRX_CIPH_CAP
Logical Name TRX_CIPH_CAP
Definition Indicates the ciphering algorithms supported by the TRX in TDM

mode and in IP mode.
Coding rules The first byte indicates the ciphering capability in TDM mode.
The second byte indicates the ciphering capability in IP mode.
Each byte is coded as a 8 bits bitmap. Each bit indicates if
corresponding encryption algorithm is permitted.
Bit x=’0’ : encryption algorithm not supported

Bit x=’1’ : encryption algorithm supported
bit 0 : A5/0 (no ciphering)

bit 1 : A5/1.
bit 2 : A5/2
bit 3 : A5/3
bit 4 : A5/4
...
bit 7 : A5/7.
Mandatory rules The possible values for each byte are :

- A5/0 + A5/1
- A5/0 + A5/1 +A5/3
Category Site (CAE)
Type Bitmap
SubSystem BSC
Instance TRX
None 0 65535 771
External Comment A5/2 is not supported by the BSS.

Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here
(A5/0 + A5/1 for both mode) is for implementation purposes.
754 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.543 (TSC) - (TSC)
Parameter Name HMI Name TSC
Logical Name TSC
Definition Training Sequence Code for any (packet) channel except for BCCH,
CCCH and CBCH
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
Two training sequence codes are used in Alcatel BSS:

*) TSC for BCCH, CCCH and CBCH: the BSS sets the TSC to the
O&M parameter BCC. This behaviour is compliant to 3GPP TS 05.02
which states that for BCCH and CCCH, the TSC must be equal to
the BCC. In Alcatel BSS, for CBCH, the TSC is also set to BCC.
**) TSC for any other (packet) channel: the BSS sets the TSC to
the O&M parameter TSC.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 755 / 1278

5.2.544 (TX_INTEGER) - (Tx_integer (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name TX_INTEGER
Logical Name Tx_integer (BSC)
Definition Number of RACH timeslots that spread transmission of CHANNEL

REQUEST.
Coding rules Possible values are:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32,
50 respectively binary coded from 0000 to 1111
Mandatory rules Equal to Tx_integer (MFS)
Recommended rules When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater terrestrial links, it
is recommended to set:
TX_INTEGER = 32 if the CCCH is not combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF
=0
TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1.
When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater satellite links, it is

recommended to set:
TX_INTEGER = 32 whatever the configuration of the CCCH.
The number of slots belonging to the MS’s RACH between 2

successive Channel Request messages is a random value drawn
randomly for each new retransmission with uniform distribution in the
set (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1). With T = Tx_Integer and S depending on the
CCCH configuration as shown below:
1) for non combined CCCH:

- Tx_Integer = 3, 8, 14, 50 –> S = 55 RACH frames (i.e. 253.8 ms)
- Tx_Integer = 4, 9, 16 –> S = 76 RACH frames (i.e. 349.6 ms)
Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 –> S = 217 RACH frames (i.e. 998.2 ms)
2) for combined CCCH:

Note:
- In the non-combined CCCH configuration, there are 51 RACH
frames per 51-multiframe
- In the combined CCCH configuration, there are 27 RACH frames
per 51-multiframe.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
756 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Instance cell
None 3 50 32
External Comment When EN_GPRS=1, it is recommended to set:

=0
TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 757 / 1278

5.2.545 (U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO) - (U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO)
Parameter Name HMI Name U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO
Logical Name U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO
Definition Downlink level threshold for Microcell to Macrocell handover.
Coding rules coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -47
Umbrella N/A
Concentric N/A
Minicell N/A
758 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.546 (U_RXLEV_DL_P) - (U_RXLEV_DL_P)
Parameter Name HMI Name U_RXLEV_DL_P
Logical Name U_RXLEV_DL_P
Definition Upper downlink level threshold for power control.
Mandatory rules U_RXLEV_DL_P > L_RXLEV_DL_P
Recommended rules U_RXLEV_DL_P >= L_RXLEV_DL_P + 10 dB
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -75
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 759 / 1278

5.2.547 (U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO) - (U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO)
Parameter Name HMI Name U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO
Logical Name U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO
Definition Uplink level threshold for Microcell to Macrocell handover.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -47
Umbrella N/A
Concentric N/A
Minicell N/A
760 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.548 (U_RXLEV_UL_P) - (U_RXLEV_UL_P)
Parameter Name HMI Name U_RXLEV_UL_P
Logical Name U_RXLEV_UL_P
Definition Upper uplink level threshold for power control.
Coding rules coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm
Mandatory rules U_RXLEV_UL_P > L_RXLEV_UL_P
Recommended rules U_RXLEV_UL_P >= L_RXLEV_UL_P + 10 dB
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -75
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 761 / 1278

5.2.549 (U_RXQUAL_DL_P) - (U_RXQUAL_DL_P)
Parameter Name HMI Name U_RXQUAL_DL_P
Logical Name U_RXQUAL_DL_P
Definition Upper downlink quality threshold for power control.
Mandatory rules U_RXQUAL_DL_P < L_RXQUAL_DL_P
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 1
External Comment Highest value is the worst quality
762 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.550 (U_RXQUAL_UL_P) - (U_RXQUAL_UL_P)
Parameter Name HMI Name U_RXQUAL_UL_P
Logical Name U_RXQUAL_UL_P
Definition Upper uplink quality threshold for power control.
Mandatory rules U_RXQUAL_UL_P < L_RXQUAL_UL_P
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 1
External Comment Highest value is the worst quality
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 763 / 1278

5.2.551 (UPPER_TIMING_ADVANCE) - (U_TIME_ADVANCE)
Parameter Name HMI Name UPPER_TIMING_ADVANCE
Logical Name U_TIME_ADVANCE
Definition Timing Advance threshold for distance handover.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
bper 0 63 63
External Comment One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m
Cell Type Dependent Single 35 km (63)
Umbrella 35 km (63)
Concentric 35 km (63)
Concentric Umbrella 35 km (63)
Microcell 1 km (2)
Minicell 35 km (63)
Extended inner cell 34.5 km (62)
Extended outer cell 35 km (63)
764 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.552 (VQ_AVERAGE) - (VQ_AVERAGE)
Parameter Name HMI Name VQ_AVERAGE
Logical Name VQ_AVERAGE
Definition Average window size on measurements to obtain samples for Voice

Quality statistics.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
Samfr 0 128 6

defined. This allows to define "RMS tempates" (see parameter
RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 765 / 1278

5.2.553 (VQ_BAD_RXFER) - (VQ_BAD_RXFER)
Parameter Name HMI Name VQ_BAD_RXFER
Logical Name VQ_BAD_RXFER
Definition Radio bad FER threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice
Quality statistics.
Coding rules coded 0 to 200, step size=0.1% (0= 0%, 1 = 0.1 %, ..., 200 = 20%)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 20 3

RMS_template).
766 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.554 (VQ_FER_THRESHOLD) - (VQ_FER_THRESHOLD)
Parameter Name HMI Name VQ_FER_THRESHOLD
Logical Name VQ_FER_THRESHOLD
Definition Radio FER threshold to detect calls with bad speech quality for Voice
Quality statistics.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 30

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 767 / 1278

5.2.555 (VQ_GOOD_RXFER) - (VQ_GOOD_RXFER)
Parameter Name HMI Name VQ_GOOD_RXFER
Logical Name VQ_GOOD_RXFER
Definition Radio good FER threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice
Quality statistics.
Coding rules coded 0 to 200, step size=0.1% (0= 0%, 1 = 0.1 %, ..., 200 = 20%)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 20 1

RMS_template).
768 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.556 (VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD) - (VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD)
Parameter Name HMI Name VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD
Logical Name VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD
Definition Radio interference threshold to detect noisy calls for Voice Quality
statistics.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
% 0 100 30

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 769 / 1278

5.2.557 (VQ_RXLEV) - (VQ_RXLEV)
Parameter Name HMI Name VQ_RXLEV
Logical Name VQ_RXLEV
Definition Radio level threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice Quality
statistics.
Coding rules 0 = -110 dBm, 1 = -109 dBm, 62 = -48 dBm, 63 = -47 dBm, step
= 1dBm
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
dBm -110 -47 -95

RMS_template).
770 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.558 (VQ_RXQUAL) - (VQ_RXQUAL)
Parameter Name HMI Name VQ_RXQUAL
Logical Name VQ_RXQUAL
Definition Radio quality threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice
Quality statistics.
Coding rules step size=0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 7 4

RMS_template).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 771 / 1278

5.2.559 (VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER) - (VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER)
Parameter Name HMI Name VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER
Logical Name VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER
Definition Radio quality threshold to specify correlation between quality

samples for Voice Quality statistics.
Coding rules step size=0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 7 4

RMS_template).
772 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.560 (W_LEV_HO) - (W_LEV_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name W_LEV_HO
Logical Name W_LEV_HO
Definition Weight applicable to level samples for handover when no DTX is

applied.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules A_LEV_HO + W_LEV_HO < 32
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 3 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 773 / 1278

5.2.561 (W_LEV_MCHO) - (W_LEV_MCHO)
Parameter Name HMI Name W_LEV_MCHO
Logical Name W_LEV_MCHO
Definition Weight applicable to level samples for microcell handover when no

DTX is applied.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules A_LEV_MCHO + W_LEV_MCHO < 16
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 3 1
Umbrella N/A
Concentric N/A
Microcell 1
Minicell N/A
774 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.562 (W_LEV_PC) - (W_LEV_PC)
Parameter Name HMI Name W_LEV_PC
Logical Name W_LEV_PC
Definition Weight applicable to level samples for power control when no DTX
is applied.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules A_LEV_PC + W_LEV_PC < 32
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 3 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 775 / 1278

5.2.563 (W_PBGT_HO) - (W_PBGT_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name W_PBGT_HO
Logical Name W_PBGT_HO
Definition Weight applicable to level samples for power budget when no DTX
is applied.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules A_PBGT_HO + W_PBGT_HO < 32
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 3 1
776 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.564 (W_QUAL_CA) - (W_QUAL_CA)
Parameter Name HMI Name W_QUAL_CA
Logical Name W_QUAL_CA
Definition Averaging weight applicable for full quality (Channel adaptation).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 3 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 777 / 1278

5.2.565 (W_QUAL_HO) - (W_QUAL_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name W_QUAL_HO
Logical Name W_QUAL_HO
Definition Weight applicable to quality samples for handover when no DTX

is applied.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules A_QUAL_HO + W_QUAL_HO < 32
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 3 1
778 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.566 (W_QUAL_PC) - (W_QUAL_PC)
Parameter Name HMI Name W_QUAL_PC
Logical Name W_QUAL_PC
Definition Weight applicable to quality samples for power control when no DTX
is applied.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules A_QUAL_PC + W_QUAL_PC < 32
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 3 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 779 / 1278

5.2.567 (WHITE_BOOK_INTERWORKING) - (MTP3_WB_INTERWORKING)
Parameter Name HMI Name WHITE_BOOK_INTERWORKING
Logical Name MTP3_WB_INTERWORKING
Definition This flag indicates if the BSC sends a Q.704 TRA message upon first
reception of SLTA from the MSC.
Coding rules 0 : TRA not sent upon first SLTA reception, 1 : TRA sent upon first
SLTA reception
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 0
External Comment - This flag is set to 1 for interworking with a "White Book" MSC. It is
set to 0 for interworking with a "Blue Book" MSC.
- Parameter change: after modification, a BSC restart procedure
is needed. On going calls are not disrupted (as long as no new
signalling exchange is needed) but the new traffic is not accepted
during that procedure.
780 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.568 (WI_CR) - (WI_CR)
Parameter Name HMI Name WI_CR
Logical Name WI_CR
Definition Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Call

Re-establishment".
Coding rules 0: 0s, 1: 1s, ..., 254: 254s, 255: no IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT
REJECT message is sent.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 255 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 781 / 1278

5.2.569 (WI_EC) - (WI_EC)
Parameter Name HMI Name WI_EC
Logical Name WI_EC
Definition Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Emergency call".
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 255 2
782 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.570 (WI_OC) - (WI_OC)
Parameter Name HMI Name WI_OC
Logical Name WI_OC
Definition Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Originating call".
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 255 5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 783 / 1278

5.2.571 (WI_OP) - (WI_OP)
Parameter Name HMI Name WI_OP
Logical Name WI_OP
Definition Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Location

updating" or "Other procedures which can be completed with an
SDCCH".
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 255 5
784 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.2.572 (ZONE_HO_HYST_DL) - (ZONE_HO_HYST_DL)
Parameter Name HMI Name ZONE_HO_HYST_DL
Logical Name ZONE_HO_HYST_DL
Definition Hysteresis applied to RXLEV_DL_ZONE for outer to inner zone

handover.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -40 40 6
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 785 / 1278

5.2.573 (ZONE_HO_HYST_UL) - (ZONE_HO_HYST_UL)
Parameter Name HMI Name ZONE_HO_HYST_UL
Logical Name ZONE_HO_HYST_UL
Definition Hysteresis applied to RXLEV_UL_ZONE for outer to inner zone

handover.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -40 40 6
786 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5.3 System (CST)

5.3.1 (Interference band 5 upper limit) - (INTFBD5)
Parameter Name HMI Name Interference band 5 upper limit
Definition Upper limit of interference band 5.
Mandatory rules –
Category System (CST)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -47
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 787 / 1278

5.3.2 (SMSCB_Mode) - (SMSCB_Mode)
Parameter Name HMI Name SMSCB_Mode
Logical Name SMSCB_Mode
Definition This parameter enables to select the mode of operation, either

OMC-R or CBC.
Coding rules 0: OMC-R, 1: CBC
Mandatory rules –
Category System (CST)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 1
788 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6 GPRS Telecom Parameters
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 789 / 1278

6.1 Network (CDE)

6.1.1 (BSSGP_T3) - (bssgp_T3)
Parameter Name HMI Name BSSGP_T3
Logical Name bssgp_T3
Definition Timer used by MFS to wait for Suspend acknowledgement from

SGSN.
Coding rules 1:0,1 ; 2: 0,2 ; ... ; 10: 1 ; ... ; 100: 10
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 0.1 10 0.6
790 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.2 (BSSGP_T4) - (bssgp_T4)
Parameter Name HMI Name BSSGP_T4
Definition Timer used by MFS to wait for Resume acknowledgement from

SGSN.
Coding rules 1:0,1 ; 2: 0,2 ; ... ; 10: 1 ; ... ; 100: 10
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules BSSGP_T4 < T_GPRS_Resume/ (Resume_retries+1))
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 0.1 10 0.6
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 791 / 1278

6.1.3 (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING) -
(EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING
Logical Name EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING
Definition This flag enables / disables autonomous rerouting of DL LLC PDUs.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules It is recommended not to activate simultaneously extended UL TBF

feature (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) and the DL PDU rerouting
feature (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 0 1 1
792 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.4 (EN_CBL) - (EN_CBL)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_CBL
Logical Name EN_CBL
Definition This flag enables / disables CBL feature (Leaky Bucket

Synchronisation)
Mandatory rules –
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 793 / 1278

6.1.5 (FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC) - (FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC)
Parameter Name HMI Name FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC
Logical Name FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC
Definition Safety factor to size BVC_Bucket_Size parameter, for downlink flow

control, on Gb interface.
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 1 100 20
794 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.6 (FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS) - (FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS)
Parameter Name HMI Name FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS
Logical Name FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS
Definition Safety factor to size default MS_Bucket_Size parameter, for downlink

flow control, on Gb interface.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS should be set to a value corresponding to

the maximum multi-slot class of the MS present on the network
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 1 10 5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 795 / 1278

6.1.7 (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF) -
(GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF)
Parameter Name HMI Name GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF
Logical Name GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF
Definition Threshold to enter the first level of GP(U) buffer congestion in a given
GP(U) (buffers used for LLC PDU storage and the BSCGP signalling
message storage).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2 >

GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF >
GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
% 0 100 70
796 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.8 (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON) -
(GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON)
Parameter Name HMI Name GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON
Logical Name GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON
Definition Threshold to exit the first level of GP(U) buffer congestion in a given
GP(U) (buffers used for LLC PDU storage and the BSCGP signalling
message storage).
Coding rules –

Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
% 0 100 50
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 797 / 1278

6.1.9 (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2) -
(GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2)
Parameter Name HMI Name GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2
Logical Name GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2
Definition Threshold defining the second level of GP(U) buffer congestion in a

given GP(U) (buffers used for LLC PDU storage and the BSCGP
signalling message storage).
Coding rules –

Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
% 0 100 90
798 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.10 (K_GSL (BSC)) - (K_GSL (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name K_GSL (BSC)
Logical Name K_GSL (BSC)
Definition Maximum number of outstanding I frames on a GSL link.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending

whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links:
- K_GSL = 7 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links in
all BSC of the MFS.
- K_GSL = 16 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links
in at least one BSC of the MFS.
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 1 16 7
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 799 / 1278

6.1.11 (K_GSL (MFS)) - (K_GSL (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name K_GSL (MFS)
Logical Name K_GSL (MFS)
Definition Maximum number of outstanding I frames on a GSL link.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –

- K_GSL = 7 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links in
all BSC of the MFS.
- K_GSL = 16 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links
in at least one BSC of the MFS.
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 1 32 7
800 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.12 (MAX_BLER) - (MAX_BLER)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_BLER
Logical Name MAX_BLER
Definition Maximum mean BLER value that a TBF can possibly reach
Coding rules step size = 0,05
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 0 0.95 0.35
External Comment The MAX_BLER value is used by RRM to evaluate the minimum
number of GCHs necessary to support RT traffic on a TRX.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 801 / 1278

6.1.13 (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC) -
(N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC)
Parameter Name HMI Name N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC
Logical Name N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC
Definition Number of bytes above which a transition from "short data" to "long
data" MS transfer shall be periodically reattempted (only useful in the
rare cases where such a transition previously failed).
Coding rules step size = 100 bytes
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS <=

N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
byte 100 100000 10000
External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.

- A transition from "short data" to "long data" MS transfer can only fail
in the rare cases where there is a too high number of TBFs on the
TRX / in some very specific reallocation failure scenarios.
A low value of N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC should
be avoided because it will tend to increase the CPU load of the
MFS for a defence case which should be rare (if TRX and Abis/Ater
transmission resources are properly dimensioned).
802 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.14 (N391) - (N391)
Parameter Name HMI Name N391
Logical Name N391
Definition Number of polling cycles before Frame Relay " full status enquiry"
(see ITU Q.933 Annex A, A.7).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 1 255 6
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 803 / 1278

6.1.15 (N392) - (N392)
Logical Name N392
Definition Error threshold (Frame Relay, see Q.933, Annex A).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules N392*T391 is the value of the link failure detection time
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 1 10 3
804 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.16 (N393) - (N393)
Logical Name N393
Definition Monitored error counts (Frame Relay, see ITU Q.933 Annex A, A.7).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 1 10 4
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 805 / 1278

6.1.17 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC) -
(NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC)
Parameter Name HMI Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC
Logical Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC
Definition In a G2 BSC, Xoff threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP messages

queued in the "GSL output buffer") above which channel requests are no
longer allowed to be sent on this GSL link.
The interest of those Xon/Xoff thresholds is to avoid "GSL output buffer"
overflow.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC <

NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 5 105 20
External Comment Applicable only to TDM mode.
806 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.18 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC) -
(NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC)
Parameter Name HMI Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC
Logical Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC
Definition In an Evolution BSC, Xoff threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP

messages queued in the "GSL output buffer") above which channel requests
are no longer allowed to be sent on this GSL link.
overflow.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC <

NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 5 105 84
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 807 / 1278

6.1.19 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC) -
(NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC)
Parameter Name HMI Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC
Logical Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC
Definition In a G2 BSC, Xon hysteresis threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP

messages queued in the "GSL output buffer") below which channel requests
can again be sent on this GSL link.
overflow.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC <

NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 5 105 10
808 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.20 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC) -
(NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC)
Parameter Name HMI Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC
Logical Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC
Definition In an Evolution BSC, Xon hysteresis threshold (in terms of number of

BSCGP messages queued in the "GSL output buffer") below which channel
requests can again be sent on this GSL link.
overflow.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC <

NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 5 105 52
External Comment Applicable only to TDM mode
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 809 / 1278

6.1.21 (NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN) - (NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN)
Parameter Name HMI Name NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN
Logical Name NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN
Definition For a PDCH, percentage of channel capacity (in terms of radio

block scheduling) which is exclusively reserved to NRT TBFs. That
capacity is not allowed to be allocated to a streaming TBF (RT PFC).
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
% 0 100 7
External Comment In each direction (DL or UL), the minimum number of NRT
TBFs which are possible (in all cases) to be established on
a PDCH is equal to ((NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN/100) *
(T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING/20ms)) rounded down to the
closest integer value. This minimum number of NRT TBFs is
guaranteed even in case of RT PFC allocation on the PDCH.
The higher the value of NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN, the higher

the risks of rejecting RT PFC creation requests.
The lower the value of NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN, the higher
the risks of rejecting NRT TBF establishment requests (signalling
or data traffic).
810 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.22 (PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER) - (PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER)
Parameter Name HMI Name PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER
Logical Name PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER
Definition Authorize or inhibit DL LLC PDU ordering according to the remaining

PDU lifetime.
Coding rules 0: ordering disabled, 1 : ordering enabled
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Should be set to "ordering disabled", when the MFS interfaces with
an Ericsson SGSN or any SGSN modifying the PDU Lifetime value
during data flows addressed to the same MS on the same LLC SAPI
in a non-acceptable manner, otherwise should be set to "ordering
enabled".
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 811 / 1278

6.1.23 (S_BECN) - (S_BECN)
Parameter Name HMI Name S_BECN
Logical Name S_BECN
Definition Number of consecutive frames with BECN bit before congestion is

stated.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 1 255 8
812 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.24 (SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR) -
(SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR)
Parameter Name HMI Name SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR
Logical Name SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR
Definition When computing the best candidate timeslot allocation for an NRT
TBF, this factor enables to give a higher weight (PDCH capacity)
to the already-established NRT TBFs having a higher scheduling
priority (combination of THP and of Precedence) than the TBF to be
established or reallocated.
This factor will tend to avoid piling up several TBFs with different
scheduling priorities on the same PDCHs, which would degrade the
throughput of the low-priority TBFs.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 1 10 2
External Comment The higher the value of T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING is, the

higher the value of SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR shall be,
in order to avoid degrading the throughput of the low-priority TBFs
in a significant manner (if it is possible according to the available
PDCHs in the cell).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 813 / 1278

6.1.25 (T_ACK_WAIT) - (T_ACK_WAIT)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_ACK_WAIT
Logical Name T_ACK_WAIT
Definition Timer defining the maximum time to wait for an MS answer (i.e.
Packet Control Ack or beginning of an UL TBF) to a network
solicitation sent on PACCH/DL when the MS is in PTM, or on PPCH
when the MS is in PIM and non-DRX mode, or on main DCCH when
the MS is in dedicated mode.
Mandatory rules –

whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite
links:
- T_ack_wait = 1200 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and
Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS.
- T_ack_wait = 1700 ms if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis
satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS and
Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0 (TDM).
- T_ack_wait = 2300 ms if GPRS traffic between BTS and MFS is
carried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms) in at least
one cell of the MFS and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for all
the corresponding BTS.
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 0.5 5 1.2
814 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.26 (T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH) - (T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH
Logical Name T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH
Definition Timer defining the maximum time to wait for a MS answer (i.e. Packet
Control Ack) to a network sollicitation sent on PPCH when the MS is
in PIM and DRX mode.
Coding rules step size = 0.1 sec ; 0 = 0; 1 = 0.1;... ;100 = 10
Mandatory rules –

links:
- T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH = 2.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried
through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS,
- T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH = 3 s if GPRS traffic is carried either
through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell
of the MFS.
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 0 10 2.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 815 / 1278

6.1.27 (T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC) -
(T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC
Logical Name T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC
Definition Timer value controlling the time duration between successive

resource reallocation attempts for candidate MSs (triggers T3 and
T4).
In a given cell, at each expiry of the T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC
timer :
- up to N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4 T4
reallocation attempts are performed,
- up to N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4 T4
reallocations are performed,
- up to 2 x N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T3 T3
reallocation attempts are performed,
- up to 2 x N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_SUCCESS_T3 T3
reallocations are performed.
Coding rules step size = 1 sec; value 1 means 1 sec; value 2 means 2 sec, and
so on
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules T_GCH_INACTIVITY > T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC in all the

cells of the BSS.
This constraints avoids as much as possible that some GCHs are
released and reestablished again some moments later. This way,
the T3 and T4 reallocations can benefit from the GCHs which are
currently unused, but still established.
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 1 20 1
External Comment This parameter, together with the parameters

N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T3,
N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_SUCCESS_T3 and
N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4, allows to :
- to control the reactivity of the BSS with regards to T3 and T4
reallocations,
- and to control the extra CPU load generated by T3
and T4 reallocation attempts (the lowest the value of
T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC, the highest the generated CPU
load).
816 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 817 / 1278

6.1.28 (T_GCH_release) - (Trelease)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_GCH_release
Logical Name Trelease
Definition Supervision of GCH link release for 16k channel.
Mandatory rules Trelease > Tdsl

Treq_pending > Trelease

links:
- Trelease = 500 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS,
- Trelease = 1000 ms if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis
satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS.
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
ms 200 1200 500
External Comment HMI name changed to precise that this timer is valid for GCH
channels. Former HMI name Trelease.
818 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.29 (T_GPRS_Resume) - (T_GPRS_Resume)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_GPRS_Resume
Logical Name T_GPRS_Resume
Definition Timer used by BSC, to wait for Resume acknowledgement from

SGSN before releasing the CS channel.
Coding rules step size = 0.1 sec, coded from 2 to 50
Mandatory rules T_GPRS_Resume < T3240 (10s)
Recommended rules T_GPRS_Resume > (BSSGP_T4 * (Resume_retries+1))
It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending

- T_GPRS_RESUME = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater
- T_GPRS_RESUME = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater
satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS.
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0.2 5 1
External Comment T3240 is a MS timer see 3GPP TS 24.008
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 819 / 1278

6.1.30 (T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING) -
(T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING
Logical Name T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING
Definition Maximum time between two scheduling of a given NRT TBF (either
between two DL block requests for a NRT DL TBF, or between two
UL blocks received for a given NRT UL TBF).
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 0.12 0.3 0.3
820 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.31 (T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE) -
(T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE
Logical Name T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE
Definition This timer controls the duration during which a MS context is kept
after receipt of a FLUSH-LL.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
ms 0 5000 1000
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 821 / 1278

6.1.32 (T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD) -
(T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD
Logical Name T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD
Definition This timer controls the maximum time during which a GPU waits for
the response to a rerouting request.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
ms 50 2000 500
822 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.33 (T_ul_2_ph_access) - (T_One_Block)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_ul_2_ph_access
Logical Name T_One_Block
Definition Timer to postpone the release of the M-EGCH link of a TRX, when
the TRX does not support any (E)GPRS traffic, but a one uplink block
has been allocated to a MS for a 2 phase access TBF establishment
on one of the RTSs of the TRX
Mandatory rules –

links:
- T_one_block = 4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
- T_one_block = 5 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis
satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS
(round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0
(TDM).
- T_one_block = 6 s if GPRS traffic between BTS and MFS is carried
through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms) in at least one
cell of the MFS and and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for all
the corresponding BTS.
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 3 10 4
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 823 / 1278

6.1.34 (T_ul_access_max) - (T_ul_access_max)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_ul_access_max
Logical Name T_ul_access_max
Definition Timer to limit the duration of an UL TBF establishment.
Coding rules step size = 50 ms, 0 = 0 ms, 1 = 50 ms,... , 100 = 5000 ms
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules The two following rules are recommended:

i) The Time T_ul_access_max shall be longer than the duration of a
radio allocation requested towards the BSC.
ii) A too long value of T_ul_access_max may lead to reserve
unnecessarily radio resources. It is recommended to set
T_ul_access_max = T_repeat + 240 ms Round_Trip_Delay, where
the T_Repeat is the maximum time between two successive packet
channel requests, 240 ms is a given margin. The value of T_Repeat
depends on the parameters S, TX_INT, and TX_INTEGER.
It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending on

whether or not GPRS traffic is carried between BTS and MFS
through satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms):
- T_ul_access_max = 1400 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis
and Ater terrestrial links in at least one cell of the MFS (and this is
irrespective of the BSS transport mode: Abis_transport_mode(MFS)
= TDM or IP or mixed mode),
- T_ul_access_max = 1000 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through
Abis or Ater satellite links in all the cells of the MFS (and this is
irrespective of the BSS transport mode: Abis_transport_mode(MFS)
= TDM or IP or mixed mode).
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
ms 0 5000 1400
824 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.35 (T_WAIT_FLUSH) - (T_WAIT_FLUSH)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_WAIT_FLUSH
Logical Name T_WAIT_FLUSH
Definition Timer monitoring the receipt of a Flush message or a GPRS suspend

message further to the release of the on-going TBF(s)
Coding rules Step size : 0.5 sec

1 coded 1; 1,5 coded 2; 2 coded 3; 2,5 coded 4; ....
15,5 coded 30 and 16 coded 31
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules The timer T_WAIT_FLUSH shall be set to the maximum cell
reselection duration plus the time for the MS to switch back to the old
cell and send a Packet Cell Change Failure message.
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 1 16 10
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 825 / 1278

6.1.36 (T1) - (bssgp_T1)
Definition Guards the (un)blocking procedures.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 1 30 3
826 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.37 (T2) - (bssgp_T2)
Definition Guards the reset procedure.
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 1 120 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 827 / 1278

6.1.38 (T200_GSL (MFS)) - (T200_GSL (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name T200_GSL (MFS)
Logical Name T200_GSL (MFS)
Definition Supervision of acknowledgements on the GSL link.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules T_GSL_Ack (MFS) > T200_GSL (MFS) * (1 + N200_GSL (MFS))

- T200_GSL(MFS) = 1 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater
terrestrial links in all BSC of the MFS.
- T200_GSL(MFS) = 2 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite
links in at least one BSC of the MFS.
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 1 2 1
828 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.39 (T391) - (T391)
Logical Name T391
Definition Link integrity verification polling timer (Frame Relay, see ITU Q.933,
Annex A, A.7).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules N392*T391 is the value of the link failure detection time
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 5 30 10
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 829 / 1278

6.1.40 (TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL) - (TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL)
Parameter Name HMI Name TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL
Logical Name TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL
Definition Multiplication factor used in the computation of the maximum number

of DL TBFs allowed to be established on a TRX for a given number
of GCHs on this TRX (i.e. in the M-EGCH link of this TRX).
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 0.1 5 1

- If there is a great amount of "short data" TBFs in the network
(delayed DL or extended UL phases are longer than actual TBF
traffic phases), the existing TBF limitations (in number of TBFs
established on a TRX for a given number of GCHs on this TRX) may
be too restrictive and lead to some TBF establishment failures. The
TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters allow
to increase this limit, so to be more flexible.
Another justification for the TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and
TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters is that the limits for DL and UL
TBF numbers may be different.
The TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters
are used in the formulae to compute Min_Nb_GCH_Best_Effort_XL
(RRM-PRH). An increase of their value should be validated by load
tests (in order to check, among others, that the DSP can support the
induced extra CPU load).
830 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.41 (TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL) - (TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL)
Parameter Name HMI Name TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL
Logical Name TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL
Definition Multiplication factor used in the computation of the maximum number

of UL TBFs allowed to be established on a TRX for a given number
of GCHs on this TRX (i.e. in the M-EGCH link of this TRX).
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 0.1 5 1

- If there is a great amount of "short data" TBFs in the network
(delayed DL or extended UL phases are longer than actual TBF
traffic phases), the existing TBF limitations (in number of TBFs
established on a TRX for a given number of GCHs on this TRX) may
be too restrictive and lead to some TBF establishment failures. The
TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters allow
to increase this limit, so to be more flexible.
Another justification for the TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and
TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters is that the limits for DL and UL
TBF numbers may be different.
The TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters
are used in the formulae to compute Min_Nb_GCH_Best_Effort_XL
(RRM-PRH). An increase of their value should be validated by load
tests (in order to check, among others, that the DSP can support the
induced extra CPU load).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 831 / 1278

6.1.42 (TnsBlock) - (Tns_block)
Parameter Name HMI Name TnsBlock
Logical Name Tns_block
Definition Time-out to trigger the block/unblock procedure.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 1 120 3
832 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.43 (TnsReset) - (Tns_reset)
Parameter Name HMI Name TnsReset
Logical Name Tns_reset
Definition Time-out for reset procedure.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 1 120 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 833 / 1278

6.1.44 (TnsTest) - (Tns_test)
Parameter Name HMI Name TnsTest
Logical Name Tns_test
Definition Overall time-out to test an NS-VC.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
sec 1 60 15
834 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.1.45 (Treq_pending) - (Treq_pending)
Parameter Name HMI Name Treq_pending
Logical Name Treq_pending
Definition Maximum time during which a GCH establishment or release request

from PMU can be delayed in MEGCH layer.
Mandatory rules Treq_pending > Trelease+Tcorr
Recommended rules Treq_pending > Testab+Tcorr
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
ms 1000 5200 2000
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 835 / 1278

6.2 Site (CAE)

6.2.1 (ACCESS_BURST_TYPE) - (ACCESS_BURST_TYPE)
Parameter Name HMI Name ACCESS_BURST_TYPE
Logical Name ACCESS_BURST_TYPE
Definition Format of the access burst used by (E)GPRS MSs when

sending a PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST, a PACKET CONTROL
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT or a PTCCH/U message.
Coding rules 0 : 8 bits access bursts, 1 : 11 bits access bursts
Mandatory rules A couple of mate cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have
the same ACCESS_BURST_TYPE when they are PS capable.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
836 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.2 (Allowed priority classes) - (PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD

(BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name Allowed priority classes
Logical Name PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (BSC)
Definition This parameter indicates whether or not a MS of a certain priority

class is allowed to do Packet access.
Coding rules Coded over 3 bits . 000: packet access not allowed in the cell;
011:packet access allowed for priority level 1; 100: packet access
allowed for priority level 1 to 2; 101: packet access allowed for priority
level 1 to 3; 110: packet access allowed for priority level 1 to 4
Mandatory rules Equal to PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 6 6
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 837 / 1278

6.2.3 (Allowed priority classes) - (PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD

(MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name Allowed priority classes
Logical Name PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (MFS)
Definition This parameter indicates whether or not a MS of a certain priority

class is allowed to do a Packet access.
Coding rules Coded over 3 bits . 000: packet access is not allowed in the cell;
011:packet access is allowed for priority level 1; 100: packet access
is allowed for priority level 1 to 2; 101: packet access is allowed for
priority level 1 to 3; 110: packet access allowed for priority level 1 to 4
Mandatory rules Equal to PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 6 6
External Comment Persistence level parameter for priority (i) is meaningless if the Radio
Priority (i) is not allowed
838 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.4 (ALPHA) - (ALPHA (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name ALPHA
Logical Name ALPHA (BSC)
Definition Alpha power control parameter.
Coding rules Possible values are : 0.0 to 1.0 with step of 0.1respectively binary
coded : 0000, 0001, 0010 ... 1010
Mandatory rules Equal to ALPHA (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 839 / 1278

6.2.5 (ALPHA) - (ALPHA (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name ALPHA
Logical Name ALPHA (MFS)
Definition Alpha power control parameter.
Coding rules Possible values are : 0.0 to 1.0 with step of 0.1respectively binary
coded : 0000, 0001, 0010 ... 1010
Mandatory rules Equal to ALPHA (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
840 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.6 (Ater_Usage_Threshold) - (Ater_Usage_Threshold)
Parameter Name HMI Name Ater_Usage_Threshold
Logical Name Ater_Usage_Threshold
Definition Threshold (percentage of used Ater nibbles, in a GPU) above which

the Ater usage is said "high".
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules A low value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage can be coherent

with a high value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will avoid reaching the
saturation point of 100% of the Ater resources used at the same
moment in the GPU).
Reciprocally, a high value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage
can be coherent with a low value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will
limit the risks of wasting, i.e. of not using, Ater resources in the GPU).
For all the Ater_Usage_Threshold values being defined for the
BSSs handled by the MFS, Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data
<= Ater_Usage_Threshold 30%. Indeed, for consistency reasons,
"short data" MS transfer optimizations should come prior to high
Ater usage optimizations.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
% 1 100 70

- When the Ater usage is "high", the
GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage is applied,
whereas when the Ater usage is "normal" (i.e. percentage of used
Ater nibbles is below the threshold), no GCH reduction factor is
applied.
Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going TBF

are not disrupted. Change applied only on new TBF established
after modification.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 841 / 1278

6.2.7 (Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data) -
(Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data)
Parameter Name HMI Name Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data
Logical Name Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data
Definition Threshold (percentage of used Ater nibbles, in a GPU) above which

the Ater usage is optimized for "short data" MS transfers.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules If Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data is not set to 100% (100%

meaning that there is no Ater usage optimization for "short data"
MS transfers), then it is recommended to set it to 30%, except if the
drawbacks of another value (as explained in the external comments)
are deemed acceptable.
For all the Ater_Usage_Threshold values being defined for the

BSSs handled by the MFS, Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data
<= Ater_Usage_Threshold 30%. Indeed, for consistency reasons,
"short data" MS transfer optimizations should come prior to high Ater
usage optimizations.
If it is seen as an important goal to save Ater resources in the

GPU, a value of Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data < 100%
is coherent with a low value of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY and
T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timers.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
% 0 100 100

- Setting Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data to 100% means that
there is no Ater usage optimization for "short data" MS transfers.
If Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data is not set to 100%:
- the higher the Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data value, the fewer
ping time degradations and data transfer delays will be experienced,
- the lower the Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data value, the more
accurate the Ater consumption in the GPU will be (i.e. potential
wastes of Ater resources will be minimized in the GPU).
Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going TBF

are not disrupted. Change applied only on new TBF established
after modification.
842 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 843 / 1278

6.2.8 (BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY) - (BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY)
Parameter Name HMI Name BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY
Logical Name BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY
Definition Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined Best Effort
Packet Flow Context, and for all MS traffic without PFC
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 12
External Comment Default value corresponds to the priority for interactive THP3.
The minimum value (the highest priority) corresponds to one priority
level below the streaming class.
844 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.9 (BS_AG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_AG_BLKS_RES
Logical Name BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS)
Definition Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the access grant channel
(AGCH), broadcast on the PBCCH for CS service establishment.
Coding rules coded on 3 bits (000 : 0, ...111 : 7)
Mandatory rules -BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS) = BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC) for a given

cell
-when CCCH_CONF=0 and CBCH is configured in the cell,
BS_AG_BLKS_RES>0
- when CCCH_CONF=2, max value of BS_AG_BLKS_RES is 7 and
BS_AG_BLKS_RES must be > 0 if CBCH is configured in the cell.
. if BCCH_EXT = false, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >=
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 7 4
External Comment - Maximum and Default values given for CCCH_CONF=0

- For CCCH_CONF=1, max=2, def=1
- Parameter change:
no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted.
But any modification impacts Paging (paging queues are reset and
paging is suspended until the reconfiguration is completed).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 845 / 1278

6.2.10 (BS_CV_MAX) - (BS_CV_MAX (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_CV_MAX
Logical Name BS_CV_MAX (BSC)
Definition Number of remaining RLC data blocks sent (per assigned PDCH) by
the MS, below which the Count Down procedure is entered.
One third of the number of RLC data blocks per assigned PDCH
before the MS checks if the resolution contention has failed.
Coding rules Coded on 4 bits (1==0001, 2 == 0010 .. 15 == 1111).
Mandatory rules Equal to BS_CV_MAX (MFS)
Recommended rules BS_CV_MAX should be set to a value equal to the "minimum" round
trip delay to optimise the uplink re-transmission of non-acknowledged
blocks and minimise window-stalled situations.
If BS_CV_MAX is set greater than round-trip-delay, uplink
retransmissions of unacknowledged blocks may be delayed.
links:
- BS_CV_MAX = 9 if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
terrestrial links in the serving cell,
- BS_CV_MAX = 15 if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis
satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 1 15 9
External Comment Used by the MS to start the countdown value process (release of
UL TBF) or to consider acknowledgement messages as valid for a
given RLC data block. Lower values avoid too many TBF releases
and reestablishments.
846 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.11 (BS_CV_MAX) - (BS_CV_MAX (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_CV_MAX
Logical Name BS_CV_MAX (MFS)
Definition Number of remaining RLC data blocks sent (per assigned PDCH) by
the MS, below which the Count Down procedure is entered.
One third of the number of RLC data blocks per assigned PDCH
before the MS checks if the resolution contention has failed.
Coding rules Coded on 4 bits (1==0001, 2 == 0010 .. 15 == 1111).
Mandatory rules Equal to BS_CV_MAX (BSC)
Recommended rules BS_CV_MAX should be set to a value equal to the "minimum" round
trip delay to optimise the uplink re-transmission of non-acknowledged
blocks and minimise window-stalled situations.
If BS_CV_MAX is set greater than round-trip-delay, uplink
retransmissions of unacknowledged blocks may be delayed.
links:
- BS_CV_MAX = 9 if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
- BS_CV_MAX = 15 if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis
satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 15 9
External Comment Used by the MS to start the countdown value process (release of
UL TBF) or to consider acknowledgement messages as valid for a
given RLC data block. Lower values avoid too many TBF releases
and reestablishments.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 847 / 1278

6.2.12 (BS_PA_MFRMS) - (BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_PA_MFRMS
Logical Name BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS)
Definition Number of 51 frame multiframes between consecutive occurrences

of a Paging Group, broadcast on the PBCCH for the CS service
establishment.
Coding rules coded on 3 bits (000 : 2, ... 111: 9)
Mandatory rules BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC) = BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS) for a given cell
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 2 9 5
is.
848 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.13 (BS_PAG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_PAG_BLKS_RES)
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_PAG_BLKS_RES
Logical Name BS_PAG_BLKS_RES
Definition Number of blocks allocated to the PAGCH or PDTCH or PACCH per

52 multiframe.
Coding rules coded on 4 bits (0001: 1, ..., 1010: 10)

The codepoints 0000: 0, 1011: 11 and 1100: 12 are not supported
by the ALCATEL BSS.
Mandatory rules BS_PAG_BLKS_RES < 12 BS_PBCCH_BLKS
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 10 2
External Comment According to 3GPP TS 05.02, the number of paging blocks "available"
on one PCCCH =
(12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES - BS_PBCCH_BLKS) * 64. In order for
the network to be able to page GPRS-attached Mobile Stations when
PCCCH is present in the cell, there shall be at least one radio block
where paging can occur. This requires (12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES -
BS_PBCCH_BLKS) to be strictly greater than 0.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 849 / 1278

6.2.14 (BS_PBCCH_BLKS) - (BS_PBCCH_BLKS)
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_PBCCH_BLKS
Logical Name BS_PBCCH_BLKS
Definition Number of blocks allocated to the PBCCH per 52 multiframe.
Coding rules coded on 2 bits : 00=Block B0 used for PBCCH, 01=Block B0, B6
used for PBCCH, 10=Block B0, B6, B3 used for PBCCH, 11=Block
B0, B6, B3, B9 used for PBCCH
Mandatory rules BS_PBCCH_BLKS < 12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 4 4
850 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.15 (BS_PRACH_BLKS_MIN) - (BS_PRACH_BLKS)
Parameter Name HMI Name BS_PRACH_BLKS_MIN
Logical Name BS_PRACH_BLKS
Definition Number of blocks statically allocated to the PRACH per 52 multiframe

on each MPDCH.
Coding rules coded on 4 bits (0001: 1, .., 1000: 8)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 8 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 851 / 1278

6.2.16 (BS_TXPWR_MAX) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name BS_TXPWR_MAX
Logical Name BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS)
maximum GMSK output power of the BTS.
A finer power attenuation, BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION defined in
step of 0.1dB, is managed instead.

0 0 0 0 = 0 dB,
0 0 0 1 = -2 dB,
0 0 1 0 = -4 dB,
..., 1 1 1 1 = -30 dB
Mandatory rules Equal to BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dB -30 0 0
limitation).
852 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.17 (BVCI) - (PTP_BVCI)
Parameter Name HMI Name BVCI
Logical Name PTP_BVCI
Definition PTP BVCI value.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 2 65535 #
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 853 / 1278

6.2.18 (C31_HYST) - (C31_HYST)
Parameter Name HMI Name C31_HYST
Logical Name C31_HYST
Definition Determines whether an additional cell hysteresis shall

be applied to the C31 criterion. The hysteresis is
GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS (for NC0 mode).
Coding rules 0 : no, 1 : yes
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
854 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.19 (C32_QUAL) - (C32_QUAL)
Parameter Name HMI Name C32_QUAL
Logical Name C32_QUAL
Definition Flag indicating an exception rule for GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET

in NC0 mode.
Coding rules 0=NO, 1=YES
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 855 / 1278

6.2.20 (Capacity) - (ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC))
Parameter Name HMI Name Capacity
Logical Name ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC)
Definition Physical access rate of the Frame Relay bearer channel.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem OMC
Instance BC
kbit/s 64 1984 64
856 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.21 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) - (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS))
Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS)
Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS) = CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET

(BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dB 0 126 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 857 / 1278

6.2.22 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) -
(CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS))
Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS)
Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS) =

CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (n)(BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
dB 0 126 0
858 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.23 (CI) - (CI (MFS))
Logical Name CI (MFS)
Definition Cell Identity.
Coding rules –
Equal to CI (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 65535 65535
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 859 / 1278

6.2.24 (CI) - (CI(n) (MFS))
Logical Name CI(n) (MFS)
Definition Cell Identity of adjacent cell.
Coding rules Values 0..65535 correspond to the standard CI-value.
Equal to CI(n)(BSC).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
None 0 65535 65535
860 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.25 (Commited Burst Size) - (CBS)
Parameter Name HMI Name Commited Burst Size
Logical Name CBS
Definition Commited Burst Size.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0

CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance PVC
kbyte 0 248 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 861 / 1278

6.2.26 (Committed Information Rate) - (CIR)
Parameter Name HMI Name Committed Information Rate
Logical Name CIR
Definition Committed Information Rate.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules CIR=0 when "direct access" is used, CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance PVC
kbit/s 0 1984 0
862 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.27 (CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT) - (CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT
Logical Name CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT
Definition "Forgetting time" in the long term averaging of channel quality

measurements in the GPRS link Adaptation: measurements which
are older than CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT are negligible in the average of
channel quality measurements.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.02 5 2
External Comment Parameter change: any modification impacts the telecom PS service.
The on-going PS traffic of the BSS is broken and no new traffic is
accepted until the related GP/GPU(s) restarted.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 863 / 1278

6.2.28 (CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST) - (CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST
Logical Name CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST
Definition "Forgetting time" in the short term averaging of channel quality

measurements in the GPRS link adaptation: measurements which
are older than CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST are negligible in the average of
channel quality measurements.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.02 5 0.32
864 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.29 (CS_BLER_DL_3_4) - (CS_BLER_DL_3_4)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_BLER_DL_3_4
Logical Name CS_BLER_DL_3_4
Definition CS3 BLER threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change
the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when
the SIR measurements are not reported by the MS
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
% 0 100 5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 865 / 1278

6.2.30 (CS_BLER_DL_4_3) - (CS_BLER_DL_4_3)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_BLER_DL_4_3
Logical Name CS_BLER_DL_4_3
Definition CS4 BLER threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change
the SIR measurements are not reported by the MS.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
% 0 100 15
866 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.31 (CS_HST_DL_LT) - (CS_HST_DL_LT)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_HST_DL_LT
Logical Name CS_HST_DL_LT
Definition Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_LT thresholds used in the downlink

radio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 6 0.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 867 / 1278

6.2.32 (CS_HST_DL_ST) - (CS_HST_DL_ST)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_HST_DL_ST
Logical Name CS_HST_DL_ST
Definition Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_ST thresholds used in the

downlink radio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 6 1.5
868 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.33 (CS_HST_UL_LT) - (CS_HST_UL_LT)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_HST_UL_LT
Logical Name CS_HST_UL_LT
Definition Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_LT thresholds used in the uplink

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 6 0.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 869 / 1278

6.2.34 (CS_HST_UL_ST) - (CS_HST_UL_ST)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_HST_UL_ST
Logical Name CS_HST_UL_ST
Definition Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_ST thresholds used in the uplink

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 6 1.5
870 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.35 (CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD) - (CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD
Logical Name CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD
Definition Maximum transfer inactivity time to reuse the previous (Modulation

and) Coding Scheme. This applies in case of transfer resumption
during inactive TBF phase (delayed downlink TBF mode / extended
uplink TBF mode) and in case of uplink TBF establishment on
PACCH while extended uplink TBF mode is not used (with some
additional restrictions).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
ms 0 5000 680
External Comment This parameter applies to both GPRS and EGPRS TBFs.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 871 / 1278

6.2.36 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK
Logical Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK
Definition RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change

the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a
hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 6
872 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.37 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK
Logical Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK

the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a
hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 873 / 1278

6.2.38 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK
Logical Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK

non-hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 5
874 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.39 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK) -
(CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK
Logical Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK

non-hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 875 / 1278


hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 4
876 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 877 / 1278


non-hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 3.5
878 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


non-hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 879 / 1278


hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 0.5
880 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 881 / 1278


non-hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 0.5
882 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


non-hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 883 / 1278

6.2.48 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK
Logical Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK

the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the uplink direction when
hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 6
884 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.49 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK
Logical Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK

hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 885 / 1278

6.2.50 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK
Logical Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK

non-hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 5
886 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.51 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK) -
(CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK
Logical Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK

non-hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 887 / 1278

Definition Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the

Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when the
RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping
TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 4
888 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a
hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 889 / 1278


Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when
non-hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 3.5
890 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


non-hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 891 / 1278


RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping
TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 0.5
892 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 893 / 1278


Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the uplink direction when
non-hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 0.5
894 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


non-hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 895 / 1278

6.2.60 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK
Logical Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK
Definition Signal to Interference Ratio threshold used in the link adaptation

algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the
downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the
TBF is established on a hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 15 14
896 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.61 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK
Logical Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK

downlink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the
TBF is established on a hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 15 15
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 897 / 1278

6.2.62 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK
Logical Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK

downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the
TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 15 13
898 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.63 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK
Logical Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK

downlink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the
TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 15 15
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 899 / 1278

6.2.64 (CS_SIR_HST_DL) - (CS_SIR_HST_DL)
Parameter Name HMI Name CS_SIR_HST_DL
Logical Name CS_SIR_HST_DL
Definition Signal to Interference Ratio hysteresis used in the link adaptation

downlink direction.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 15 1
900 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.65 (Data Link Connection Identifier) - (DLCI)
Parameter Name HMI Name Data Link Connection Identifier
Logical Name DLCI
Definition Data Link Connection Identifier, corresponds to a PVC identifier, see

Q.922 Annex A, Table 1.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance PVC
None 16 991 None
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 901 / 1278

6.2.66 (DRX_TIMER_MAX) - (DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name DRX_TIMER_MAX
Logical Name DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC)
Definition Maximum value allowed for the MS to request for non-DRX mode
after packet transfer mode.
Coding rules Radio coding :Possible values : 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 respectively

binary coded as 000, 001, ..., 111
ONLY THE VALUES 0, 1, 2 AND 4 ARE POSSIBLE in ALCATEL
BSS.
Mandatory rules Equal to DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
sec 0 4 2
902 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.67 (DRX_TIMER_MAX) - (DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name DRX_TIMER_MAX
Logical Name DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS)
Definition Maximum value allowed for the MS to request for non-DRX mode
after packet transfer mode.
Coding rules Radio coding :Possible values : 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 respectively

binary coded as 000, 001, ..., 111
ONLY THE VALUES 0, 1, 2 AND 4 ARE POSSIBLE in ALCATEL
BSS.
Mandatory rules Equal to DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0 4 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 903 / 1278

6.2.68 (EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION) -
(EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION
Logical Name EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC)
Definition Enables/disables the CS paging coordination managed in the BSS

for MS in Packet Transfer Mode.
Mandatory rules - EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC) =

EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS)
- can be enabled only if (network_operation_mode <> NMO I) and
(round_trip_delay < 500 msec for all the cells of the BSS)
Recommended rules - if EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION is set to enabled, it is highly

recommended to set EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE to enabled.
- if EN_DTM is Enabled for at least one cell within the BSS it is highly
recommended to activate CS Paging Coordination for the BSS,
either through the Gs Interface (network_operation_mode = NMO
I) or by setting EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to "Enabled"
(network_operation_mode <> NMO I).
- if a BSC is connected to a MFS but GPRS is disabled (EN_GPRS
= false) for any cells of the BSS, it is recommended to set
EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to disabled for that BSS.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
External Comment The support of paging coordination in the BSS is not compatible with
the "GPRS through satellite connection on Abis or Ater interface"
feature.
904 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.69 (EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION) -
(EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION
Logical Name EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS)
Definition Enables/disables the CS paging coordination managed in the BSS

for MS in Packet Transfer Mode.
Mandatory rules - EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS) =

EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC)
- can be enabled only if (network_operation_mode <> NMO I) and
(round_trip_delay < 500 msec for all the cells of the BSS)
Recommended rules - if EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION is set to enabled, it is highly

recommended to set EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE to enabled.
- if EN_DTM is Enabled for at least one cell within the BSS it is highly
- if a BSC is connected to a MFS but GPRS is disabled (EN_GPRS
= false) for any cells of the BSS, it is recommended to set
EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to disabled for that BSS.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
External Comment The support of paging coordination in the BSS is not compatible with
the "GPRS through satellite connection on Abis or Ater interface"
feature.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 905 / 1278

6.2.70 (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK) - (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK
Logical Name EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK
Definition Enables / disables the link adaptation in RLC acknowledged mode.
Coding rules 0: Disable; 1: Enable
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules If EN_STREAMING = 1 then it is recommended to set

EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK to "TRUE" in order to activate the link
adaptation mechanism so that the (M)CS can reach a suitable level
regarding the level of the configured Rmin_(E)GPRS. Otherwise,
the streaming PFCs can be downgraded to the Default Best Effort
ABQP because the negotiated GBR cannot be reached on the radio
interface.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
906 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.71 (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK) - (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK
Logical Name EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK
Definition Enables / disables the link adaptation in RLC unacknowledged
Coding rules 0: Disable; 1: Enable
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 907 / 1278

6.2.72 (EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING) -
(EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING
Logical Name EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING
Definition This flag enables / disables rerouting of DL LLC PDUs.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
External Comment This parameter locks only the rerouting part of the feature. It has no
effect on the securisation part.
This parameter applies to both, intra-NSE and inter-NSE cell change.
908 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.73 (EN_EGPRS) - (EN_EGPRS)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_EGPRS
Logical Name EN_EGPRS
Definition Enables/Disables EGPRS traffic in the cell.
Coding rules 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Mandatory rules EN_EGPRS = enable only if MAX_PDCH > 0.
Recommended rules If EN_EGPRS is set to ’enable’, Alcatel recommend to set the

parameter PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX to ’0’.
In case of extended cell, Alcatel recommend to set the same value in
both, inner and outer, cells.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment From system point of view, when EN_EGPRS = ’Enable’, the highest
MCS allowed on the TRX is defined by the current size of the
M-EGCH link of the TRX and by the MAX_EGPRS_MCS value.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 909 / 1278

6.2.74 (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) - (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF
Logical Name EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF
Definition Flag to disable/enable the extended TBF mode feature on the uplink
(without or with allowing the MS not to answer to a USF received
while in Extended UL TBF mode).
Coding rules 0: Extended UL TBF mode (EUTM) is not used

1: EUTM is used
2: I-EUTM is used (improved EUTM mode)
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules -It is recommended not to activate simultaneously extended UL

TBF feature (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) and the DL PDU rerouting
feature (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING)
- if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is enabled and if RA capability update
is supported by SGSN, then the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE
must be enabled.
The Extended UL TBF mode feature is completely effective only if
the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE is set to enabled.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 2 0
External Comment I-EUTM (improved EUTM) allow MS in EUTM mode to not answer to
a USF.
In I-EUTM mode, N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT and
IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD parameters can be used to
tune the radio link monitoring.
910 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.75 (EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS) -
(EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS
Logical Name EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS
Definition This flag indicates whether or not one Slave PDCH is available for
(E)GPRS traffic in the cell (fast initial PS access feature).
In an Evolium BTS, that corresponds to a PDCH being able to
support incoming (E)GPRS traffic, that PDCH being located on an
established TRX (i.e. the TRX owns an M-EGCH link)

1: enabled
Mandatory rules - MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if

EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled;
- MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH if
EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled.
- If GPRS traffic is carried between BTS and MFS
through satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and
Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the corresponding BTS, then
EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS must be equal to enabled.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment Better performances for service access time will be obtained when
this parameter is set to enabled, but one PDCH will always be
established in the cell. A compromise has to be made by the operator
between performance gain and the cost of radio and terrestrial
resources. This compromise becomes of higher importance in
case of a cell connected through a satellite link due to the higher
GPRS access time with satellite links, but also the higher cost of
transmission links.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 911 / 1278

6.2.76 (EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED) -
(EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED
Logical Name EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED
Definition Flag to disable/enable the normal fast scheduling mode for the uplink
TBFs in extended mode
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 1 1
External Comment The parameter is significant only if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is

enabled.
912 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.77 (EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED) -
(EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED
Logical Name EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED
Definition Flag to enable/disable the full fast scheduling mode for uplink TBFs
in EUTM.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 1 1
External Comment - The full fast USF scheduling can be enabled /disabled independently
on the normal fast USF scheduling (EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED
parameter)
- The parameter is relevant only if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is
enabled
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 913 / 1278

6.2.78 (EN_FULL_IR_DL) - (EN_FULL_IR_DL_per_cell)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_FULL_IR_DL
Logical Name EN_FULL_IR_DL_per_cell
Definition Enables/Disables the resegmentation for the downlink TBF in the cell.
Coding rules 0: Disable the "full" IR, so : Incremental Redundancy with

resegmentation allowed in DL,
1: Enable the "full" IR, so, Incremental Redundancy without
resegmentation in DL
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules To allow the best throughput in DL, it is strongly recommended to set
this parameter to 0 i.e. to not forbid the resegmentation.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
914 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.79 (EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33) -
(EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33
Logical Name EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33
Definition Enables the support of (E)GPRS multislot class 30-33.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment Support of DTM (E)GPRS multislot classes 31 to 33 is possible only

if EN_DTM = 1 and EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33 = 1. Support
of configurations requiring EDA is possible only if EN_EDA = 1 (and
ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION = 1 in case of DTM).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 915 / 1278

6.2.80 (EN_NACC) - (EN_NACC)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_NACC
Logical Name EN_NACC
Definition Enables the Network Assisted Cell Change feature.
Coding rules 0: disabled; 1:enabled
Mandatory rules Can be enabled only if round_trip_delay < 500 msec

When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then
EN_NACC = 0
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
916 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.81 (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR) - (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR
Logical Name EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR
Definition Indicates whether or not outgoing GPRS redirections are

systematically triggered from the serving cell.
Coding rules 0: Outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggered

1: Outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically

triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = ’Enable’), it is up
to the operator to ensure that at least one NC cell reselection cause
is always triggered upon receipt of the first Packet Measurement
Report message. For instance, NC cell reselection Cause PT1 can
be always activated by setting NC_DL_RXLEV_THR to ’-47 dBm
(Always)’.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment An outgoing GPRS redirection is a NC cell reselection which is

triggered when the MS enters the packet transfer mode in the serving
cell even if the radio link is good. The intention of GPRS redirections
is to redirect the MS towards a target cell more appropriate to carry
PS traffic (for instance a macro cell).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 917 / 1278

6.2.82 (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n)) -
(EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n)
Logical Name EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n)
Definition Indicates whether or not outgoing GPRS redirections are

systematically triggered from the serving cell.
Coding rules 0: Disable Outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggered

1: Enable Outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered
Mandatory rules –

triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = ’Enable’), it is up
to the operator to ensure that at least one NC cell reselection cause
is always triggered upon receipt of the first Packet Measurement
Report message. For instance, NC cell reselection Cause PT1 can
be always activated by setting NC_DL_RXLEV_THR to ’-47 dBm
(Always)’.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
None 0 1 0
External Comment An outgoing GPRS redirection is a NC cell reselection which is

triggered when the MS enters the packet transfer mode in the serving
cell even if the radio link is good. The intention of GPRS redirections
is to redirect the MS towards a target cell more appropriate to carry
PS traffic (for instance a macro cell).
918 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.83 (EN_PFC_FEATURE) - (EN_PFC_FEATURE)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_PFC_FEATURE
Logical Name EN_PFC_FEATURE
Definition Enables/disables the support of the PFC negotiation feature.
Coding rules 1 => PFC feature is supported,

0 => PFC feature is not supported
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
External Comment Any modification of the parameter leads the MFS to reset
autonomously all the GPUs connected to this BSS.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 919 / 1278

6.2.84 (EN_PSI_STATUS) - (EN_PSI_STATUS)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_PSI_STATUS
Logical Name EN_PSI_STATUS
Definition Enables the Packet SI Status feature in cells w/o PBCCH or the
Packet PSI Status feature in cells with a PBCCH.
Coding rules 0: disabled; 1:enabled
Mandatory rules Can be enabled only if round_trip_delay < 500 msec

When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then
EN_PSI_STATUS = 0
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
920 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.85 (EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE) - (EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE
Logical Name EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE
Definition Flag to enable/disable the Radio Acces Capability update on Gb
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules This parameter must be enabled if RA capability update is

supported by SGSN and if it exists, at least, one cell where
EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is enabled.
The Extended UL TBF mode feature is completely effective only if
the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE is set to enabled.
If EN_STREAMING is set to 1 then EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE must

also be set to 1 (enabled). Otherwise the BSS will not be able to
handle streaming flow. If this rule is not respected then all PFC
creation requests related to a streaming flow will be downgraded to
the default best effort flow by the BSS.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 921 / 1278

6.2.86 (EN_RIM_NACC) - (EN_RIM_NACC)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_RIM_NACC
Logical Name EN_RIM_NACC
Definition Flag to disable/enable the Inter-BSS and Inter-RAT NACC features

(inter-RAT = inter-3G or inter-LTE).
It covers both controlling and serving aspects : for controlling
MFS, this is the ability to request and receive System Information
messages from the Gb interface and to broadcast them to MS
through the PACCH.
For serving MFS, this is the ability to provide System Information
messages when requested by another BSS/RNC.
Coding rules 0: Inter-BSS and Inter-RAT NACC are disabled

1: Inter-BSS NACC only is enabled
2 Inter-3G NACC only is enabled
3 Inter-BSS and Inter-3G NACC are enabled
4 Inter-LTE NACC only is enabled
5 Inter-BSS and Inter-LTE NACC are enabled
6 Inter-3G and Inter-LTE NACC are enabled
7 Inter-BSS and Inter-RAT NACC are enabled
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 7 0
External Comment - For a BSS working as a controlling BSS, the Inter-BSS NACC
feature can be effective for a serving cell, if EN_NACC feature is
enabled in that cell. For a BSS working as a serving BSS, there is no
interaction with the EN_NACC feature.
- Parameter change:
When enabling (setting from 0 to <>0), a reset of all the BVC SIG is
automatically performed (leading the MFS to stop and restart PS
traffic in the BSS).
In case of disabling (setting from <>0 to 0), the reset is automatically
done only on the NSEs of the BSS, connected to a SGSN supporting
the RIM feature (leading the MFS to stop and restart PS traffic on
these SGSN(s)).
In any other case of modification, there is no impact on the PS traffic;
on going TBFs are not disrupted.
922 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 923 / 1278

6.2.87 (EN_STREAMING) - (EN_STREAMING)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_STREAMING
Logical Name EN_STREAMING
Definition Enables/disables the support of the STREAMING flows.
Coding rules 1 => the cell supports the streaming flows in addition to the non real
time flows (best effort, interactive, background) if EN_PFC_FEATURE
= 1 and if the PFC feature negotiation with the SGSN is successful
0 => the cell supports the non real time flows (best effort, interactive,
background) if EN_PFC_FEATURE = 1 and if the PFC feature
negotiation with the SGSN is successful
Mandatory rules - If EN_STREAMING = 1 then MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 0

- When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then
EN_STREAMING = 0
Recommended rules 1) If this parameter is set to 1 then the parameter

EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE must also be set to 1 (enabled). Otherwise
the BSS will not be able to handle streaming flow. If this rule is not
respected then all PFC creation requests related to a streaming flow
will be downgraded to the default best effort flow by the BSS.
2) the parameter EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK must also set to
"TRUE" in order to activate the link adaptation mechanism so that the
(M)CS can reach a suitable level regarding the level of the configured
Rmin_(E)GPRS. Otherwise, the streaming PFCs can be downgraded
to the Default Best Effort ABQP because the negotiated GBR cannot
be reached on the radio interface.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
924 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.88 (Excess Burst Size) - (EBS)
Parameter Name HMI Name Excess Burst Size
Logical Name EBS
Definition Excess Burst Size.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0

Recommended rules EBS=FR_CAPACITY(expressed in kbit/s) / 8, if CIR=0
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance PVC
kbyte 0 248 None
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 925 / 1278

6.2.89 (GAMMA_TNx) - (GAMMA_TNx)
Parameter Name HMI Name GAMMA_TNx
Logical Name GAMMA_TNx
Definition Binary representation of the "gamma ch" for MS output power control.
Coding rules Coded on 5 bits, step size=2dB, with 00000 == 0 dB, 00001 == 2
dB, ... 11111 == 62 dB.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dB 0 62 30
External Comment In the context of a concentric cell, the parameter applies to the outer
zone.
926 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.90 (Gb_Transport_Mode) - (Gb_Transport_Mode)
Parameter Name HMI Name Gb_Transport_Mode
Logical Name Gb_Transport_Mode
Definition Mode of the transport for Gb interface: FR or IP.
Coding rules 0: FR mode

1: IP mode
Mandatory rules - EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if Gb_Transport_Mode is IP.

- If Gb_Transport_Mode is FR then EN_GB_FLEX must be disabled.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
External Comment - When the NSE is not associated to a BSS, the

Gb_Transport_Mode_perNSE defines the transport mode
of the NSE.
When the NSE is associated to a BSS, the transport mode of
the BSS defines the transport mode of all NSEs of the BSS (the
Gb_Transport_Mode - of the BSS - overrides the transport mode
defined in the NSE instance).
- Parameter change: before to set to transport mode to FR, the

operator has to delete all the excessive NSEs (no more than one NSE
per GPU, ie no more than one SGSN connected to the BSS). Any
modification of the parameter leads the MFS to reset autonomously
all the GP/GPUs connected to this BSS.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 927 / 1278

6.2.91 (Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE) - (Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE)
Parameter Name HMI Name Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE
Logical Name Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE
Definition Mode of the transport for Gb interface (per NSE): FR or IP.
Coding rules 0: FR mode

1: IP mode
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance NSE
None 0 1 0
External Comment - When the NSE is not associated to a BSS, the

Gb_Transport_Mode_perNSE defines the transport mode
of the NSE.
When the NSE is associated to a BSS, the transport mode of
the BSS defines the transport mode of all NSEs of the BSS (the
Gb_Transport_Mode - of the BSS - overrides the transport mode
defined in the NSE instance).
- Parameter change: Any modification of the parameter leads the

MFS to reset autonomously the associated GP/GPU.
928 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.92 (GCH_RED_FACTOR_HiAter) -
(GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage)
Parameter Name HMI Name GCH_RED_FACTOR_HiAter
Logical Name GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage
Definition Reduction factor of the number of GCHs targeted per PDCH, when
the Ater usage is "high".
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules A low value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage can be coherent

with a high value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will avoid reaching the
saturation point of 100% of the Ater resources used at the same
moment in the GPU).
Reciprocally, a high value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage
can be coherent with a low value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will
limit the risks of wasting, i.e. of not using, Ater resources in the GPU).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0.1 1 0.75

- The GCH reduction factor applies to the new PDCHs which are
used when the Ater usage is "high" (see the Ater_Usage_Threshold
parameter). This parameter can be reduced in order to avoid Ater
shortage situations.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 929 / 1278

6.2.93 (GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) -
(GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)
Parameter Name HMI Name GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Logical Name GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Definition Additional hysteresis which applies in Ready state for cells in same
RA.
Coding rules step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits. 000=0 dB, 001= 2 dB, 111=14 dB
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dB 0 14 4
930 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.94 (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
Logical Name GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
Definition Maximum TX power level an MS may use when accessing the

system.
Coding rules Coded on 5 bits from 0 to 31

The coding depends on the BCCH frequency band:
P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.
dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dBm 5 43 43
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 931 / 1278

6.2.95 (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) -
(GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
Logical Name GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)
Definition Maximum TX power level an MS may use when accessing the

system.
Coding rules Coded on 5 bits from 0 to 31

The coding depends on the BCCH frequency band:
P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.
dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm..., 19: 5 dBm.
0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
dBm 5 43 43
932 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.96 (GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE) -
(GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE)
Parameter Name HMI Name GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE
Logical Name GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE
Definition Default value of the (E)GPRS multislot class assumed at TBF

establishment when the actual MS (E)GPRS multislot class is
unknown.
The default MS class is used as an input of the best candidate TBF
allocation computation process when the MS class is not known
on UL TBF establishment.
Coding rules Only the following GPRS multislot class defined in 3GPP TS 05.02
annex B are allowed:
1: GPRS multislot class 1 (1+1 MS);
30: GPRS multislot class 30 (5+1 MS).
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules The recommendations to set this parameter are the following:
1) In case the PS traffic is mainly signalling (e.g. there is a great
proportion of RA Updates among the UL TBF establishment
requests), GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE shall be set to
1 (optimization of the number of T2 TBF reallocations and of PPC /
DSP CPU).
2) In case the PS traffic is mainly data (high proportion
of UL TBF establishment requests for data traffic),
GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE should be set to the
most common multislot class which can be found among the
mobile stations within the BSS (in order to limit the number of
T2 TBF reallocations and of PPC / DSP CPU, triggered with the
establishment of the concurrent DL TBF). In case of multislot class
30, this additionally requires that the multislot class 30-33 feature
is widely activated in the BSS.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 30 8
External Comment The entered value is assumed by default at uplink TBF establishment
when the actual MS multislot class is unknown (e.g. RACH one
phase access on CCCH) . Otherwise, the multislot class received in
the request for uplink TBF establishment is taken into account.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 933 / 1278

934 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.97 (GPRS_PENALTY_TIME) - (GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name GPRS_PENALTY_TIME
Logical Name GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n)
Definition Time during which GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET is active in

neighbour cells.
Coding rules step size = 10 sec, coded on 5 bits (00000 = 10 sec, 11111 = 320 sec)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
sec 10 320 10
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 935 / 1278

6.2.98 (GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET) -
(GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET
Logical Name GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET(n)
Definition Permanent offset for GPRS cell reselection in neighbour cells.
Coding rules coded on 5 bits (00000 = -52 dB, 11111 = 48 dB)

00000= -52; 00001= -48; 00010= -44; 00011= -40; 00100= -36;
00101= -32; 00110= -28; 00111= -24; 01000= -20; 01001= -16;
01010= -12; 01011= -10; 01100= - 8; 01101= - 6; 01110= - 4; 01111=
- 2; 10000= 0; 10001= 2; 10010= 4; 10011= 6; 10100= 8; 10101=10;
10110= 12; 10111= 16; 11000= 20; 11001= 24; 11010= 28; 11011=
32; 11100= 36; 11101= 40; 11110= 44; 11111= 48
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
dB -52 48 0
936 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.99 (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN)
Parameter Name HMI Name GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Logical Name GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Definition Minimum received level at the MS required for access to the system.
Coding rules step size = 1 dBm, coded on 6 bits (000000 = -110 dBm, 111111
= -47 dBm)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -100
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 937 / 1278

6.2.100 (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) -
(GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Logical Name GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)
Definition Minimum received level at the MS required for access to the system
in neighbour cells.
Coding rules coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
dBm -110 -47 -100
938 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.101 (GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET) -
(GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET
Logical Name GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n)
Definition Negative offset used for MS cell reselection process in neighbour

cells.
Coding rules Possible values : 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, infinity respectively binary
coded as 000, 001, ..., 111
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
dB 0 infinity 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 939 / 1278

6.2.102 (HCS_THR) - (GPRS_HCS_THR)
Parameter Name HMI Name HCS_THR
Logical Name GPRS_HCS_THR
Definition HCS signal strength.
Coding rules Coded on 5 bits. 00000=-110 dBm, 00001=-108 dBm, 11111=-48

dBm
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dBm -110 -48 -84
940 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.103 (HCS_THR) - (GPRS_HCS_THR(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name HCS_THR
Logical Name GPRS_HCS_THR(n)
Definition HCS signal strength.
Coding rules Coded on 5 bits. 00000=-110 dBm, 00001=-108 dBm, 11111=-48

dBm
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
dBm -110 -48 -84
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 941 / 1278

6.2.104 (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) -
(HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)
Parameter Name HMI Name HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Logical Name HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Definition Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet Flow
Context, with precedence parameter set to ’high’
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 15
942 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.105 (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) -
(HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)
Parameter Name HMI Name HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Logical Name HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Definition Defines the relative priority used for Interactive THP1 Packet Flow
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 6
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 943 / 1278

Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 9
944 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 12
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 945 / 1278

6.2.108 (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS) - (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS)
Parameter Name HMI Name HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS
Logical Name HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS
Definition Load threshold used to determine a certain margin of radio timeslots

reserved for CS traffic between two sending of the BSCGP RR
Allocation Indication messages. The threshold is expressed in
percentage of the radio timeslots available in the cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 90
External Comment The margin of radio timeslots reserved for CS traffic can be computed
as follows:
(100 - HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS)/100*NB_TS
where NB_TS is the number of radio timeslots available in the cell.
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012
70 70 70 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
946 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.109 (IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD) - (IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD)
Parameter Name HMI Name IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD
Logical Name IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD
Definition Maximum duration of UL TBF inactivity before MS is polled in EUTM

mode when EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is set ot 2 (IEUTM enabled).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
ms 100 1000 300
External Comment Change of parameter value is taken into account also for on-going
UL TBFs
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 947 / 1278

6.2.110 (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS) -
(INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS)
Parameter Name HMI Name INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS
Logical Name INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS
Definition Number of PDCHs on which MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL

and MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL are targeted when
establishing GCHs for a GPRS TBF associated to a "short data"
MS transfer.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 8 2

TBF are not disrupted. Change applied on current TBF and new
TBF established after modification.
948 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.111 (LAC) - (LAC (MFS))
Logical Name LAC (MFS)
Coding rules –
Equal to LAC (BSC)
shall have the same LAC
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 65535 65535
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 949 / 1278

6.2.112 (LAC) - (LAC(n) (MFS))
Logical Name LAC(n) (MFS)
Coding rules –
Equal to LAC(n)(BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
None 1 65535 65535
950 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.113 (Level 1 down) - (PVC_Level1_down)
Parameter Name HMI Name Level 1 down
Logical Name PVC_Level1_down
Definition This parameter gives the low level of threshold for congestion.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance PVC
% 0 100 40
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 951 / 1278

6.2.114 (Level 1 Factor) - (PVC_Level1_Factor)
Parameter Name HMI Name Level 1 Factor
Logical Name PVC_Level1_Factor
Definition This parameter is used to calculate the amount of data used for
buffering.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules amount of memory needed : PVC_Level1_factor * 10 * (CBS+EBS)

for a PVC
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance PVC
None 0.05 12.75 1
952 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.115 (Level 1 up) - (PVC_Level1_up)
Parameter Name HMI Name Level 1 up
Logical Name PVC_Level1_up
Definition This parameter gives the high level of threshold for congestion.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance PVC
% 0 100 70
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 953 / 1278

6.2.116 (LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS) - (LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS)
Parameter Name HMI Name LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS
Logical Name LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS
Definition Number of load samples (calculated every TCH_INFO_PERIOD

seconds) used to compute the maximum number of slave PDCHs
that the BSC can allocate to the MFS.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 3 30 3
954 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.117 (LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) -
(LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)
Parameter Name HMI Name LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Logical Name LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Definition Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet Flow
Context, with precedence parameter set to ’low’
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 15
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 955 / 1278

6.2.118 (LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) -
(LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)
Parameter Name HMI Name LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Logical Name LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 6
956 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 9
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 957 / 1278

Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 12
958 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.121 (MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH) - (MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH
Logical Name MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH
Definition Indicative value of the maximum number of DownLink (E)GPRS

TBFs per Slave PDCH.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 10 8
External Comment When allocating a DL GPRS TBF: MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH is the

maximum number of GPRS + EGPRS TBFs allowed in DL on each
Slave PDCH.
When allocating a DL EGPRS TBF: MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH is the
maximum number of EGPRS TBFs allowed in DL on each Slave
PDCH (regardless of the current number of DL GPRS TBFs).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 959 / 1278

6.2.122 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS) - (MAX_EGPRS_MCS)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_EGPRS_MCS
Logical Name MAX_EGPRS_MCS
Definition Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for EGPRS traffic
in the cell.
Coding rules 0: MCS-1;

1: MCS-2;
2: MCS-3;
3: MCS-4;
4: MCS-5;
5: MCS-6;
6: MCS-7;
7: MCS-8;
8: MCS-9;
Mandatory rules MAX_EGPRS_MCS >= TBF_DL_INIT_MCS

MAX_EGPRS_MCS >= TBF_UL_INIT_MCS
When cell_type = "extended outer", then MAX_EGPRS_MCS <=
MCS-4
Recommended rules R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than

the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_EGPRS_MCS (e.g. if
MAX_EGPRS_MCS = MCS9 => R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be
higher than 59,2kbps).
R_MIN_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the
useful bitrate corresponding to Max_EGPRS_MCS. If the above
recommended rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be
accepted by the BSS whereas it will not be possible to handle their
associated GBR. This may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best
Effort.
It is advised to set MAX_EGPRS_MCS to a value different from
MCS-2 to cope with MEGCH control message granularity in an
optimal way.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 9 9
External Comment Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impact on

the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in case of
value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferring with
the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupted due
to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing.
960 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 961 / 1278

6.2.123 (MAX_GPRS_CS) - (MAX_GPRS_CS)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_GPRS_CS
Logical Name MAX_GPRS_CS
Definition Maximum coding scheme used for GPRS traffic in the cell.
Coding rules 1 : CS-2;

2 : CS-3;
3 : CS-4
Mandatory rules MAX_GPRS_CS >= TBF_DL_INIT_CS
MAX_GPRS_CS >= TBF_UL_INIT_CS
If Max_PDCH = 0 then MAX_GPRS_CS = CS-2.

The aim of this last rule is to prevent the BSC to trigger uselessly the
algorithms of adjust ranking and transmission pool set up (lead time
and outage) for CS3 and CS4, in case Max_PDCH = 0 (i.e. GPRS
is not allowed)
Recommended rules R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than

the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_GPRS_CS (e.g. if
MAX_GPRS_CS = CS2 => R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be higher
than 12kbps)
R_MIN_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful
bitrate corresponding to Max_GPRS_CS. If the above recommended
rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be accepted by the BSS
whereas it will not be possible to handle their associated GBR. This
may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best Effort.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 2 4 2
External Comment - This parameter can be set to CS-3 or CS-4 only if the related
feature has been bought and controlled per quantity.
- Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impact
on the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in case
of value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferring
with the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupted
due to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing
962 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.124 (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL) -
(MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL
Logical Name MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL
Definition Maximum coding scheme used for the DL GPRS TBFs associated to
a "short data" MS transfer.
Coding rules 1: CS-1 coded as 0

2: CS-2 coded as 1
3: CS-3 coded as 2
4: CS-4 coded as 3
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during

the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended
that MAX [MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL,
MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_CS,
TBF_UL_INIT_CS].
This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking
rate in the cell (by recommending low values for
MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify
the cell configuration.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 4 1

- Setting this parameter to CS-2 might introduce some problems
(because a CS-2 block consumes exactly 1.00 GCH and might
therefore block some of the MFS-BTS signalling messages to be
sent in the M-EGCH link in DL).
- If MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL is strictly higher than
MAX_GPRS_CS, then MAX_GPRS_CS is used instead.
due to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 963 / 1278

6.2.125 (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL) -
(MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL
Logical Name MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL
Definition Maximum coding scheme used for the UL GPRS TBFs associated to
a "short data" MS transfer.
Coding rules 1: CS-1 coded as 0

2: CS-2 coded as 1
3: CS-3 coded as 2
4: CS-4 coded as 3
Mandatory rules –

TBF_UL_INIT_CS].
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 4 2

- If MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL is strictly higher than
MAX_GPRS_CS, then MAX_GPRS_CS is used instead.
964 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.126 (MAX_PAGING_QUEUE) - (MAX_PAGING_QUEUE)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_PAGING_QUEUE
Logical Name MAX_PAGING_QUEUE
Definition Maximum number of CS+PS paging messages stored in GPU.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Paging Rate = 100 paging/s AND Queueing Time = 5s
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 50 1000 500
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 965 / 1278

6.2.127 (MAX_PDCH) - (MAX_PDCH (MFS))

Management of This flag exists in the BSC and is managed by the OMC-R but it is not visible
Enable_GPRS Flag (Cell to the operator. It is derived by the OMC-R from the value of Max_PDCH.
Parameter) When the Enable_GPRS flag is set to true, it means that the BSC can accept
MFS requests for a certain cell. In some circumstances, there can be some
inconsistencies, but these might not have any impact:
Creation of a BSC When the BSS is discovered by the OMC-R, the MFS parameters are set to
their default value by the OMC-R. Max_PDCH is set to 0. (There may be
inconsistency at system level, but no impact.) Later, if the operator installs
GPRS, he has to download the radio configuration to the MFS. Through this
operation, the flag ’Enable_GPRS’ is recomputed for the cells concerned by
the PRC, and therefore downloaded to the BSC. All data is then in line for
the cells concerned by the PRC. It can occur that some cells remain with
’Enable_GPRS’ set to true and Max_PDCH set to 0 but this does no harm at all
(no impact on the traffic, and not visible by the operator).
DLS Restore When the Any DLS restore must be followed by the following procedure to line-up the
Flag is Not In Lline With EN_GPRS of the cells handled by this BSC with the Max_PDCH of these
Max_PDCH cells currently stored in the OMC-R:
1. Copy the SC into the PRC
2. Activate this PRC
Until the synchronization is achieved, the cell cannot be set into service for
GPRS by the telecom application (there is no impact if the cell is already
started for GPRS).
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_PDCH
Logical Name MAX_PDCH (MFS)
Definition Maximum number of slave and master PDCHs that can be allocated
to the MFS in the cell.
Coding rules –
966 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Mandatory rules Shall be equal to MAX_PDCH (MX BSC)

Max_PDCH >= MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD;
If MAX_PDCH > 0 then EN_GPRS = TRUE ;
If MAX_PDCH = 0 then EN_GPRS = FALSE;
If MAX_PDCH = 0 then EN_EGPRS = FALSE;
If EN_VGCS= enabled, then "(MAX_VGCS_TS + MAX_PDCH) <

Total number of TCHs of the cell"
If Max_PDCH = 0 then MAX_GPRS_CS = CS-2.

The aim of this rule is to prevent the BSC to trigger uselessly the
algorithms of adjust ranking and transmission pool set up (lead time
and outage) for CS3 and CS4, in case Max_PDCH = 0 (i.e. GPRS is
not allowed)
MAX_PDCH shall be set so that at least one slave PDCH can be

allocated to the MFS to serve DL or UL TBFs. This means that
MAX_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_GPRS = TRUE.
When Max_PDCH > 0 and cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended

outer", then MAX_PDCH shall be an even number.
The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order to check

the upper limit of MAX_PDCH:
CCCH combined"
CCCH not combined"
TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX
iv) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK=0) - 3 if
TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = 2
Recommended rules In a micro cell, the operator may be interested to force the
MS to reselect a macro cell by a correct setting of the cell
reselection parameters broadcast on PBCCH (without using NC cell
reselections, i.e. when EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR is set to 0
and NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to ’NC0’ in the micro
cell). In this case, the following configuration is recommended:
NB_TS_MPDCH = 1, MAX_PDCH = 2, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD =
1, MIN_PDCH = 1.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 127 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 967 / 1278

To support LCS in a cell, it is mandatory to have Max_PDCH > 0
968 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.128 (MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD) - (MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD
Logical Name MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MFS)
Definition Maximum number of slave and master PDCHs that can be allocated
to the MFS when the CS traffic is high.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Shall be equal to MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MX BSC)

- MAX_PDCH >= MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD
- MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD >= MIN_PDCH
- If EN_DTM = 1 then MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 127 0
External Comment 127 is a theoretical value: 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 969 / 1278

6.2.129 (MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF) - (MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF
Logical Name MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF
Definition Maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a single (E)GPRS

connection.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 5 5
970 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.130 (MAX_RETRANS) - (Max_retrans (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_RETRANS
Logical Name Max_retrans (MFS)
Definition Maximum number of CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissions by

the MS on the RACH, broadcast on the PBCCH for CS service
establishment.
Coding rules Possible values are:1, 2 ,4 and 7 respectively binary coded:00, 01,
10 and 11
Mandatory rules Max_retrans (BSC) = Max_retrans (MFS) for a given cell
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 7 2
is.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 971 / 1278

6.2.131 (MAX_RETRANS_1) - (MAX_RETRANS_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_RETRANS_1
Logical Name MAX_RETRANS_1
Definition Maximum number of PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissions

by the MS on the PRACH with priority level 1.
Coding rules Possible values are : 1, 2, 4, 7 respectively binary coded : 00, 01,
10, 11
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 7 2
972 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10, 11
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 7 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 973 / 1278


10, 11
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 7 2
974 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10, 11
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 7 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 975 / 1278

6.2.135 (MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH) - (MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH
Logical Name MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH
Definition Indicative value of maximum number of UpLink (E)GPRS TBFs per

slave PDCH.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 6 5
External Comment When allocating an UL GPRS TBF: MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH is the

maximum number of GPRS + EGPRS TBFs allowed in UL on each
Slave PDCH.
When allocating an UL EGPRS TBF: MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH is the
maximum number of EGPRS TBFs allowed in UL on each Slave
PDCH (regardless of the current number of UL GPRS TBFs).
976 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.136 (MIN_PDCH) - (MIN_PDCH (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name MIN_PDCH
Logical Name MIN_PDCH (MFS)
Definition Minimum number of master and slave PDCHs that are always
allocated to the MFS.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules - Shall be equal to MIN_PDCH (MX BSC)

-MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD >= MIN_PDCH;
-MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if
EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled;
-MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH if
EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled.
-When MIN_PDCH > 0 and cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended
outer", then MIN_PDCH shall be an even number
Recommended rules It is recommended to set this parameter to a value smaller than the
maximum number of PDCHs that may be allocated in the cell, in
order to avoid congestion on the MFS-BSC interface.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 127 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 977 / 1278

6.2.137 (Mobile Country Code (MCC)) - (MCC (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name Mobile Country Code (MCC)
Logical Name MCC (MFS)
Definition Mobile Country Code of the own PLMN.
- MCC (BSC) = MCC (MFS).
(MCC,MNC) couple.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 999 999
External Comment The value depends on the configuration. The default value indicated
978 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.138 (Mobile Network Code (MNC)) - (MNC (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name Mobile Network Code (MNC)
Logical Name MNC (MFS)
Definition Mobile Network Code of the own PLMN.
- MNC (BSC) = MNC (MFS).
(MCC,MNC) couple.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 999 999
The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC.
binary coded 1111)
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 979 / 1278

6.2.139 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (MFS))
Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (MFS)

dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dBm 5 43 43
980 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.140 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(MFS))
Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(MFS)

dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
dBm 5 43 43
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 981 / 1278

6.2.141 (N_AVG_I (BSC)) - (N_AVG_I (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name N_AVG_I (BSC)
Logical Name N_AVG_I (BSC)
Definition N_AVG_I (BSC) value is broadcast to the (E)GPRS MS in the SI13.

The (E)GPRS MS uses it for filtering the interference signal level
measurements that it shall perform during the packet transfer mode.
These measurements are used by the (E)GPRS MS for output power
control, but also reported to the network and used for performing
downlink link adaptation.
Mandatory rules Equal to N_AVG_I (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 15 6
982 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.142 (N_AVG_I (MFS)) - (N_AVG_I (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name N_AVG_I (MFS)
Logical Name N_AVG_I (MFS)
Definition N_AVG_I (MFS) value is broadcast to the (E)GPRS MS in the PSI

13 and PSI1. The (E)GPRS MS uses it for filtering the interference
signal level measurements that it shall perform during the packet
transfer mode. These measurements are used by the (E)GPRS MS
for output power control, but also reported to the network and used
for performing downlink link adaptation.
Mandatory rules Equal to N_AVG_I (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 15 6
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 983 / 1278

6.2.143 (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS) -
(N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS)
Parameter Name HMI Name N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS
Logical Name N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS
Definition Number of bytes below which an MS transfer is considered to be

"short data".
Coding rules step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS <=

N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
byte 20 10000 150

- An MS transfer is considered to be "short data" as long as less
than N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS bytes have been transferred in
both directions (since the TBF establishment(s)). Else, if more than
N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS bytes have been transferred in at
least one direction, the MS transfer is considered to be "long data".
Note: in DL, the bytes of the DL LLC PDUs currently queued for the
MS (but not yet sent to the MS) are also counted.
Decreasing (respectively increasing) the value of
N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS will tend:
- to make the Ater resource optimization worse (respectively
better) when the Ater usage of the GPU is above
Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data,
- to reduce (respectively make higher) the PS throughput
degradations at the beginning of MS traffics when the Ater usage of
the GPU is above Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data,
- to make the MFS and BSC CPU loads higher (respectively lower).

TBF are not disrupted. Change applied immediately on current TBF
and on new TBF, established after modification.
984 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.144 (N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT) - (N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT)
Parameter Name HMI Name N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT
Logical Name N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT
Definition Maximum number of consecutive polling requests that can be sent

to a MS in EUTM state (when EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is set ot 2
(IEUTM enabled)) without receiving a polling response in a PCA.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules The value of the parameter should be set to a value high enough to
avoid any spurious abnormal UL TBF releases.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 5 20 10
External Comment A change of parameter value is taken into account also for on-going
UL TBFs.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 985 / 1278

6.2.145 (N_RIM_RETRIES) - (N_RIM_RETRIES)
Parameter Name HMI Name N_RIM_RETRIES
Logical Name N_RIM_RETRIES
Definition Number of times a RAN procedure is retried (after first attempt)

before giving up (in case of no answer is received)
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 255 2
986 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.146 (N3101_LIMIT) - (N3101_LIMIT)
Parameter Name HMI Name N3101_LIMIT
Logical Name N3101_LIMIT
Definition In an UL TBF tranfer procedure, maximum of consecutive times

(before releasing abnormally the UL TBF) when the network receives
no valid UL RLC data block or nothing from the MS on its allocated
PDCH.
To note that the counter N3101 can be incremented more than one
time per block period.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 10 64 64
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 987 / 1278

6.2.147 (N3103_LIMIT) - (N3103_LIMIT)
Definition In an UL TBF releasing procedure, maximum of consecutive times

(before releasing abnormally the UL TBF) when the network does not
receive a Packet Control Acknowledgement from the MS in response
of its Packet UL ACK/NACK which specifies the end of the TBF.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules N3103_Limit: maximum number of retransmissions to release an UL

TBF
Max_Retrans_DL: maximum number of retransmissions to establish
a DL TBF
In case of simultaneous UL TBF Release and DL TBF establishment
with loss of the Packet Control Ack which acknowledges the final
Packet UL Ack/Nack, the UL TBF has to be released, at least
before the last attempt to establish the DL TBF, in order to avoid the
emission of a Radio Status.
Consequently the following rule has to be followed:
(N3103_Limit + 1) x (RTD + 60) < Max_Retrans_DL x (RTD + 60)
N3103_Limit + 1: total number of attempts to send the final Packet
UL Ack/Nack
RTD: Round Trip Delay
60 (msec): for the Packet UL Ack/Nack acknowledgement: RRBP +
3 is used
Max_Retrans_DL: total number of attempts minus one to send the
Packet DL Assignment
60 (msec): for the Packet DL Assignment acknowledgement: RRBP
+ 3 is used
N3103_Limit < (Max_Retrans_DL x (RTD + 60) / (RTD + 60)) - 1
N3103_Limit < [Max_Retrans_DL] - 1
Example:
With Max_Retrans_DL = 3: N3103_Limit < 2 that is N3103_Limit = 1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 16 1
988 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 989 / 1278

6.2.148 (N3105_LIMIT) - (N3105_LIMIT)
Definition For a DL GPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis
terrestrial link and Ater terrestrial link, this parameter defines the
maximum number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet
Control Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio
interface, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. This
parameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay
to decide if the DL TBF shall be released.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 64 20
External Comment If N3105_LIMIT < TBF_CS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet
DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release.
N3105_Limit has to be set in order not to release a DL TBF in case
of transient bad radio conditions. The polling frequency depends on
GPRS_DL_Ack_Period, T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot
class and on the number of TBFs per PDCH.
990 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.149 (N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE) - (N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE)
Parameter Name HMI Name N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE
Logical Name N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE
Definition For a DL GPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis
satellite link or Ater satellite link, this parameter defines the maximum
number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet Control
Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 64 24
External Comment If N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_CS_DL then the loss of

consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation
but TBF release. N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE has to be set in order
not to release a DL TBF in case of transient bad radio conditions.
The polling frequency depends on GPRS_DL_Ack_Period_Satellite,
T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot class and on the number
of TBFs per PDCH.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 991 / 1278

6.2.150 (NB_TS_MPDCH) - (NB_TS_MPDCH (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name NB_TS_MPDCH
Logical Name NB_TS_MPDCH (BSC)
Definition Number of radio timeslots reserved for the primary and secondary
master PDCHs defined in the cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules 0) NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
1) MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if

EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled; MIN_PDCH >=
NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled.
2) if the ’network_operation_mode (BSC)’ parameter is set to 2

(NMO II) then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0

CCCH combined"
CCCH not combined"
4) When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then

NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 4 0
992 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

External Comment - Only the value 0 is supported

- The Master PDCH requires the establishment of a GCH (Abis and
Ater) which does not carry traffic. In case of Abis or Ater through
satellite link, the usage of the MPDCH must consider the following
criteria:
* higher cost of transmission resources through the satellite link;
* limited throughput of the RSL in case of Abis through satellite to
about 6 kbit/s (because of round trip delay effect on acknowledged
protocol with limited LAP-D window size). In case of important CS
signalling load, the RSL may not be able to transport the additional
signalling load due toTBF establishments when no MPDCH is
established.
Hence the recommendation in the GPRS through satellite case is:
* for a cell connected with Abis through satellite and with non
negligible signalling load (CS+PS), MPDCH is recommended;
* for a cell connected with Ater through satellite, MPDCH is not
recommended.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 993 / 1278

6.2.151 (NB_TS_MPDCH) - (NB_TS_MPDCH (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name NB_TS_MPDCH
Logical Name NB_TS_MPDCH (MFS)
Definition Number of radio timeslots reserved for the primary and secondary
master PDCHs defined in the cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules 0) NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
1) MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if

EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled;MIN_PDCH >=
NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled.
2) if the ’network_operation_mode (MFS)’ parameter is set to 2

(NMO II) then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0.

CCCH combined"
CCCH not combined"
4) When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then

NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 4 0
994 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

External Comment - Only the value 0 is supported

- The Master PDCH requires the establishment of a GCH (Abis and
Ater) which does not carry traffic. In case of Abis or Ater through
satellite link, the usage of the MPDCH must consider the following
criteria:
* higher cost of transmission resources through the satellite link;
* limited throughput of the RSL in case of Abis through satellite to
about 6 kbit/s (because of round trip delay effect on acknowledged
protocol with limited LAP-D window size). In case of important CS
signalling load, the RSL may not be able to transport the additional
signalling load due toTBF establishments when no MPDCH is
established.
Hence the recommendation in the GPRS through satellite case is:
* for a cell connected with Abis through satellite and with non
negligible signalling load (CS+PS), MPDCH is recommended;
* for a cell connected with Ater through satellite, MPDCH is not
recommended.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 995 / 1278

6.2.152 (NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR) - (NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR)
Parameter Name HMI Name NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR
Logical Name NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR
Definition Threshold below which a NC cell reselection Cause PT2 can be

triggered due to the detection of a better neighbour cell.
Coding rules 0: "-110 dBm (Never)", 1:" -109 dBm", ...,63: "-47 dBm (Always)"
(step size = 1 dB)
Mandatory rules –

triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = ’Enable’), it is
recommended to deactivate NC cell reselection Cause PT2 (i.e. set
NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR to ’-110 dBm (Never)’. The aim of
this recommended rule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRS
redirection.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -47
External Comment 1) The specific value of "-110 dBm (Never)" deactivates the NC cell
reselections Cause PT2.
2) The specific value of "-47 dBm (Always)" systematically allows the
triggering of NC cell reselections Cause PT2
996 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.153 (NC_DL_RXLEV_THR) - (NC_DL_RXLEV_THR)
Parameter Name HMI Name NC_DL_RXLEV_THR
Logical Name NC_DL_RXLEV_THR
Definition Threshold below which a NC cell reselection Cause PT1 is triggered

due to a too bad RXLEV in the downlink direction (while the MS is
in packet transfer mode).
Coding rules 0: "-110 dBm (Never)", 1:" -109 dBm", ...,63: "-47 dBm" (step size
= 1 dB)
Mandatory rules –

recommended to activate NC cell reselection Cause PT1 (i.e. set
NC_DL_RXLEV_THR to ’-47 dBm (Always)’.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -96
External Comment The specific value of "-110 dBm (Never)" deactivates the NC cell
reselection Cause PT1.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 997 / 1278

6.2.154 (NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR) - (NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR)
Parameter Name HMI Name NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR
Logical Name NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR
Definition Threshold above which a NC cell reselection Cause PT3 is triggered

due to a too bad RXQUAL in downlink direction (while the MS is
in packet transfer mode).
Coding rules step size = 0.1. At the OMC-R, the following values are displayed:
"0", "0.1", "0.2", ..., "6.9", "7 (Never)".
Mandatory rules –

NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR to ’7 (Never)’. The aim of this recommended
rule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRS redirection.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 7 7
External Comment The specific value of "7 (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselection
Cause PT3.
998 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.155 (NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET) - (NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET)
Parameter Name HMI Name NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET
Logical Name NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET
Definition NC ping-pong offset which is applied to the C2 or C32 criterion to

disfavour the neighbour cells during T_NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET.
Coding rules step size = 1 dB
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dB 0 63 5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 999 / 1278

6.2.156 (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T) - (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T)
Parameter Name HMI Name NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T
Logical Name NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T
Definition Reporting period of NC measurements reported by the MS while

in packet transfer mode.
Coding rules coded from 0 to 7 (0 0 0 : 0.48 sec , 0 0 1: 0.96 sec , 0 1 0 : 1.92

sec , 0 1 1: 3.84 sec, 1 0 0 : 7.68 sec , 1 0 1 : 15.36 sec , 1 1 0:
30.72 sec , 1 1 1: 61.44 sec) .
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
sec 0.48 61.44 0.96
1000 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.157 (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n)) -
(NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n)
Logical Name NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n)
Definition Reporting period of NC measurements reported by the MS while

in packet transfer mode.
Coding rules coded from 0 to 7 (0 0 0 : 0.48 sec , 0 0 1: 0.96 sec , 0 1 0 : 1.92

sec , 0 1 1: 3.84 sec, 1 0 0 : 7.68 sec , 1 0 1 : 15.36 sec , 1 1 0:
30.72 sec , 1 1 1: 61.44 sec) .
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
sec 0.48 61.44 0.96
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1001 / 1278

6.2.158 (NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) -
(NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(0,n))
Parameter Name HMI Name NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Logical Name NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(0,n)
Definition NC cell reselection offset used for triggering power budget causes.
Coding rules 0: -127 dB (Always), 1: -126 dB, ..., 254: 127 dB, 255: 128 dB
(Never)
(step size = 1 dB)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
dB -127 128 128
External Comment 1) The specific value of "128 dB (Never)" deactivates the NC cell
reselection Cause PT2 towards the target cell n.
2) The specific value of "-127 dB" (Always)" systematically triggers
the NC cell reselection Cause PT2 towards the target cell n.
1002 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.159 (NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR) -
(NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR)
Parameter Name HMI Name NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR
Logical Name NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR
Definition Forgetting factor of the filter used to average the NC measurements

reported in the Packet Measurement Report messages.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0.13
External Comment This parameter applies to the serving cell and the neighbour cells.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1003 / 1278

6.2.160 (NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD) - (NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD)
Parameter Name HMI Name NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD
Logical Name NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD
Definition Period after which a weight of 0.9 s is applied to the current UL or

DL RXQUAL samples in the averaging filter.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
ms 20 10000 4000
External Comment This parameter applies to the serving cell.
1004 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.161 (NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR) - (NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR)
Parameter Name HMI Name NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR
Logical Name NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR
Definition Threshold above which a NC cell reselection Cause PT4 is triggered

due to a too bad RXQUAL in uplink direction (while the MS is in
packet transfer mode).
Coding rules step size = 0.1. At the OMC-R, the following values are displayed:
"0", "0.1", "0.2", ..., "6.9", "7 (Never)"
Mandatory rules –

NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR to ’7 (Never)’. The aim of this recommended
rule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRS redirection.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 7 7
External Comment The specific value of "7 (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselection
Cause PT4.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1005 / 1278

6.2.162 (NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE) - (NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE)
Parameter Name HMI Name NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE
Logical Name NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE
Definition NC2 deactivation mode. This parameter defines whether or not the
Packet Measurement Order message with a Reset Command is sent
at the end of a packet transfer.
Coding rules 0: "NC2 deactivation at the end of the packet transfer". A Packet
Measurement Order message is sent to deactivate the NC2 mode at
the end of the packet transfer.
1: "NC2 deactivation at the expiry of the GMM Ready timer". No
Packet Measurement Order message is sent to deactivate the NC2
mode.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggered
systematically (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = ’Disable’), the
presence of the PBCCH is not mandatory. However, the following
recommendations apply, depending on the presence of the PBCCH:
- If PBCCH is present, the NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE can be set

to any value (at the end of the packet transfer mode or at the expiry of
the GMM Ready timer) if the setting of the C32 parameters ensures
that GPRS mobile stations do not camp in cells where outgoing
GPRS redirections are systematically triggered.
- If PBCCH is not present or PBCCH is present but C32 parameters

are not correctly set, the NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE should
be set to "at the expiry of the GMM Ready timer" to prevent the
GPRS mobile stations from reselecting a cell where outgoing GPRS
redirections are triggered systematically (at least while the MS is in
packet idle mode and the GMM Ready timer is running).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
1006 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.163 (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER) -
(NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER)
Parameter Name HMI Name NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER
Logical Name NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER
Definition This parameter defines whether the MS or the BSS controls the cell
reselections.
Coding rules 0: NC0 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cell
reselections and no MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.
1: NC1 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cell
reselections but all the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.
(Not supported)
2: NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS. The BSS controls the
cell reselections of R99 onwards MS when in packet transfer mode
or of R99 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the
selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated
for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the
BSS.
3: NC2 mode of operation for all MS. The BSS controls the cell
reselections of all MS when in packet transfer mode or of all MS when
in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation
mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the
MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.
4: NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS. The BSS
controls the cell reselections of Rel.4 onwards MS when in packet
transfer mode or of Rel.4 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state
(depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2
mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet
measurements to the BSS.
Mandatory rules - The OMC-R only shows the values 0, 2, 3 and 4 to the operator.
NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = NC0 mode of operation for all MS
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 4 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1007 / 1278

External Comment If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of

operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all
MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS", then the 3G
search is systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode
(activation performed through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2]
message).
If EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION = "Enabled with 3G
search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even if
Network_Control_Order > 1", then the 3G search is activated even
when activating the NC2 mode (the Packet Measurement Order
[NC2] message will not be sent).
1008 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.164 (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER) -
(NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER
Logical Name NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER(n)
Definition This parameter defines whether the MS or the BSS controls the cell
reselections.
Coding rules 0: NC0 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cell
reselections an no MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.
1: NC1 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cell
reselections but all the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.
(Not supported)
2: NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS. The BSS controls the
cell reselections of R99 onwards MS when in packet transfer mode
or of R99 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the
selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated
for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the
BSS.
3: NC2 mode of operation for all MS. The BSS controls the cell
reselections of all MS when in packet transfer mode or of all MS when
in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation
mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the
MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.
4: NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS. The BSS
controls the cell reselections of Rel.4 onwards MS when in packet
transfer mode or of Rel.4 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state
(depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2
mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet
measurements to the BSS.
Mandatory rules - The OMC-R only shows the values 0, 2, 3 and 4 to the operator.
NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = NC0 mode of operation for all MS
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
None 0 4 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1009 / 1278

External Comment If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of

operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS"
or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS", the 3G search is
systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode (activation
performed through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message).
This 3G search deactivation is then performed independently of the
value of the EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION parameter.
1010 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.165 (Network_mode_of_operation) - (network_operation_mode

(BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name Network_mode_of_operation
Logical Name network_operation_mode (BSC)
Definition This parameter defines the CS-PS co-ordination for paging.
Coding rules 3 possible values : 1, 2, 3; 1 == Network operation mode I ; 2 ==

Network operation mode II ; 3 == Network operation mode III.
Mandatory rules If the ’network_operation_mode (BSC)’ parameter is set to NMO II

then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
Equal to network_operation_mode (MFS).
Recommended rules If EN_DTM is Enabled for at least one cell within the BSS it is highly
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 1 3 2
External Comment Any change will trigger a data reset of the GPUs. Stop and restart of
(E)GPRS traffic in all the cells of the BSS.
NMO I requires a Gs interface.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1011 / 1278

6.2.166 (Network_mode_of_operation) - (network_operation_mode

(MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name Network_mode_of_operation
Logical Name network_operation_mode (MFS)
Definition This parameter defines the CS-PS co-ordination for paging.
Coding rules 3 possible values : 1, 2, 3; 1 == Network operation mode I ; 2 ==

Network operation mode II ; 3 == Network operation mode III
Mandatory rules If the ’network_operation_mode (MFS)’ parameter is set to NMO II

then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0.
Equal to network_operation_mode (BSC).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 3 2
External Comment Any change will trigger a data reset of the GPUs. Stop and restart of
(E)GPRS traffic in all the cells of the BSS.
NMO I requires a Gs interface.
1012 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.167 (Normal Information Rate) - (NIR)
Parameter Name HMI Name Normal Information Rate
Logical Name NIR
Definition Normal Information Rate.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC
Recommended rules NIR=0 when direct access is used
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance PVC
kbit/s 0 1984 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1013 / 1278

6.2.168 (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) -
(NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)
Parameter Name HMI Name NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Logical Name NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Definition Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet Flow Context, with
precedence parameter set to ’normal’
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 15
1014 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.169 (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) -
(NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)
Parameter Name HMI Name NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Logical Name NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Context, with precedence parameter set to ’normal’
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 6
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1015 / 1278

Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 9
1016 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 12
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1017 / 1278

6.2.172 (NS Priority) - (NS_Priority)
Parameter Name HMI Name NS Priority
Logical Name NS_Priority
Definition Priority of the NSVC, is used by the load sharing (used for Gb over
Frame Relay interface).
Coding rules 1: lowest priority, 255:highest priority
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance NSVC
None 1 255 10
1018 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.173 (NSEI) - (NSEI)
Parameter Name HMI Name NSEI
Logical Name NSEI
Definition NSE Identifier.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules The NSEI shall be unique per MFS.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance NSE
None 1 65535 None
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1019 / 1278

6.2.174 (NstagnatingWindowDL_LIMIT) -
(N_stagnating_Window_DL_LIMIT)
Parameter Name HMI Name NstagnatingWindowDL_LIMIT
Logical Name N_stagnating_Window_DL_LIMIT
Definition This parameter defines the maximum number of consecutive Packet

Downlink ACK/NACK or EGPRS Packet Downlink ACK/NACK
messages reporting the failure of progress of the RLC window during
the active phase of a downlink TBF, before triggering an abnormal
release of the DL TBF. This parameter is used in conjunction with the
MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay to decide if the DL TBF shall be released.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 256 32
1020 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.175 (NstagnatingWindowUL_LIMIT) -
(N_stagnating_Window_UL_LIMIT)
Parameter Name HMI Name NstagnatingWindowUL_LIMIT
Logical Name N_stagnating_Window_UL_LIMIT
Definition NstagnatingWindow limit above which a mono-slot uplink TBF alone

on its PDCH shall be released: the counter is incremented each time
a Packet UL Ack/Nack fails in making the RLC window progress.
For a multi-slot TBF or a TBF which shares its PDCH, the limit is
proportional to the allocated bandwidth at the TBF establishment.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 256 10
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1021 / 1278

6.2.176 (NSVC Identifier) - (NSVCI)
Parameter Name HMI Name NSVC Identifier
Logical Name NSVCI
Definition NSVC identifier (used for Gb over Frame Relay interface).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance NSVC
None 1 65535 None
1022 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.177 (PAN_DEC) - (PAN_DEC (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name PAN_DEC
Logical Name PAN_DEC (BSC)
Definition Value decremented from MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL

ACK/NACK is not received before MS timer T3182.
Coding rules Binary coded on 3 bits
Mandatory rules Equal to PAN_DEC (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1023 / 1278

6.2.178 (PAN_DEC) - (PAN_DEC (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name PAN_DEC
Logical Name PAN_DEC (MFS)
Definition Value decremented from MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL

ACK/NACK is not received before MS timer T3182.
Mandatory rules Equal to PAN_DEC (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
1024 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.179 (PAN_INC) - (PAN_INC (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name PAN_INC
Logical Name PAN_INC (BSC)
Definition Value incremented to MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL

ACK/NACK is received by MS.
Mandatory rules Equal to PAN_INC (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1025 / 1278

6.2.180 (PAN_INC) - (PAN_INC (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name PAN_INC
Logical Name PAN_INC (MFS)
Definition Value incremented to MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL

ACK/NACK is received by MS.
Mandatory rules Equal to PAN_INC (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
1026 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.181 (PAN_MAX) - (PAN_MAX (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name PAN_MAX
Logical Name PAN_MAX (BSC)
Definition Maximum value for counter N3102. cell reselection is done by MS

when N3102 <= 0.
Coding rules Possible values : 4, 8, 12...., 32 respectively binary coded 000, 001,
..., 111
Mandatory rules Equal to PAN_MAX (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 4 32 32
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1027 / 1278

6.2.182 (PAN_MAX) - (PAN_MAX (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name PAN_MAX
Logical Name PAN_MAX (MFS)
Definition Maximum value for counter N3102. cell reselection is done by MS

when N3102 <= 0.
Coding rules Possible values : 4, 8, 12,.., 32 respectively binary coded 000, 001,..
, 111
Mandatory rules Equal to PAN_MAX (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 4 32 32
1028 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.183 (PC_MEAS_CHAN) - (PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name PC_MEAS_CHAN
Logical Name PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC)
Definition This parameter determines on which channel the MS shall measure

the received power level on the downlink for the purpose of the uplink
power control.
Coding rules 0 : downlink measurements for power control shall be made on BCCH
Mandatory rules Equal to PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS).
Recommended rules PC_MEAS_CHAN should be forced to PDCH in multiband cells
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1029 / 1278

6.2.184 (PC_MEAS_CHAN) - (PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name PC_MEAS_CHAN
Logical Name PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS)
Definition This parameter determines on which channel the MS shall measure

the received power level on the downlink for the purpose of the uplink
power control.
Coding rules 0 : downlink measurements for power control shall be made on

BCCH, 1 : downlink measurements for power control shall be made
on PDCH
Mandatory rules Equal to PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC).
Recommended rules PC_MEAS_CHAN should be forced to PDCH in multiband cells
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
1030 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.185 (PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1) -
(PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1
Logical Name PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1
Definition Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for DL PDCH
unit allocation distribution
Coding rules step size = 0.1 PDCH
Mandatory rules PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1<

PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 0.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1031 / 1278

Definition Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for DL PDCH
Mandatory rules PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1 <

PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2<
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 1
1032 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for DL PDCH
Mandatory rules PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2

< PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 <
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 1.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1033 / 1278

Definition Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for DL PDCH

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 2
1034 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 2.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1035 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 3
1036 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 3.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1037 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 4
1038 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Mandatory rules PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_8 <

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 4.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1039 / 1278

6.2.194 (PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1) -
(PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1
Logical Name PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1
Definition Upper limit of the first band, lower limit of the second band for DL
TBF duration distribution.
Mandatory rules PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 <

PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 0.5
1040 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for DL TBF
duration distribution

PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 <
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1041 / 1278

Definition Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for DL TBF

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 2
1042 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for DL TBF

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1043 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 5
1044 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 10
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1045 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 20
1046 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 50
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1047 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 100
1048 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.203 (PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1) - (PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1
Logical Name PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1
Definition Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for LLC
volume carried by an DL TBF distribution
Mandatory rules PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 500
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1049 / 1278

Definition Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for LLC
Mandatory rules PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 <

PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 1000
1050 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for LLC volume
carried by an DL TBF distribution

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 2000
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1051 / 1278

Definition Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for LLC volume

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 3000
1052 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 5000
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1053 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 10000
1054 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 20000
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1055 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 50000
1056 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for LLC
Mandatory rules PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_8 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_9
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 100000
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1057 / 1278

6.2.212 (PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1) -
(PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1
Logical Name PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1
Definition Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for UL PDCH
Mandatory rules PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1<

PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 0.5
1058 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for UL PDCH
Mandatory rules PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1 <

PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2<
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1059 / 1278

Definition Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for UL PDCH
Mandatory rules PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2

< PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 <
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 1.5
1060 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for UL PDCH

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1061 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 2.5
1062 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1063 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 3.5
1064 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 4
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1065 / 1278

Mandatory rules PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_8 <

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0.1 4.9 4.5
1066 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.221 (PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1) -
(PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1
Logical Name PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1
Definition Upper limit of the first band, lower limit of the second band for UL
TBF duration distribution.
Mandatory rules PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 <

PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 0.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1067 / 1278

Definition Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for UL TBF

PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 <
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 1
1068 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for UL TBF

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1069 / 1278

Definition Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for UL TBF

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 3
1070 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1071 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 10
1072 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1073 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 50
1074 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.5 16383.5 100
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1075 / 1278

6.2.230 (PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1) - (PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1
Logical Name PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1
Definition Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for LLC
volume carried by an UL TBF distribution
Mandatory rules PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 500
1076 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Definition Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for LLC
Mandatory rules PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 <

PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 1000
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1077 / 1278

Definition Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for LLC volume
carried by an UL TBF distribution

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 2000
1078 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 3000
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1079 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 5000
1080 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 10000
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1081 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 20000
1082 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 50000
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1083 / 1278

Definition Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for LLC
Mandatory rules PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_8 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_9
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
byte 1 99999999 100000
1084 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.239 (PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1) - (PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1)
Parameter Name HMI Name PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1
Logical Name PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1
Definition This parameter indicates the values of the access persistence level
for radio priority 1.
Coding rules Values : 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16 coded on 4

bits
0 0 0 0 : persistence level 0, 0 0 0 1: persistence level 1, 0 0
1 0:persistence level 2, 0 0 1 1: persistence level 3, 0 1.0.0 :
persistence level 4
. . . . 1 1 1 0 : persistence level 14, 1 1 1 1: persistence level 16
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 16 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1085 / 1278


bits
persistence level 4
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 16 0
1086 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


bits
persistence level 4
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 16 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1087 / 1278


bits
persistence level 4
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 16 0
1088 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.243 (PFC_T6) - (PFC_T6)
Parameter Name HMI Name PFC_T6
Logical Name PFC_T6
Definition Timer guarding the Download-BSS-PFC procedure
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.1 10 0.5
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1089 / 1278

6.2.244 (PFC_T8) - (PFC_T8)
Parameter Name HMI Name PFC_T8
Logical Name PFC_T8
Definition Timer guarding the Modify-BSS-PFC procedure
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.1 10 0.5
1090 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.245 (PRACH_BUSY_THRES) - (PRACH_BUSY_THRES)
Parameter Name HMI Name PRACH_BUSY_THRES
Logical Name PRACH_BUSY_THRES
Definition Received level above which a PRACH block is deemed busy.
Coding rules This parameter is encoded with a step size of 4 dB as follows:

0: -110 dBm
1: -106 dBm
2: -102 dBm
3: -98 dBm
4: -94 dBm
5: -90 dBm
6: -86 dBm
7: -82 dBm
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm
10: -70 dBm
11: -66 dBm
12: -62 dBm
13: -58 dBm
14: -54 dBm
15: -50 dBm
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dBm -110 -50 -106
External Comment Parameter used in dynamic allocation of secondary MasterPDCH

algorithm.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1091 / 1278

6.2.246 (PRIORITY_CLASS) - (GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS)
Parameter Name HMI Name PRIORITY_CLASS
Logical Name GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS
Definition HCS priority of the cell, used in NC0.
Coding rules Coded on 3 bits.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
1092 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.247 (PRIORITY_CLASS) - (GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name PRIORITY_CLASS
Logical Name GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n)
Definition HCS priority of the adjacent cell, used in NC0.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
None 0 7 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1093 / 1278

6.2.248 (PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX) - (PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX)
Parameter Name HMI Name PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX
Logical Name PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX
Definition Indicates whether or not the PS requests shall be preferentially

served with PDCH(s) of the BCCH TRX
Coding rules 0: No preference. The TRX ranking algorithm handles the BCCH
TRX as a non-BCCH TRX.
1: PS requests preferentially served on BCCH TRX. The TRX

ranking algorithm ensures that the BCCH TRX has the highest
preference to carry PS traffic (provided that the BCCH TRX can carry
PS traffic, i.e. TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on that TRX).
2 : PS requests served on BCCH TRX with lowest priority. The

TRX ranking algorithm ensures that the BCCH TRX has the lowest
preference to carry PS traffic (provided that the BCCH TRX can carry
PS traffic, i.e. TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on that TRX).
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules If EGPRS is activated in a non-hopping or a non-hopping /

radio-hopping cell, Alcatel recommend to set this parameter to ’0’ in
order to reduce the likelihood of having to reduce the GMSK output
power (see external comment).
If EGPRS is activated in a base-band hopping cell, setting this
parameter to ’0’ does not reduce the likelihood of having to reduce
the GMSK output power since PS capable TRXs will hop on the
BCCH carrier.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 2 0
1094 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

External Comment When set to ’1’ or ’2’, this parameter is only relevant if the BCCH TRX
supports PS traffic (i.e. if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on the BCCH TRX).
If EGPRS is activated in a non-hopping or a non-hopping /
radio-hopping cell, if the BCCH TRX can carry PS traffic and if the
BCCH TRX is associated to a TRE hardware allowing the usage of
8-PSK, the operator shall ensure that the difference in the mean
output powers between GSMK and 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dB
in order to be compliant with 3GPP TS 45.005 and 3GPP TS 45.008
requirements (or 4 dB if an SDCCH timeslot is defined on timeslot
number 7 of the BCCH TRX).
If EGPRS is activated in a base-band hopping cell, the operator
shall ensure that the difference in the mean output powers between
GMSK and 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dB in order to be compliant
with 3GPP TS 45.005 and 3GPP TS 45.008 requirements (or 4 dB if
timeslot number 7 is not part of the PDCH groups).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1095 / 1278

6.2.249 (QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN) - (QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN)
Parameter Name HMI Name QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN
Logical Name QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN
Definition Additional capacity (in terms of radio bandwidth and in terms of

transmission resources) which is reserved for a streaming TBF (RT
PFC) to correctly fulfil its AGBR contract and to possibly convey other
multiplexed NRT PFC(s) of the same TBF. The part of this margin
that is not used by the streaming TBF may be used by other TBF(s).
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Setting QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN to 0% is not recommended (the

GBR of some RT PFCs may turn out to be impossible to guarantee in
this case).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
% 0 100 20
External Comment In case of IP transport in the BSS, UDP/IP headers are taken into
account in the bandwidth computation
1096 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.250 (R_AVERAGE_EGPRS) - (R_AVERAGE_EGPRS)
Parameter Name HMI Name R_AVERAGE_EGPRS
Logical Name R_AVERAGE_EGPRS
Definition Average bitrate per PDCH for Edge capable terminals in this cell
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules RMIN_EGPRS <= R_AVERAGE_EGPRS
Recommended rules R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than

the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_EGPRS_MCS (e.g. if
MAX_EGPRS_MCS = MCS9 => R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not
be higher than 59,2kbps).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
bit/s 0 59200 30000
External Comment This parameter represents the average bit rate that is targeted,
per PDCH, in the cell with respect to the cell radio planning. It
is recommended not to set this bit rate higher than the average
measured bit rate in the cell.
The default value corresponds to MCS-6.
The max value corresponds to MCS-9.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1097 / 1278

6.2.251 (R_AVERAGE_GPRS) - (R_AVERAGE_GPRS)
Parameter Name HMI Name R_AVERAGE_GPRS
Logical Name R_AVERAGE_GPRS
Definition Average bitrate per PDCH for non-Edge capable terminals in this cell
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules RMIN_GPRS <= R_AVERAGE_GPRS
Recommended rules R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than

the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_GPRS_CS (e.g. if
MAX_GPRS_CS = CS2 => R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be higher
than 12kbps).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
bit/s 0 20000 12000
External Comment This parameter represents the average bit rate that is targeted,
per PDCH, in the cell with respect to the cell radio planning. It
is recommended not to set this bit rate higher than the average
measured bit rate in the cell.
The default value corresponds to CS-2.
The max value corresponds to CS-4.
1098 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.252 (RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) - (RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)
Parameter Name HMI Name RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Logical Name RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Definition This parameter indicates in both STANDBY and READY state the
additional hysteresis which applies when selecting a cell in a new
Routing Area.
Coding rules step size = 2 dB, Coded on 3 bits. 000=0 dB, 001=2 dB, ...111=14 dB
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dB 0 14 8
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1099 / 1278

6.2.253 (RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER) - (RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER
Logical Name RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS)
Definition Timing Advance threshold for CHANNEL REQUIRED and PACKET

CHANNEL REQUEST filtering.
Coding rules 64: no filtering
Mandatory rules Equal to RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC)
Recommended rules Disable the filtering for extended cells.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
bper 0 64 64
External Comment One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m. CHANNEL

REQUIRED or PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST messages with
Timing Advance greater or equal to RACH_TA_FILTER are
discarded.
1100 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.254 (RMIN_EGPRS) - (RMIN_EGPRS)
Parameter Name HMI Name RMIN_EGPRS
Logical Name RMIN_EGPRS
Definition Minimal bitrate per PDCH for Edge capable terminals in this cell (at
95 % or 90% confidence level or less %, depending on tolerable risk)
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules RMIN_EGPRS <= R_AVERAGE_EGPRS
Recommended rules If EN_STREAMING = 1 and EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK = False

then the following condition must be respected: RMIN_EGPRS
<= useful bitrate corresponding to min (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS,
TBF_DL_INIT_MCS). Otherwise the streaming PFC can be
downgraded to the Defaut Best Effort ABQP.
R_MIN_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the
useful bitrate corresponding to Max_EGPRS_MCS. If the above
recommended rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be
accepted by the BSS whereas it will not be possible to handle their
associated GBR. This may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best
Effort.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
bit/s 0 59200 20800
External Comment This parameter is used to provide a guaranted Bit rate of streaming
PFC for Edge capable MS, in the worst case radio condition. It
should be set appropriately with respect to the cell radio planning.
The default value corresponds to a bitrate between MCS-4 and
MCS-5.
The max value corresponds to MCS-9.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1101 / 1278

6.2.255 (RMIN_GPRS) - (RMIN_GPRS)
Parameter Name HMI Name RMIN_GPRS
Logical Name RMIN_GPRS
Definition Minimal bitrate per PDCH for non-Edge capable terminals in this
cell cell (at 95 % or 90% confidence level or less, depending on
tolerable risk)
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules RMIN_GPRS <= R_AVERAGE_GPRS
Recommended rules If EN_STREAMING = 1 and EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK = False

then the following condition must be respected: RMIN_GPRS
<= useful bitrate corresponding to min (TBF_UL_INIT_CS,
TBF_DL_INIT_CS). Otherwise the streaming PFC can be
downgraded to the Defaut Best Effort ABQP.
R_MIN_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful
bitrate corresponding to Max_GPRS_CS. If the above recommended
rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be accepted by the BSS
whereas it will not be possible to handle their associated GBR. This
may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best Effort.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
bit/s 0 20000 8000
External Comment This parameter is used to provide a guaranted Bit rate of streaming
PFC for Non Edge capable MS, in the worst case radio condition. It
should be set appropriately with respect to the cell radio planning.
The default value corresponds to CS-1.
The max value corresponds to CS-4.
1102 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.256 (Round trip delay MFS-MS) - (round_trip_delay)
Parameter Name HMI Name Round trip delay MFS-MS
Logical Name round_trip_delay
Definition Round trip delay between the MFS and a MS, in TDM and IP mode.
Coding rules step size=10 ms
Mandatory rules - T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec

- If GPRS traffic is carried between BTS and MFS
through satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and
Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the corresponding BT, then
EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS must be equal to enabled
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
ms 80 940 160
External Comment The round-trip delay is used by the RRM layers. The OMC-R and the
MFS also use this parameter to determine whether or not GPRS
traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links as follows:
- If round_trip_delay < 500 ms, the OMC-R and the MFS consider
that GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links,
- If round_trip_delay >= 500 ms, the OMC-R and the MFS
consider that GPRS traffic is carried through one satellite link:
either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in case
Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0 (TDM); or through a satellite link
between BTS and MFS in case Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP).
When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links
in the serving cell, it is recommended to set the round_trip_delay
parameter to [Delay due to satellite (540 ms) + Delay due to MFS-MS
link (160 ms)] = 700 ms.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1103 / 1278

6.2.257 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name Routing Area Code for GPRS
Logical Name RA_CODE (BSC)
Definition Routing Area Code for GPRS.
Coding rules The initial special value -1 means that the RA code has still not been
set by the operator.
Mandatory rules - Equal to RA_CODE (MFS)

- A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer)
shall have the same RA_CODE when they are PS capable
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None -1 255 0
1104 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.258 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE (MFS))
Logical Name RA_CODE (MFS)
Definition Routing Area Code.
Coding rules 0...255 (significant value: 3GPP TS 04.60)

other values: external or unknown cell
Mandatory rules - Equal to RA_CODE (BSC)

- A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer)
shall have the same RA_CODE when they are PS capable
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None -1 255 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1105 / 1278

6.2.259 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE(n))
Logical Name RA_CODE(n)
Definition Routing Area Code of neighbour cells.
Coding rules 0...255 (significant value: 3GPP TS 04.60);

other values: external or unknown cell.
The special value of "-1" means that the RA code has still not
been valued by the network provider or that the MFS shall set the
SAME_RA_AS_SERVING_CELL field to 0.
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules If i) the target and serving cells belong to different PLMNs and ii) the
RAC and LAC of the target cell are equal to the RAC and LAC of the
serving cell, and iii) there is a PBCCH established in the serving
cell, and iv) a cell reselection adjacency link is defined between the
serving cell and the target cell, then it is recommended to set the
RA_CODE to ’-1’. Otherwise, the MFS considers that the serving cell
and the target cell belong to the same routing area when setting
the SAME_RA_AS_SERVING_CELL field in the 04.60 PACKET
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE 3/3bis messages.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
None -1 255 0
External Comment The special value of -1 means that the RA code has still not been
valued by the operator or that the routing area of the serving cell is
different from the routing area of the target cell.
1106 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.260 (Routing Area Colour for GPRS) - (RA_COLOUR)
Parameter Name HMI Name Routing Area Colour for GPRS
Logical Name RA_COLOUR
Definition Routing Area Colour for GPRS.
Coding rules Coded over 3 bits. the initial special value -1 means that the RA
codecolour has not yet been valued by the network provider.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 0
External Comment Default value depends on the configuration. The value indicated here
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1107 / 1278

6.2.261 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS))
Logical Name RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS)
cell.
Mandatory rules RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dBm -110 -47 -100
1108 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.262 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS))
Logical Name RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS)
cell.
Mandatory rules RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance adj
dBm -110 -47 -100
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1109 / 1278

6.2.263 (S) - (S)
Parameter Name HMI Name S
Logical Name S
Definition Number of slots between 2 successive PACKET CHANNEL

REQUEST.
Coding rules Possible values are : 12, 15, 20, 30, 41, 55, 76, 109, 163, 217
respectively binary coded : 0000, 0001, 0010,... ,1001
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater terrestrial links,
it is recommended to set S so that the time between two successive
Packet Channel Request messages is longer than 900 ms.
When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links,
it is recommended to set S so that the time between two successive
Packet Channel Request messages is longer than 1400 ms.
The number of slots belonging to the MS’s PRACH between 2

successive Packet Channel Request messages is a random value
drawn randomly for each new retransmission with uniform distribution
in the set (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1) with T = Tx_INT. The time in seconds
between two Packet Channel Request messages is determined as
a function of S, TX_INT and of the BS_PRACH_BLKS parameter.
BS_PRACH_BLKS defines the number of blocks statically allocated
to the PRACH per 52 multiframe on each PCCCH.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 12 217 30
1110 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.264 (SGSNR) - (SGSNR)
Parameter Name HMI Name SGSNR
Logical Name SGSNR

used to implement SGSN software.
Coding rules 0 = SGSN is release ’98 or older; 1 = SGSN is release ’99 onwards
Mandatory rules EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if SGSNR = 1.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
External Comment Any modification of the parameter leads the MFS to reset
autonomously all the GPUs connected to this BSS.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1111 / 1278

6.2.265 (SMS_PRIORITY) - (SMS_PRIORITY)
Parameter Name HMI Name SMS_PRIORITY
Logical Name SMS_PRIORITY
Definition Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined "SMS" PFC.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 15
1112 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.266 (T stop frame relay emission) - (T_STOP_FR_EMISSION)
Parameter Name HMI Name T stop frame relay emission
Logical Name T_STOP_FR_EMISSION
Definition Timer used to trigger restart of emission on a PVC (Frame Relay).
Mandatory rules Not changeable after MFS system initialization.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance PVC
ms 10 5000 100
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1113 / 1278

6.2.267 (T_AVG_T) - (T_AVG_T (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name T_AVG_T
Logical Name T_AVG_T (BSC)
Definition Signal strength filter period for power control in packet transfer mode.
Coding rules binary coded on 5 bits
Mandatory rules Equal to T_AVG_T (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 25 12
1114 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.268 (T_AVG_T) - (T_AVG_T (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name T_AVG_T
Logical Name T_AVG_T (MFS)
Definition Signal strength filter period for power control in packet transfer mode.
Mandatory rules Equal to T_AVG_T (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 25 12
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1115 / 1278

6.2.269 (T_AVG_W) - (T_AVG_W (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name T_AVG_W
Logical Name T_AVG_W (BSC)
Definition Signal strength filter period for power control in packet idle mode.
Mandatory rules Equal to T_AVG_W (MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 25 20
1116 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.270 (T_AVG_W) - (T_AVG_W (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name T_AVG_W
Logical Name T_AVG_W (MFS)
Definition Signal strength filter period for power control in packet idle mode.
Mandatory rules Equal to T_AVG_W (BSC)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 25 20
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1117 / 1278

6.2.271 (T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN) - (T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN
Logical Name T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN
Definition This timer defines the duration of the delay introduced by the BSS
to send the final Packet UL Ack/Nack message when releasing an
UL TBF.
Coding rules step size : 100 ms ; 0 = 0 msec, 1 = 100 msec, 2 = 200 msec, etc
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
ms 0 2000 400
External Comment - The feature "delayed emission of the final Packet UL Ack/Nack"
can be inhibited by setting the value 0 to the parameter
T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN. When the feature is enabled, the timer
duration should be long enough to let the server send its response to
the uplink PDUs received from the MS, while remaining short enough
in order not to jeopardise the sending of further uplink PDUs by the
MS.
- If GPRS traffic between one BTS and the MFS is carried
through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and
Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the concerned BTS, and if
T_delayed_Final_PUAN < 540ms then the MS will wait for a delay
equal to Max (540ms, T_delayed_Final_PUAN). This is due to the
delayed PMU-PTU interworking when in IP mode (PMU at MFS side,
PTU at BTS side).
Note: 540ms is the RTD with a satellite link.
1118 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.272 (T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport) - (T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport
Logical Name T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport
Definition Time period to request for a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack with

measurements.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
ms 60 3000 400
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1119 / 1278

6.2.273 (T_FLOW_CTRL_CELL) - (T_flow_ctrl_cell)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_FLOW_CTRL_CELL
Logical Name T_flow_ctrl_cell
Definition Periodicity of emission of NM- FLOW-CONTROL-BVC message to

SGSN.
Coding rules step size=1sec, 0 means infinite timer
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0 10 0
1120 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.274 (T_FLOW_CTRL_MS) - (T_flow_ctrl_ms)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_FLOW_CTRL_MS
Logical Name T_flow_ctrl_ms
Definition Periodicity of emission of NM- FLOW-CONTROL-MS message

towards the SGSN for GPRS and EGPRS Mobile Stations.
Coding rules step size=1sec, 0 means infinite timer
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0 250 10
External Comment 1) if T_Flow_Ctrl_MS is set to "0", then the MS flow control

mechanism is inhibited;
2) if T_Flow_Ctrl_MS has a non-null value, then "C< T_flow_ctrl_ms
< Th". The parameters C and Th are defined in the 3GPP TS 08.18.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1121 / 1278

6.2.275 (T_GCH_CORR) - (Tcorr)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_GCH_CORR
Logical Name Tcorr
Definition Timer to supervise clock drift correction loop for 16k channel.
Coding rules step size=100ms
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Tcorr > Trelease+240ms and Tcorr > Testab+240ms

where 240 ms represents the maximum delay in MAC layer between
the notification for a DBN correction and the application of this DBN
correction.

links:
- Tcorr = 0.8 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
- Tcorr = 1.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite
links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
sec 0.5 2 0.8
channels. Former HMI name Tcorr.
1122 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.276 (T_GCH_ESTAB) - (Testab)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_GCH_ESTAB
Logical Name Testab
Definition Supervision of loss of GCH link establishment for 16k channels.
Coding rules step size= 100 ms
Mandatory rules Treq_pending > Testab

links:
- Testab = 0.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
- Testab = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite
links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
sec 0.1 2 0.4
channels. Former HMI name Testab.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1123 / 1278

6.2.277 (T_GCH_INACTIVITY) - (T_GCH_INACTIVITY)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_GCH_INACTIVITY
Logical Name T_GCH_INACTIVITY
Definition Timer to postpone the release of the "unused" GCHs of the M-EGCH
link of a TRX (the condition for some GCHs of the M-EGCH link of
a TRX to become "unused" is that some TBFs established on that
TRX were released).
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules T_GCH_INACTIVITY > T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC in all the

cells of the BSS.
This constraints avoids as much as possible that some GCHs are
released and reestablished again some moments later. This way, the
T3 and T4 TBF reallocations can benefit from the GCHs which are
currently unused, but still established.
If it is seen as an important goal to save Ater resources in the

Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 1 100 3
External Comment The setting of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer comes to make

a trade-off between the GCH resource usage and the Telecom
performance:
- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer, the higher is the GCH
resource usage on the Ater interface.
- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer, the lower is the
average duration of TBF establishments on (P)CCCH, especially if
the GPRS traffic is carried through satellite.
1124 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.278 (T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST) - (T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST
Logical Name T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST
Definition Timer to postpone the release of the last

N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS GCHs established in a
cell, when the last TBF has been released in the cell. There is
no more (E)GPRS traffic in the cell, but keeping some GCHs
established will be useful in case of (E)GPRS traffic resumption
in the cell (e.g. WAP, WEB).
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules If it is seen as an important goal to save Ater resources in the

Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 1 200 20
External Comment That timer is relevant only if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS is

disabled.
The setting of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer comes to make

a trade-off between the GCH resource usage and the Telecom
performance:
- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer, the higher is
the GCH resource usage on the Ater interface.
- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer, the lower is the
average duration of TBF establishments on (P)CCCH, especially if
the GPRS traffic is carried through satellite links.
This parameter may also be used to ensure that the BSS reserves at
least one GCH resource in the serving cell while the MS is engaged
in a Web browsing session.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1125 / 1278

6.2.279 (T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL) - (T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL
Logical Name T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL
Definition Maximum duration of the extended uplink TBF phase
Mandatory rules T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec

links:
- between 1 sec and 2 sec if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and
Ater terrestrial links,
- between 1.5 sec and 2.5 sec if GPRS traffic is carried either through
Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links.
If Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the concerned BTS, the
operator shall ensure that T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL +
round_trip_delay_bts_ms < 5 sec.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
ms 100 4000 2000
External Comment If GPRS traffic between BTS and MFS is carried through satellite link
(round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) =
1 (IP) for the corresponding BTS, the duration of the extended UL
phase in the MS is equal to this timer + 540ms. This is due to the
delayed PMU-PTU interworking when in IP mode (PMU at MFS side,
PTU at BTS side).
Note: 540ms is the RTD with a satellite link.
1126 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.280 (T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING) -
(T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING
Logical Name T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING
Definition Time which multiplied by the GBR defines a buffer level above which
we may consider the BSS failed to provide the GBR
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 8 100 30
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1127 / 1278

6.2.281 (T_NC_PING_PONG) - (T_NC_PING_PONG)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_NC_PING_PONG
Logical Name T_NC_PING_PONG
Definition Time during which the ping-pong offset is applied.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
ms 0 20000 5000
1128 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.282 (T_NC_REJ_CELL) - (T_NC_REJ_CELL)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_NC_REJ_CELL
Logical Name T_NC_REJ_CELL
Definition Time during which a NC cell reselection is inhibited towards that cell
due to a previous NC cell reselection failure on that cell.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
ms 0 20000 5000
External Comment -
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1129 / 1278

6.2.283 (T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME) -
(T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME
Logical Name T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME
Definition Maximum expected response time of a network server as seen from

the MFS.
Coding rules step size: 100 ms
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
ms 100 5000 1600
External Comment 1) The response time corresponds to T1 T2 where T2 corresponds

to the time at which a command is sent to the SGSN and T1 the time
at which the response is received on the MFS side. This command
/ response is e.g. the LLC PDU containing an FTP GET and the
first LLC PDU starting the file transfer. It can also be the LLC PDU
containing an HTTP GET and the first LLC PDU starting the page
download.
2) The value of this timer defines the duration of the Delayed DL TBF
Release procedure. In case the servers to which the GGSN serving
the MFS is connected are not located at the same place, then the
maximum server response time should be entered. However, note
that the higher this timer is, the longer TBF releases will be delayed
and therefore the more resources are used up.
1130 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.284 (T_PAG_PS) - (T_PAG_PS (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name T_PAG_PS
Logical Name T_PAG_PS (BSC)
Definition This timer indicates the maximum time a PS PAGING message can
remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay
on Gb and A-bis interface.
Mandatory rules Equal to T_PAG_PS (MFS)
Recommended rules T_PAG_PS < T3313 (SGSN timer)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
sec 0 25.5 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1131 / 1278

6.2.285 (T_PAG_PS) - (T_PAG_PS (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name T_PAG_PS
Logical Name T_PAG_PS (MFS)
Definition This timer indicates the maximum time a PS PAGING message can
remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay
on Gb and A-bis interface.
Mandatory rules Equal to T_PAG_PS (BSC)
Recommended rules T_PAG_PS < T3313 (SGSN timer)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
sec 0 25.5 3
1132 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.286 (T_PSI_PACCH) - (T_PSI_PACCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_PSI_PACCH
Logical Name T_PSI_PACCH
Definition Scheduling period of PSI1, PSI13 or PSI14 on PACCH.
Coding rules step size =1sec,

00000 == Deactivated PSI scheduling on PACCH,
00001 == 1s,
...
11110 == T_PSI_PACCH = 30 sec
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0 30 14
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1133 / 1278

6.2.287 (T_RESEL) - (T_RESEL)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_RESEL
Logical Name T_RESEL
Definition Timer whose expiry allows a MS, which has performed an abnormal
release with cell reselection, to reselect the previous cell.
Coding rules coded on 3 bits, 000= 5 sec, 001= 10 sec, 010 = 15 sec, 011 = 20
sec, 100= 30 sec, 101 = 60 sec, 110 = 120 sec, 111 = 300 sec
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
sec 5 300 5
1134 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.288 (T_RIM_DISABILITY) - (T_RIM_DISABILITY)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_RIM_DISABILITY
Logical Name T_RIM_DISABILITY
Definition Timer supervising the disability of the adjacent target cell. When no
RAN information has been received (no answer at the end of the
retries or unknown destination), this parameter corresponds to the
duration it is not possible to use the RIM NACC procedure for this
target cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
mn 1 360 60
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1135 / 1278

6.2.289 (T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT) - (T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT
Logical Name T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT
Definition Timer supervising reception of the following RAN Information with

multiple report. It allows to resynchronize the System Information
messages with the remote entity in case of restart of the remote
entity.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
mn 15 360 60
1136 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.290 (T_RIM_RI) - (T_RIM_RI)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_RIM_RI
Logical Name T_RIM_RI
Definition Timer supervising reception of RAN Information ACK
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 1 255 10
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1137 / 1278

6.2.291 (T_RIM_RIR) - (T_RIM_RIR)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_RIM_RIR
Logical Name T_RIM_RIR
Definition Timer supervising reception of RAN Information
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 1 255 10
1138 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.292 (T_ul_assign_PCCCH) - (T_ul_assign_pccch)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_ul_assign_PCCCH
Logical Name T_ul_assign_pccch
Definition The duration between the reception of the (EGPRS) Packet Channel
Request message and one uplink radio block allocated to the MS.
Mandatory rules –

links:
- T_ul_asssign_pccch = 0.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis
and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell,
- T_ul_assign_pccch = 0.7 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through
Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
sec 0.1 0.7 0.4
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1139 / 1278

6.2.293 (T3168) - (T3168 (BSC))
Definition This timer defines the maximum time the MS waits for a packet
UL assignment, after sending a Packet Resource Request (case
of two-phase UL TBF establishment) or after including a Channel
Request Description Information Element in a Packet Downlink
Ack/Nack (case of UL TBF establishment on a concurrent DL TBF).
Broadcast in SI13 within the GPRS Cell Options IE.
Coding rules Coded on 3 bits as follows:

001: 1000 ms
010: 1500 ms
011: 2000 ms
100: 2500 ms
101: 3000 ms
110: 3500 ms
111: 4000 ms.

links:
- T3168 = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
- T3168 = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater
satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms) in the serving cell and
Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0 (TDM).
- T3168 = 2 s if GPRS traffic between the corresponding BTS and the
MFS is carried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms),
and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for this BTS.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
sec 1 4 1
External Comment The setting of T3168 should leave sufficient time to the MFS for
granting PDCHs for serving the UL TBF request, plus also cover
the round trip time and the possible queuing delay within the MFS
before the Packet Uplink Assignment can be sent to the Mobile
Station. Therefore a value of 500 ms is not allowed in this release
of the Alcatel BSS.
1140 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1141 / 1278

6.2.294 (T3168) - (T3168 (MFS))
Logical Name T3168 (MFS)
Definition This timer defines the maximum time the MS waits for a packet
UL assignment, after sending a Packet Resource Request (case
of two-phase UL TBF establishment) or after including a Channel
Request Description Information Element in a Packet Downlink
Ack/Nack (case of UL TBF establishment on a concurrent DL TBF).
Broadcast in PSI1 within the GPRS Cell Options IE.

001: 1000 ms
010: 1500 ms
011: 2000 ms
100: 2500 ms
101: 3000 ms
110: 3500 ms
111: 4000 ms.
Mandatory rules Equal to T3168 (BSC)

links:
- T3168 = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
terrestrial links,
- T3168 = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite
links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS)
= 0 (TDM).
- T3168 = 2 s if GPRS traffic between the corresponding BTS and the
MFS is carried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms),
and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for this BTS.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
sec 1 4 1
External Comment The setting of T3168 should leave sufficient time to the MFS for
granting PDCHs for serving the UL TBF request, plus also cover
the round trip time and the possible queuing delay within the MFS
before the Packet Uplink Assignment can be sent to the Mobile
Station. Therefore a value of 500 ms is not allowed in this release
of the Alcatel BSS.
1142 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1143 / 1278

6.2.295 (T3192) - (T3192 (BSC))
Definition Wait for release of the downlink TBF on MS side after reception of
the final block by the MS.

0 0 0: 500 msec
0 0 1: 1000 msec
0 1 0: 1500 msec
1 1 1: 200 msec

T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec
Recommended rules T3192>MS-BSS roundtrip delay + RRBP maximum duration (60 ms)
links:
==> Case GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial
links in the serving cell:
i) T3192 = 1000 ms if the non-DRX mode is not activated and the
delayed DL TBF release mode is not activated in the cell (i.e. if
DRX_TIMER_MAX = 0 and EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 0)
ii) T3192 = 500 ms if the non-DRX mode is activated or the
delayed DL TBF release mode is activated in the cell (i.e. if
DRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1)
iii) however, if T3192 is finally set to 200 msec, then :
- some abnormal DL TBF release may occur during the delayed
phase, and
- the MS may not receive the NC2 deactivation order from the BSS,
which may lead the MS to send useless PMR before leaving its ready
state.
==> Case GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or
Ater satellite links in the serving cell:
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
1144 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

ms 200 1500 500
External Comment The following values ofT3192 defined in the 3GPP TS 04.60 are not
supported in this release of the Alcatel BSS:
0 1 1: 0 msec
1 0 0: 80 msec
1 0 1: 120 msec
1 1 0: 160 msec
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1145 / 1278

6.2.296 (T3192) - (T3192 (MFS))
Definition Wait for release of the downlink TBF on MS side after reception of
the final block by the MS.

0 0 0: 500 msec
0 0 1: 1000 msec
0 1 0: 1500 msec
1 1 1: 200 msec

T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec
Recommended rules T3192>MS-BSS roundtrip delay + RRBP maximum duration (60 ms)
links:
==> Case GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial
links in the serving cell:
iii) however, if T3192 is finally set to 200 msec, then :
- some abnormal DL TBF release may occur during the delayed
phase, and
- the MS may not receive the NC2 deactivation order from the BSS,
which may lead the MS to send useless PMR before leaving its ready
state.
==> Case GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or
Ater satellite links in the serving cell:
DRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1).
In IP mode, the operator shall ensure that T3192 +

T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay_bts_ms < 5 sec.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
1146 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

ms 200 1500 500
External Comment The following values ofT3192 defined in the 3GPP TS 04.60 are not
supported in this release of the Alcatel BSS:
0 1 1: 0 msec
1 0 0: 80 msec
1 0 1: 120 msec
1 1 0: 160 msec
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1147 / 1278

6.2.297 (T3212) - (T3212 (MFS))
Definition This timer indicates to the MS the delay between two consecutive
Periodic Location Update procedures.
Coding rules 0: no periodic location update, coded on 8 bits
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
6 mn 0 255 30
1148 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.298 (TBF_CS_DL) - (TBF_CS_DL)
Parameter Name HMI Name TBF_CS_DL
Logical Name TBF_CS_DL
Definition Threshold defining the number of consecutive PACKET DOWNLINK

ACK/NACK not received above which the Coding Scheme of a DL
acknowledged or unacknowledged DL TBF is changed to CS-1.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 15 8
External Comment If the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis terrestrial link and Ater
terrestrial link, in case where N3105_LIMIT < TBF_CS_DL then
the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link
adaptation but TBF release.
If the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis satellitel link or Ater satellite
link, in case where N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_CS_DL then
the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link
adaptation but TBF release.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1149 / 1278

6.2.299 (TBF_CS_UL) - (TBF_CS_UL)
Parameter Name HMI Name TBF_CS_UL
Logical Name TBF_CS_UL
Definition Threshold defining the maximum number of consecutive times the

network receives an invalid UL RLC data block or nothing from
the MS having a monoslot GPRS TBF before changing the coding
scheme to CS1. For a multislot GPRS TBF, TBF_CS_UL_limit :=
TBF_CS_UL x n_allocated
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 64 32
1150 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.300 (TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD) - (TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD)
Parameter Name HMI Name TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD
Logical Name TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD
Definition Defines the window size required to estimate the CS3 BLER. The
window size is expressed as a number of DL RLC data blocks.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 512 32
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1151 / 1278

6.2.301 (TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD) - (TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD)
Parameter Name HMI Name TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD
Logical Name TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD
Definition Defines the window size required to estimate the CS4 BLER. The
window size is expressed as a number of DL RLC data blocks.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 512 32
1152 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.302 (TBF_DL_INIT_CS) - (TBF_DL_INIT_CS)
Parameter Name HMI Name TBF_DL_INIT_CS
Logical Name TBF_DL_INIT_CS
Definition Value of the downlink coding scheme when the link adaptation
algorithm is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or in case
of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the
downlink coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is
enabled.
Coding rules 0 : CS1, 1 : CS2, 2 : CS3, 3 : CS4
Mandatory rules TBF_DL_INIT_CS <= MAX_GPRS_CS

TBF_UL_INIT_CS].
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 4 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1153 / 1278

6.2.303 (TBF_MCS_DL) - (TBF_MCS_DL)
Parameter Name HMI Name TBF_MCS_DL
Logical Name TBF_MCS_DL
Definition Threshold defining the number of consecutive EGPRS PACKET

DOWNLINK ACK/NACK not received above which the MCS of a DL
acknowledged or unacknowledged DL TBF is changed to MCS-1.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 15 12
External Comment If the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis terrestrial link and Ater
terrestrial link, in case where EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT < TBF_MCS_DL
then the loss of consecutive EGPRS Packet DL ACK/NACK will not
trigger link adaptation but TBF release.
If the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis satellitel link or Ater
satellite link, in case where EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE
< TBF_MCS_DL then the loss of consecutive EGPRS Packet DL
ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release.
1154 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.304 (TBF_MCS_UL) - (TBF_MCS_UL)
Parameter Name HMI Name TBF_MCS_UL
Logical Name TBF_MCS_UL
Definition Threshold defining the maximum number of consecutive times the

network receives an invalid UL RLC data block or nothing from the
MS having a monoslot EGPRS TBF before changing the coding
scheme to MCS1. For a multislot EGPRS TBF, TBF_MCS_UL_limit
:= TBF_MCS_UL x n_allocated_timeslots.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 192 32
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1155 / 1278

6.2.305 (TBF_UL_INIT_CS) - (TBF_UL_INIT_CS)
Parameter Name HMI Name TBF_UL_INIT_CS
Logical Name TBF_UL_INIT_CS
Definition Value of the uplink coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm
is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or in case of TBF
resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the uplink
coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is enabled.
Coding rules 0 : CS1, 1 : CS2, 2 : CS3, 3 : CS4
Mandatory rules TBF_UL_INIT_CS <= MAX_GPRS_CS

TBF_UL_INIT_CS].
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 4 2
External Comment Exception cases apply for uplink TBF establishment on PACCH when
link adaptation is enabled.
1156 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.306 (THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING) - (THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING)
Parameter Name HMI Name THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING
Logical Name THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING
Definition Threshold above which the load of the serving cell is considered in a
high load situation in the NC2 cell ranking process
Coding rules Step size of 10%

0 : 0%; 1: 10%; .... 10 : 100%
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 100 0
External Comment This parameter is only relevant if the parameter

NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "2: NC2 mode
of operation for R99 onwards MS" or "3: NC2 mode of operation for
all MS".
The serving cell is considered in a low load situation when

THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING = 0 %. The value of 0 % deactivates
the load evaluation in the serving cell.
The load situation of external cells is unknown in the serving cell.

The BSS then computes the NC2 load of those cells as follows:
- If the threshold THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING is set to a value lower
than 100 %, then the cell is considered in a low load situation.
- If the threshold THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING is set to 100 %, then
the cell is considered in an high load situation
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1157 / 1278

6.2.307 (TOM8_PRIORITY) - (TOM8_PRIORITY)
Parameter Name HMI Name TOM8_PRIORITY
Logical Name TOM8_PRIORITY
Definition Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined TOM8 Packet
Flow Context
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 4 15 15
1158 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.308 (TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR)
Parameter Name HMI Name TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR
Logical Name TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR
Definition Threshold below which the TBF is released because of a bad

transmission efficiency in acknowledged mode.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
% 0 100 10
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1159 / 1278

6.2.309 (TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR)
Parameter Name HMI Name TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR
Logical Name TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR
Definition Threshold below which the TBF is released because of a bad

transmission efficiency in unacknowledged mode.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
% 0 100 15
1160 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.310 (TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD)
Parameter Name HMI Name TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD
Logical Name TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD
Definition Number of received RLC data blocks for GPRS TBF after which
TX_EFFICIENCY is computed.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 500 200
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1161 / 1278

6.2.311 (TX_INT) - (TX_INT)
Parameter Name HMI Name TX_INT
Logical Name TX_INT
Definition Number of PRACH timeslots to spread transmission of PACKET

CHANNEL REQUEST.
Coding rules Possible values are : 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25,
32, 50, coded from 0000 to 1111
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules It is recommended to set TX_INT so that the corresponding

spreading time is about 240 ms.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 2 50 8
1162 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.312 (TX_INTEGER) - (Tx_integer (MFS))
Parameter Name HMI Name TX_INTEGER
Logical Name Tx_integer (MFS)
Definition Number of RACH timeslots that spread transmission of CHANNEL

REQUEST.
Coding rules Possible values are:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32,
50 respectively binary coded from 0000 to 1111
Mandatory rules Equal to Tx_Integer (BSC)
Recommended rules When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater terrestrial links, it
is recommended to set:
=0
TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1.
When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater satellite links, it is

recommended to set:
TX_INTEGER = 32 whatever the configuration of the CCCH.
The number of slots belonging to the MS’s RACH between 2

successive Channel Request messages is a random value drawn
randomly for each new retransmission with uniform distribution in the
set (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1). With T = Tx_Integer and S depending on the
CCCH configuration as shown below:
1) for non combined CCCH:

Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 –> S = 217 RACH frames (i.e. 998.2 ms)
2) for combined CCCH:

Note:
- In the non-combined CCCH configuration, there are 51 RACH
frames per 51-multiframe
- In the combined CCCH configuration, there are 27 RACH frames
per 51-multiframe.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1163 / 1278

Instance cell
None 3 50 32
External Comment When EN_GPRS=1, it is recommended to set:

=0
TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1
1164 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.313 (Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject) - (WI_PR)
Parameter Name HMI Name Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject
Logical Name WI_PR
Definition Wait indication used in IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT

or PACKET ACCESS REJECT in the nominal case (see the
WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD parameter for the particular cases).
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules WI_PR <= WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
sec 0 255 3
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1165 / 1278

6.2.314 (Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject when CPU overload)
- (WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD)
Parameter Name HMI Name Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject when
CPU overload
Logical Name WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD
Definition Wait indication used in IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT or

PACKET ACCESS REJECT in case of PPC CPU or memory
overload.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules WI_PR <= WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
sec 0 255 10
1166 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6.2.315 (Weight_P10) - (Weight_P10)
Parameter Name HMI Name Weight_P10
Logical Name Weight_P10
Definition Weight to be used for a TBF/PFC of priority 10
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules weight_Px >= weight_Py if x<y
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 15 6
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1167 / 1278

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 15 5
1168 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 15 4
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1169 / 1278

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 15 3
1170 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 15 2
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1171 / 1278

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 15 1
1172 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 15 12
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1173 / 1278

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 15 11
1174 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 15 10
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1175 / 1278

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 15 9
1176 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 15 8
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1177 / 1278

Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 15 7
1178 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

7 E-GPRS Telecom Parameters
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1179 / 1278

7.1 Network (CDE)

7.1.1 (EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS) - (EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS
Logical Name EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS
Definition This flag enables / disables downlink retransmission in the BTS.
Mandatory rules –
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 0 1 1
External Comment DL retransmission in the BTS will be disabled by the MFS in the
cells having an Abis or an Ater satellite link (whatever the TRE type).
In a cell with terrestrial Abis and Ater links, this feature is disabled
for G3 TREs only.
1180 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

7.1.2 (MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN) - (MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN)
Parameter Name HMI Name MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN
Logical Name MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN
Definition Minimum throughput gain required to be provided to the MS when

performing a T2 or T3 TBF reallocation.
Coding rules step size = 0,1
Mandatory rules –
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 0,1 5 0,3
External Comment Increasing the value of this parameter above 0,3 might block some
reallocations for mobiles having a high multislot class (multislot class
>= 30).
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1181 / 1278

7.1.3 (N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS) - (N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS)
Parameter Name HMI Name N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS
Logical Name N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS
Definition Two definitions are possible :

- If EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = "enabled" : number of
GCHs required to be established due to the "Fast Initial PS Access"
feature,
- If EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = "disabled" : number of
GCHs to keep established when there is no more (E)GPRS traffic in
a cell (while the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer is running). Those
GCHs will be useful in case of (E)GPRS traffic resumption in the cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance MFS
None 1 5 1
1182 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

7.2 Site (CAE)

7.2.1 (ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION) -
(ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION)
Parameter Name HMI Name ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION
Logical Name ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION
Definition Allows EDA operations for mobile stations in DTM mode.
Coding rules 0: the usage of EDA for mobile stations in DTM mode is not allowed,
1: the usage of EDA for mobile stations in DTM mode is allowed.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
External Comment This flag is relevant only if DTM and EDA are both activated.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1183 / 1278

7.2.2 (BEP_PERIOD) - (BEP_PERIOD)
Parameter Name HMI Name BEP_PERIOD
Logical Name BEP_PERIOD
Definition Filter constant for EGPRS channel quality measurements.
Coding rules coded on 4 bits as follows:

0: 1
1: 2
2: 3
3: 4
4: 5
5: 7
6: 10
7: 12
8: 15
9: 20
10: 25
11: Reserved for future use
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 25 10
External Comment The BEP_PERIOD parameter defines the forgetting factor used in
the MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP averaging at the MS side.
In case of cell without frequency hopping and without "fast" mobiles
(i.e. not motorway or TGV coverage), it is advised to set a higher
value (e.g. 25) in order to avoid spurious MCS changes causing
higher BLER and throughput loss.
1184 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

7.2.3 (E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD) - (E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD)
Parameter Name HMI Name E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD
Logical Name E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD
Definition Number of received radio blocks for an EGPRS TBF after which
E_TX_EFFICIENCY is computed.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 500 200
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1185 / 1278

7.2.4 (EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL) - (EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL)
Parameter Name HMI Name EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL
Logical Name EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL
Definition Activation level of Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).
Coding rules 0: EDA activated for all mobile stations (supporting the feature),
1: EDA activated for R’99-onwards mobile stations (supporting the
feature),
2: EDA activated for Rel-4-onwards mobile stations (supporting the
feature).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 2 0
External Comment -This parameter is relevant only if EDA is activated (EN_EDA

parameter).
-The activation level may provide an artificial mean to limit the
inter-operability risks due to mobile stations with uncorrected EDA
implementation (EDA is a R’97 feature but has been completely
clarified in Rel-6).
- R’99 is detected through the Revision Level Indicator.
- A mobile station is considered as Rel4-onwards compliant if it
indicates the field "GERAN Feature Package 1" in its MS Radio
Access Capability.
1186 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

7.2.5 (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT) - (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT)
Parameter Name HMI Name EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT
Logical Name EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT
Definition For a DL EGPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis
terrestrial link and Ater terrestrial link, this parameter defines the
maximum number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet
Control Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 32 20
External Comment If EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT < TBF_MCS_DL then the loss of

consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but
TBF release. EGPRS_N3105_Limit has to be set in order not to
release a DL TBF in case of transient bad radio conditions.The polling
frequency depends on Ack_factor, T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport, MS
multislot class and on the number of TBFs per PDCH.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1187 / 1278

7.2.6 (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE) -
(EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE)
Parameter Name HMI Name EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE
Logical Name EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE
Definition For a DL EGPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis
satellite link or Ater satellite link, this parameter defines the maximum
number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet Control
Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 32 24
External Comment If EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_MCS_DL then the

loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link
adaptation but TBF release. EGPRS_N3105_Limit_Satellite has
to be set in order not to release a DL TBF in case of transient bad
radio conditions.The polling frequency depends on Ack_factor,
T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot class and on the number
of TBFs per PDCH.
1188 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

7.2.7 (EN_EDA) - (EN_EDA)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_EDA
Logical Name EN_EDA
Definition Enables Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).
Coding rules 0: EDA not activated,

1: EDA activated
Mandatory rules EN_EDA = 0 in case of extended cell
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment When EDA is activated, its activation domain is

given by the EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL and
ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION parameters.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1189 / 1278

7.2.8 (EN_IR_UL) - (EN_IR_UL_per_cell)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_IR_UL
Logical Name EN_IR_UL_per_cell
Definition Enables/Disables Incremental redundancy for the uplink TBF in the

BSS.
Coding rules 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Among the features Incremental Redundancy in

uplink (EN_IR_UL) and RLC resegmentation in uplink
(EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL_per_cell), Alcatel recommends to
enable first the Incremental Redundancy in Uplink. The activation
of both at the same time may reduce the gain of the Incremental
Redundancy
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment The Incremental Redundancy for the uplink TBF feature is supported
only from G4 onwards BTSs.
1190 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

7.2.9 (EN_MCS1_in_CRP) - (EN_MCS1_in_CRP)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_MCS1_in_CRP
Logical Name EN_MCS1_in_CRP
Definition Enables the forced usage of MCS-1 for uplink EGPRS TBF in
contention resolution phase at one-phase access to make this phase
more robust.
Coding rules 0: the BSS does not force uplink EGPRS TBF to use MCS-1 during
the contention resolution phase at one-phase access.
1: the BSS forces uplink EGPRS TBF to use MCS-1 during the
contention resolution phase at one-phase access.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 1
External Comment The forced usage of MCS-1 for uplink EGPRS TBF in contention
resolution phase at one-phase access corresponds to the behaviour
in B9.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1191 / 1278

7.2.10 (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL) -
(EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL_per_cell)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL
Logical Name EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL_per_cell
Definition Enables/Disables the resegmentation for the uplink TBF in the cell, in
case of RLC in acknowledged mode.
Coding rules 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Among the features Incremental Redundancy in uplink (EN_IR_UL)

and RLC resegmentation in uplink (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL),
Alcatel recommends to enable first the Incremental Redundancy in
Uplink. The activation of both at the same time may reduce the gain
of the Incremental Redundancy
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
1192 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

7.2.11 (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS) -
(INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS)
Parameter Name HMI Name INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS
Logical Name INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS
Definition Number of PDCHs on which MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL

and MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL are targeted when
establishing GCHs for an EGPRS TBF associated to a "short data"
MS transfer.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 8 3

TBF are not disrupted. Change applied on current TBF and new
TBF established after modification
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1193 / 1278

7.2.12 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL) -
(MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL
Logical Name MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL
Definition Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for the DL EGPRS
TBFs associated to a "short data" MS transfer.
Coding rules 1: MCS-1 coded as 0

2: MCS-2 coded as 1
3: MCS-3 coded as 2
4: MCS-4 coded as 3
5: MCS-5 coded as 4
6: MCS-6 coded as 5
7: MCS-7 coded as 6
8: MCS-8 coded as 7
9: MCS-9 coded as 8
Mandatory rules –

that MAX [MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL,
MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN
[TBF_DL_INIT_MCS, TBF_UL_INIT_MCS].
MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 9 1

- Setting this parameter to MCS-2 might introduce some problems
(because a MCS-2 block consumes exactly 1.00 GCH and might
therefore block some of the MFS-BTS signalling messages to be
sent in the M-EGCH link in DL).
- If MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL is strictly higher than
MAX_EGPRS_MCS, then MAX_EGPRS_MCS is used instead.
1194 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1195 / 1278

7.2.13 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL) -
(MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL
Logical Name MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL
Definition Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for the UL EGPRS
TBFs associated to a "short data" MS transfer.
Coding rules 1: MCS-1 coded as 0

2: MCS-2 coded as 1
3: MCS-3 coded as 2
4: MCS-4 coded as 3
5: MCS-5 coded as 4
6: MCS-6 coded as 5
7: MCS-7 coded as 6
8: MCS-8 coded as 7
9: MCS-9 coded as 8
Mandatory rules –

Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 9 2

- If MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL is strictly higher than
MAX_EGPRS_MCS, then MAX_EGPRS_MCS is used instead.
1196 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

7.2.14 (MCS_AVG_PERIOD) - (MCS_AVG_PERIOD)
Parameter Name HMI Name MCS_AVG_PERIOD
Logical Name MCS_AVG_PERIOD
Definition Filtering period used for calculation of the forgetting factor applied to
the current UL MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP samples in the averaging
Modulation and Coding Scheme adaptation filter
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
sec 0.02 5 0.1
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1197 / 1278

7.2.15 (N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU) - (N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU)
Parameter Name HMI Name N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU
Logical Name N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU
Definition Number of free 64k Ater TSs that are kept "in reserve" in order to
be able to serve some prioritary requests in cells managed by the
GPU. The prioritary requests are the GCH establishment requests
launched when the first TBF has to be established in a cell (useful to
guarantee that MM traffic will be supported in any cell at any time).
In case N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU = 0, then no Ater margin is

managed.
In case N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU > 0, RRM will ensure that
N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU 64k Ater TSs are always free (i.e. not
used by a GCH in the GPU). From then on, only prioritary requests
will be allowed to establish some GCHs with those Ater resources.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 0 10 2

- Increasing the value of N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU will make the
average number of unused Ater nibbles in the GPU increase. That
corresponds to a loss of Ater resources on the field, as the on-going
TBF traffic will never "benefit from the margin of Ater resources". But,
on the other hand, the likelihood of not serving a prioritary request in
the GPU will be become very low.
- Decreasing the value of N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU (to a non
null value) will make it possible that prioritary requests cannot be
served in case several such requests have to be served in a short
period of time (i.e. before having had the time to "fill the Ater margin"
up again), especially if the requests have to be served on several
different DSPs (one 64k Ater TS will be consumed by each DSP).
- Setting N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU to 0 will make it possible the
cases where prioritary requests cannot be served at all.
1198 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

7.2.16 (N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA) - (N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA)
Parameter Name HMI Name N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA
Logical Name N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA
Definition Minimum number of consecutive significantly-uplink biases observed

during a transfer to allow a mobile station to use Extended Dynamic
Allocation.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance BSS
None 1 64 1
External Comment This parameter can allow using EDA only in case of big UL transfers
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1199 / 1278

7.2.17 (T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport) - (T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport
Logical Name T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport
Definition Time period to request for an EGPRS Packet Downlink Ack/Nack

with measurements.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
ms 60 3000 200
1200 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

7.2.18 (TBF_DL_INIT_MCS) - (TBF_DL_INIT_MCS)
Parameter Name HMI Name TBF_DL_INIT_MCS
Logical Name TBF_DL_INIT_MCS
Definition Value of the downlink modulation and coding scheme when the link
adaptation algorithm is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or in
case of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the
downlink modulation and coding scheme when the link adaptation
algorithm is enabled.
Coding rules 0: MCS-1

1: MCS-2
2: MCS-3
3: MCS-4
4: MCS-5
5: MCS-6
6: MCS-7
7: MCS-8
8: MCS-9
Mandatory rules TBF_DL_INIT_MCS <= MAX_EGPRS_MCS

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 9 3
External Comment The parameter is significant only if EN_EGPRS is enabled
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1201 / 1278

7.2.19 (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS) - (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS)
Parameter Name HMI Name TBF_UL_INIT_MCS
Logical Name TBF_UL_INIT_MCS
Definition Value of the uplink modulation and coding scheme when the link
adaptation algorithm is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or
in case of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of
the uplink modulation and coding scheme when the link adaptation
algorithm is enabled.
Coding rules 0: MCS-1

1: MCS-2
2: MCS-3
3: MCS-4
4: MCS-5
5: MCS-6
6: MCS-7
7: MCS-8
8: MCS-9
Mandatory rules TBF_UL_INIT_MCS <= MAX_EGPRS_MCS

Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
None 1 9 3
External Comment The parameter is significant only if EN_EGPRS is enabled. Exception

cases apply for uplink TBF establishment on PACCH when link
adaptation is enabled.
1202 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

8 DTM Telecom Parameters
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1203 / 1278

8.1 Site (CAE)

8.1.1 (EN_DTM) - (EN_DTM)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_DTM
Logical Name EN_DTM
Definition Enables/disables the support of dual transfer mode
Mandatory rules EN_DTM may be set to 1 only if :

-CELL_RANGE = 0
-MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 1
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment ((E)GPRS is mandatory for DTM operation, and at least 2 PDCHs
are required in the PS zone for allocation of DTM resources to (at
least) one DTM call, therefore, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD shall at
least be equal to 2.
1204 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

8.1.2 (MAX_LAPDM) - (MAX_LAPDM)
Parameter Name HMI Name MAX_LAPDM
Logical Name MAX_LAPDM
Definition Maximum number of LAPDm frames on which a layer 3 can be

segmented into and be sent on the main DCCH.
Coding rules Coded on 3 bits:

000 : 5
001 : 6
....
111 : 12
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 5 12 7
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1205 / 1278

8.1.3 (N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30) - (N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30)
Parameter Name HMI Name N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30
Logical Name N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30
Definition Number of TCH usage information update periods to be waited by

the BSC before moving the TCH of a DTM capable MS from the PS
zone to the CS zone (intracell handover cause 30).
"zero" means that the feature "avoid ping-pong between CS and PS
zones for DTM MS" is not activated.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 10 0
External Comment - Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change

applied on the handovers cause 30 detected after the modification
(didn’t apply on running timers).
- Function available on BSC Evolution only.
- the delay applied by the BSC is between
N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30 * TCH_INFO_PERIOD and
(N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30 + 1) * TCH_INFO_PERIOD
1206 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

9 2G-LTE Telecom Parameters
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1207 / 1278

9.1 Site (CAE)

9.1.1 (CI_LTE) - (CI_LTE)
Parameter Name HMI Name CI_LTE
Logical Name CI_LTE
Definition This parameter indicates the Cell Identifier of an external LTE (FDD
or TDD) cell as defined in 3GPP TS 36.300.
Coding rules Binary value on 28 bits is expanded to 32 bits (with the four Most
Significant Bits set to "1").
Mandatory rules (MCC_LTE, MNC_LTE and CI_LTE) shall together uniquely identify a
LTE cell inside the OMC
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance LTE cell
None 0 268435455 None
External Comment - The CI_LTE is equivalent to the long/standard eNode-B Id.

- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.
1208 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

9.1.2 (DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G) - (DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G)
Parameter Name HMI Name DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G
Logical Name DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G
Definition Default priority associated to any UARFCN not explicitely

broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable
MS/UE.

"0" is the lowest priority,
"7" the highest
Mandatory rules The DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G of a given BSS shall be different from

any priority (GERAN_PRIORITY) of its related 2G cells (which has at
least one neighbour 3G or LTE cell for reselection), and different from
any priority (PRIORITY_3G and PRIORITY_LTE) of all those target
neighbour 3G and LTE cells for reselection.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 0 7 3

- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going
traffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts System
Information Broadcasting. Change applied immediately after
modification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicated
Packet Measurement Order messages of the current calls.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1209 / 1278

9.1.3 (DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G) - (DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G)
Parameter Name HMI Name DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G
Logical Name DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G
Definition Default minimum received level associated to any UARFCN not

explicitly broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a
LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules Coded_value = (dBm + 119) / 2, step size = 2 dBm
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
dBm -119 -57 -119

1210 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

9.1.4 (DEFAULT_THRESH_3G) - (DEFAULT_THRESH_3G)
Parameter Name HMI Name DEFAULT_THRESH_3G
Logical Name DEFAULT_THRESH_3G
Definition Default threshold associated to any UARFCN not explicitly

MS/UE.
Coding rules Coded_value = dB / 2, step size = 2 dB
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
dB 0 62 30

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1211 / 1278

9.1.5 (EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION) -
(EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION
Logical Name EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION
Definition Enables/Disables the GSM to E-UTRAN FDD cell reselection and

defines the LTE search activation mode for MS in GMM Ready state.
The adjacent EUARFCNs can be configured at LTE cell level only
(ARFCN_LTE).
Those EUARFCNs are used in the "blind" search method.
Coding rules 0: Disabled,

1: Enabled with LTE search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM
ready state,
2: Enabled with LTE search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMM
ready state,
3: Enabled with LTE search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM
ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1,
4: Enabled with LTE search activated with flexible priority while the
UE/MS is in GMM ready state.
Mandatory rules - Configuration of FDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-working

are exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same
time a valid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell
for which (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)
and (EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 or
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0).
- EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>
disabled at the same time.
- EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>
- It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 2
and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 and
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION = 0.
- It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 3 only if
(EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or
(EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)
- It is not allowed to have
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 if the cell is
owned by a BSC connected to a legacy MFS.
- if both EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, then
they shall have the same value.
Recommended rules Value 3 should be used only in case of good LTE FDD coverage.
Category Site (CAE)
1212 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Type Enumerated
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 4 0
External Comment - If EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION < 3, and If the

NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of operation
for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel4 onwards
MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS", the LTE search is
systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode through
the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message. This LTE search
deactivation is then performed independently of the value of the
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION parameter.
Channel Release and Packet Measurement Order messages of the
current calls.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1213 / 1278

9.1.6 (EUARFCN) - (ARFCN_LTE(FDD))
Parameter Name HMI Name EUARFCN
Logical Name ARFCN_LTE(FDD)
Definition Downlink FDD E-UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel

Number (EUARFCN) of an external LTE FDD cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules Only the following downlink EUARFCN ranges are standardized for
FDD:
I) 0 599 and
II) 600 1199 and
III) 1200 1949 and
IV) 1950 2399 and
V) 2400 2649 and
VI) 2650 - 2749 and
VII) 2750 - 3449 and
VIII) 3450 - 3799 and
IX) 3800 4149 and
X) 4150 4749 and
XI) 4750 4999 and
XII) 5000 5179 and
XIII) 5180 5279 and
XIV) 5280 5379 and
XVII) 5730 - 5849
- For a given 2G cell, there shall be no more than 8 distinct

ARFCN_LTE(FDD) among all the neighbour LTE FDD cells target
for reselection.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance LTE cell
None 0 65535 None
1214 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

External Comment - Significant if RAT_LTE is FDD

- The FDD EUARFCNs are used on the Air interface.
- The FDD EUARFCNs of the LTE neighbour cells configured for
reselection are broadcast on BCCH.
current calls.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1215 / 1278

9.1.7 (GERAN_PRIORITY) - (GERAN_PRIORITY)
Parameter Name HMI Name GERAN_PRIORITY
Logical Name GERAN_PRIORITY
Definition Gives the priority for the serving cell. Used for cell reselection by a
LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules step size = 1,

"0" is the lowest priority, "7" the highest
Mandatory rules When a given serving 2G cell has at least one neighbour 3G or
LTE cell for reselection, then GERAN_PRIORITY shall be different
from any priority (PRIORITY_3G and PRIORITY_LTE) of its
neighbour 3G and LTE cells for reselection, and different from the
DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G of its BSS.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 7 0

1216 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

9.1.8 (H_PRIO) - (H_PRIO)
Parameter Name HMI Name H_PRIO
Logical Name H_PRIO
Definition Hysteresis used in the priority reselection algorithm by a LTE-capable

MS/UE.

Coded value (decimal): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC
0: 6: Rule disabled
1: 5: 5 dB
2: 4: 4 dB
3: 3: 3 dB
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
dB 3 6 6

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1217 / 1278

9.1.9 (MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH) - (MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH)
Parameter Name HMI Name MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH
Logical Name MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH
Definition Number of resources blocks (NRB) over which an MS/UE

LTE-capable could measure.
Coding rules 0 (coded) = 6

1 (coded) = 15
2 (coded) = 25
3 (coded) = 50
4 (coded) = 75
5 (coded) = 100
Mandatory rules All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTE
shall be given the same MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH value (to
be checked on a per RAT basis).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem BSC
Instance LTE cell
None 6 100 6

1218 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

9.1.10 (Mobile Country Code (MCC) for LTE cell) - (MCC_LTE)
Parameter Name HMI Name Mobile Country Code (MCC) for LTE cell
Logical Name MCC_LTE
Definition Mobile Country Code of a neighbour external LTE (FDD or TDD) cell
of the own or of a foreign PLMN.
Mandatory rules - The MCC_LTE is computed by the OMC-R as a function of the

PLMN id selected by the operator in the set of own or foreign PLMNs
- (MCC_LTE, MNC_LTE, CI_LTE) shall together uniquely identify a
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance LTE cell
None 0 999 None
External Comment - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1219 / 1278

9.1.11 (Mobile Network Code (MNC) for LTE cell) - (MNC_LTE)
Parameter Name HMI Name Mobile Network Code (MNC) for LTE cell
Logical Name MNC_LTE
Definition Mobile Network Code of a neighbour external LTE (FDD or TDD) cell
of the own PLMN or of a foreign PLMN.
Mandatory rules - The MNC_LTE is computed by the OMC-R as a function of the

PLMN id selected by the operator in the set of own or foreign PLMNs.
- (MCC_LTE, MNC_LTE, CI_LTE) shall together uniquely identify a
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance LTE cell
None 0 999 None
External Comment - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only

- The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC in the CDE table.
binary coded 1111)
1220 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

9.1.12 (PRIORITY_3G) - (PRIORITY_3G)
Parameter Name HMI Name PRIORITY_3G
Logical Name PRIORITY_3G
Definition Priority associated to a given UARFCN explicitly broadcasted by the

BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.

"0" is the lowest priority, "7" the highest.
Mandatory rules - All 3G cells managed by the OMC (and neighbour to a BSC
Evolution) having the same ARFCN_3G shall be given the same
PRIORITY_3G value (to be checked on a per RAT basis).
- The PRIORITY_3G of a given 3G cell, neighbour for reselection to
one/several 2G serving cell(s) S, shall be different from any priority
(GERAN_PRIORITY) of the cell(s) S, and different from any priority
(DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G) of the BSS(s) owning the cell(s) S, and
different from any priority (PRIORITY_LTE) of the LTE cell(s) (if any)
neighbour for reselection to the cell(s) S.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance 3G cell
None 0 7 4

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1221 / 1278

9.1.13 (PRIORITY_LTE) - (PRIORITY_LTE)
Parameter Name HMI Name PRIORITY_LTE
Logical Name PRIORITY_LTE
Definition Priority associated to a given EUARFCN explicitly broadcasted by

the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.

"0" is the lowest priority, "7" the highest.
Mandatory rules - All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTE
shall be given the same PRIORITY_LTE value (to be checked on a
per RAT basis).
- The PRIORITY_LTE of a given LTE cell, neighbour for reselection
to one/several 2G serving cell(s) S, shall be different from any priority
(GERAN_PRIORITY) of the cell(s) S, and different from any priority
(DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G) of the BSS(s) owning the cell(s) S, and
different from any priority (PRIORITY_3G) of the 3G cell(s) (if any)
neighbour for reselection to the cell(s) S.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance LTE cell
None 0 7 7

1222 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

9.1.14 (QRXLEVMIN_3G) - (QRXLEVMIN_3G)
Parameter Name HMI Name QRXLEVMIN_3G
Logical Name QRXLEVMIN_3G
Definition Minimum received level required for a given UARFCN broadcasted

by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.
Mandatory rules All 3G cells managed by the OMC (and neighbour to a BSC
QRXLEVMIN_3G value (to be checked on a per RAT basis).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance 3G cell
dBm -119 -57 -119

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1223 / 1278

9.1.15 (QRXLEVMIN_LTE) - (QRXLEVMIN_LTE)
Parameter Name HMI Name QRXLEVMIN_LTE
Logical Name QRXLEVMIN_LTE
Definition Minimum received level required for a given EUARFCN broadcasted

Mandatory rules All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTE
shall be given the same QRXLEVMIN_LTE value (to be checked
on a per RAT basis).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance LTE cell
dBm -140 -78 -140

1224 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

9.1.16 (Qsearch_P_LTE) - (Qsearch_P_LTE)
Parameter Name HMI Name Qsearch_P_LTE
Logical Name Qsearch_P_LTE
Definition Threshold for searching for LTE cells in GPRS depending whether
the received level average of the serving cell is below or above the
threshold.
Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules Coded value (binary): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC
0: -98: -98 dBm (below)
1: -94: -94 dBm (below)
2: -90: -90dBm (below)
3: -86: -86dBm (below)
4: -82: -82 dBm (below)
5: -78: -78 dBm (below)
6: -74: -74 dBm (below)
7: -70: Always search for LTE neighbour cells
8: -78: -78 dBm (above)
9: -74: -74 dBm (above)
10: -70: -70 dBm (above)
11: -66: -66 dBm (above)
12: -62: -62 dBm (above)
13: -58: -58 dBm (above)
14: -54: -54 dBm (above)
15: -50: Never search for LTE neighbour cells
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -98 -50 -50

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1225 / 1278

9.1.17 (RAT_LTE) - (RAT_LTE)
Parameter Name HMI Name RAT_LTE
Logical Name RAT_LTE
Definition This parameter defines the radio access technology of an external

LTE cell.
Coding rules 0: FDD

1: TDD
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem BSC
Instance LTE cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.
1226 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

9.1.18 (T_RESELECTION) - (T_RESELECTION)
Parameter Name HMI Name T_RESELECTION
Logical Name T_RESELECTION
Definition Period during which the cell reselection criteria of the priority
algorithm must be verified to allow the cell reselection; used by a
LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules Coded_value = (sec / 5) - 1, step size = 5
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
sec 5 20 5

traffic is not disrupted
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1227 / 1278

9.1.19 (THRESH_2G_LOW) - (THRESH_2G_LOW)
Parameter Name HMI Name THRESH_2G_LOW
Logical Name THRESH_2G_LOW
Definition Gives the threshold of the GSM serving cell (and all measured
GSM cells). Used in the priority algorithm for cell reselection by a
LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules step size = 2 dB

Coded value (decimal): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC
0: 0: 0 dB
1: 2: 2 dB
2: 4: 4 dB
3: 6: 6 dB
4: 8: 8 dB
5: 10: 10 dB
6: 12: 12 dB
7: 14: 14 dB
8: 16: 16 dB
9: 18: 18 dB
10: 20: 20 dB
11: 22: 22 dB
12: 24: 24 dB
13: 26: 26 dB
14: 28: 28 dB
15: 30: always select a LTE cell is possible
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 30 30

1228 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

9.1.20 (THRESH_3G_HIGH) - (THRESH_3G_HIGH)
Parameter Name HMI Name THRESH_3G_HIGH
Logical Name THRESH_3G_HIGH
Definition Threshold (high) associated to a given UARFCN explicitly

MS/UE.
Coding rules Coded_value = dB / 2, step size = 2
THRESH_3G_HIGH value (to be checked on a per RAT basis).
- THRESH_3G_LOW <= THRESH_3G_HIGH
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance 3G cell
dB 0 62 30

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1229 / 1278

9.1.21 (THRESH_3G_LOW) - (THRESH_3G_LOW)
Parameter Name HMI Name THRESH_3G_LOW
Logical Name THRESH_3G_LOW
Definition Threshold (low) associated to a given UARFCN explicitly broadcasted

Coding rules Coded_value = dB / 2, step size = 2
THRESH_3G_LOW value (to be checked at Network level and on a
per RAT basis).
- THRESH_3G_LOW <= THRESH_3G_HIGH
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance 3G cell
dB 0 62 30

1230 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

9.1.22 (THRESH_LTE_HIGH) - (THRESH_LTE_HIGH)
Parameter Name HMI Name THRESH_LTE_HIGH
Logical Name THRESH_LTE_HIGH
Definition Threshold (high) associated to a given EUARFCN explicitly

MS/UE.
shall be given the same THRESH_LTE_HIGH value (to be checked
- THRESH_LTE_LOW <= THRESH_LTE_HIGH
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance LTE cell
dB 0 62 30

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1231 / 1278

9.1.23 (THRESH_LTE_LOW) - (THRESH_LTE_LOW)
Parameter Name HMI Name THRESH_LTE_LOW
Logical Name THRESH_LTE_LOW
Definition Threshold (low) associated to a given EUARFCN explicitly

MS/UE.
shall be given the same THRESH_LTE_LOW value (to be checked
- THRESH_LTE_LOW <= THRESH_LTE_HIGH
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance LTE cell
dB 0 62 30

1232 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

9.1.24 (THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH) - (THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH)
Parameter Name HMI Name THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH
Logical Name THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH
Definition Threshold for the serving cell that controls inter-RAT measurements.
Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules step size = 3 dBm

Coded value (decimal): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC
0: -98: -98 dBm
1: -95: -95 dBm
2: -92: -92 dBm
3: -89: -89 dBm
4: -86: -86 dBm
5: -83: -83 dBm
6: -80: -80 dBm
7: -77: -77 dBm
8: -74: -74 dBm
9: -71: -71 dBm
10: -68: -68 dBm
11: -65: -65 dBm
12: -62: -62 dBm
13: -59: -59 dBm
14: -56: -56 dBm
15: -53: Always
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -98 -53 -53

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1233 / 1278

1234 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10 2G-3G Telecom Parameters
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1235 / 1278

10.1 Network (CDE)

10.1.1 (CGI_3G_REQUIRED) - (CGI_3G_REQD)
Parameter Name HMI Name CGI_3G_REQUIRED
Logical Name CGI_3G_REQD
Definition Controls the format of an external 3G cell identification, sent to the

MSC on the A interface for 2G to 3G handover.
Coding rules 0: CGI not used, 1: CGI used
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules Alcatel-Lucent recommend to set the CGI_3G_REQD parameter to 1

provided that the MSC supports the CGI format. The CGI_3G_REQD
parameter shall be set to 1 if the operator wants to allow inter-PLMN
2G to 3G handovers. If this parameter needs to be changed, it is
recommended to change it during a migration phase to avoid any
additional Telecom outage.
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
None 0 1 1
External Comment Depends on MSC Type. The value indicated here is for
1236 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2 Site (CAE)

10.2.1 (A_ECNO_HO) - (A_ECNO_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name A_ECNO_HO
Logical Name A_ECNO_HO
Definition Window size for Ec/No level averages for 2G to 3G handover
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
Samfr 1 31 8
Umbrella 8
Concentric 8
Microcell 4
Minicell 8
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1237 / 1278

10.2.2 (Cell Capacity Class) - (CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS)
Parameter Name HMI Name Cell Capacity Class
Logical Name CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS
Definition Capacity class of the cell, measured on a linear scale, ranging from 1
to 100.
Coding rules binary value on 8 bits
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules the Cell Capacity Class shall follow the recommended rule: "In order
to fulfill the 3GPP requirement of having a linear scale in the capacity
class, ranging from 1 to 100:
Cell Capacity Class is a linear function of the Cell capacity: value 1
shall indicate the minimum capacity class, and 100 shall indicate the
maximum capacity class. Capacity class should be measured on a
linear scale.
The default value of Cell Capacity Class should depend on the

number of available TCHs in the cell and since there may be up to
126 TCH channels in one GSM cell:
Cell_Capacity_Class = int{[(99/125) x (NTCH - 1)] + 1}
where NTCH is the number of all TCH channels in the Cell."
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 1 100 100
1238 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.3 (CI_3G) - (CI_3G)
Parameter Name HMI Name CI_3G
Logical Name CI_3G
Definition This parameter indicates the Cell Identifier of an external 3G (FDD

or TDD) cell as defined in 3GPP TS 25.401.
Coding rules Binary value on 16 bits
Mandatory rules (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall together

uniquely identify a 3G cell
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance 3G cell
None 0 65535 None
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1239 / 1278

10.2.4 (EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO) -
(EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO
Logical Name EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO
Definition Allows handovers towards 3G cells for a given MS when I.E. Service
Handover is missing and the load in the serving cell is high (see
THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ)
Coding rules 0 : disable, 1 : enable
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
1240 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.5 (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION) -
(EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION
Logical Name EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION
Definition Enables/Disables the GSM to UTRAN FDD cell reselections and

defines the 3G search activation mode for MS in GMM Ready state.
The adjacent UARFCNs can be configured either at BSS level
(FDD_ARFCN_LIST), or, exclusively, at 3G cell level (ARFCN_3G).
Those UARFCNs are used in the "blind" search method.
Coding rules 0: Disabled

1: Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM
ready state,
2: Enabled with 3G search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMM
ready state.
ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1.
4: Enabled with 3G search activated with flexible priority while the
Mandatory rules - EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION and

EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>
- FDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (FDD) are exclusive:
for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a
valid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where
EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, and having,
at least, one neighbour 3G FDD cell target for reselection (or both).
- Configuration of FDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-working
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, then
- It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION
= 1 and EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 and
EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0.
- It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION =
3 only if (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0
and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, then
Recommended rules Value 3 and 4 should be used only in case of good 3G FDD coverage.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1241 / 1278

Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 4 0
External Comment - If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of

operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for
all MS", then the 3G search is systematically deactivated when
activating the NC2 mode through the Packet Measurement Order
[NC2] message.
- If EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION = "Enabled with 3G
search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even if
Network_Control_Order > 1", then the 3G search is activated even
when activating the NC2 mode (the Packet Measurement Order
[NC2] message will not be sent).
current calls.
1242 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.6 (EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION) -
(EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION
Logical Name EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION
Definition Enables/Disables the GSM to UTRAN TD-SCDMA cell reselections

and defines the 3G search
activation mode for MS in GMM Ready state. The adjacent
UARFCNs can be configured
either at BSS level (TDD_ARFCN_LIST), or, exclusively, at 3G cell
level (ARFCN_3G).
Those UARFCNs are used in the "blind" search method.
Coding rules 0: Disabled

ready state,
2: Enabled with 3G search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMM
ready state.
ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1.
4: Enabled with 3G search activated with flexible priority while the
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1243 / 1278

Mandatory rules - EN_2G_3G_CELL_RESELECTION and

EN_2G_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>disabled at
the same time
- EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>
- TDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (TDD) are exclusive:
for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a valid
TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where
EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, and
having, at least, one neighbour 3G TDD cell target for reselection.
- Configuration of TDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-working
time a valid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell
where both EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled.
- if both EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, then
- It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION
- It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 3 only if
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or
- For a given 2G cell, where both
EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, if
FAKE_FDD_MANAGEMENT = 1 then there shall be no more
than 8 distinct ARFCN_3G (TDD) among all the neighbour 3G
TDD cells target for reselection and there shall be no more than 4
distinct ARFCN_LTE(TDD) among all the neighbour LTE TDD
cells target for reselection.
Recommended rules Value 3 and 4 should be used only in case of good 3G TDD coverage.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 4 0
1244 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

External Comment - If EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION < 3, and If the

NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of operation
for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel4 onwards
MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS", the 3G search is
systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode through
the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message. This 3G search
deactivation is then performed independently of the value of the
EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION parameter.
current calls.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1245 / 1278

10.2.7 (EN_3G_DIVERSITY) - (EN_3G_DIVERSITY(FDD))
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_3G_DIVERSITY
Logical Name EN_3G_DIVERSITY(FDD)
Definition This parameter indicates if diversity is applied for an external 3G

FDD cell.
Coding rules 1 bit:

0 diversity is not applied,
1 diversity is applied
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance 3G cell
None 0 1 0
External Comment - Significant only if RAT_3G is FDD.

- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on
going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately after
modification.
1246 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.8 (EN_3G_HO) - (EN_3G_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_3G_HO
Logical Name EN_3G_HO
Definition This flag enables/disables the 2G to 3G FDD handover.
Mandatory rules For Evolium serving cell :

Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1247 / 1278

10.2.9 (EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO) -
(EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO
Logical Name EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO
Definition Allows sending by the MS of Compressed Inter-RAT HO information
Coding rules 0 : disable, 1 : enable
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 0 1 0
External Comment Shall be set to 1 only if all RNCs neighbour to this BSS support the
feature.
1248 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.10 (EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION) -
(EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION
Logical Name EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION
Definition Defines the CPICH measurements used in the 2G to 3G cell

reselection
Coding rules 0: Only 1 CPICH measurement is used

1: CPICH Ec/No and RSCP measurements must be used
Mandatory rules This parameter can be set on 1 only if EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_

RESELECTION <>0
Category Site (CAE)
Type Flag
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 1 0
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1249 / 1278

10.2.11 (EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION) - (EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION)
Parameter Name HMI Name EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION
Logical Name EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION
Definition Enables a fast 3G/LTE (FDD or TDD) cell reselection at 2G CS call

release.
Coding rules 0:fast 3G/LTE cell reselection at 2G CS call release is not used.
1:only fast 3G cell reselection at 2G CS call release is used.
2:only fast LTE cell reselection at 2G CS call release is used.
3:fast LTE cell reselection at 2G CS call release is used, 3G
otherwise.
Mandatory rules - It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION

- It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION =
2 and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 and
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION = 0.
It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION =
3 only if (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0
and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)
or (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 3 0
External Comment - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going

modification in dedicated Channel Release messages of the current
calls.
1250 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.12 (FDD_ARFCN_LIST) - (FDD_ARFCN_LIST)
Parameter Name HMI Name FDD_ARFCN_LIST
Logical Name FDD_ARFCN_LIST
Definition List of neighbour Downlink FDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency

Channel Numbers (UARFCNs) of any 3G FDD neighbor cell,
adjacent to the BSS.
Up to 3 FDD UARFCNs can be defined in the list. This list is used for
2G to 3G cell reselection ("blind" search method).
Coding rules The value of -1 is for implementation purpose only; this dummy value
indicates that the operator does not provide any UARFCN.
Mandatory rules - The UARFCNs defined in the list (i.e. not set to -1) shall be different
from each other.
- Only the following downlink FDD UARFCN ranges are standardized:
I) 10562-10838 and
II) 9662-9938 and
III) 1162-1513 and
IV) 1537-1738 and
V) 4357-4458 and
VI) 4387-4413 and
VII) 2237- 2563 and
VIII) 2937-3088 and
IX) 9237-9387
X) 3112-3388
XI) 3712-3812
XII) 3837- 3903
XIII) 4017-4043
XIV) 4117-4143
- Configuration of FDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-working
Category Site (CAE)
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1251 / 1278

None 0 16383 None
External Comment - The FDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface.
- The FDD UARFCNs of the 3G neighbour cells are broadcast on
BCCH.
- Significant only if EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION is not
disabled
current calls.
1252 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.13 (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset) - (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset)
Parameter Name HMI Name FDD_GPRS_Qoffset
Logical Name FDD_GPRS_Qoffset
Definition Offset added to the received level average of the serving cell and of
the neighbour GSM cells
for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection in GPRS
Coding rules Coded value (binary): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC
0: -32: Always select a 3G cell if possible
1: -28: -28 dB
2: -24: -24 dB
3: -20: -20 dB
4: -16: -16 dB
5: -12: -12 dB
6: -8: -8 dB
7: -4: -4 dB
8: 0: 0 dB
9: 4: 4 dB
10: 8: 8 dB
11: 12: 12 dB
12: 16: 16 dB
13: 20: 20 dB
14: 24: 24 dB
15: 28: 28 dB
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dB -32 28 -32
External Comment This parameter is broadcast on PBCCH if there is a PBCCH allocated

in the serving cell.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1253 / 1278

10.2.14 (FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING) - (FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING)
Parameter Name HMI Name FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING
Logical Name FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING
Definition Number of the strongest 3G cells to be reported by the MS in the

measurement report message
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
None 0 3 2
External Comment This parameter is meaningful only if EN_3G_HO is set to enabled. If

disabled, this parameter is considered as equal to zero (the MS shall
report only 2G cells).
This parameter is broadcast on SACCH.
1254 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.15 (FDD_Qmin) - (FDD_Qmin(BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name FDD_Qmin
Logical Name FDD_Qmin(BSC)
Definition Minimum threshold for Ec/Io for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection.
Coding rules 0 = -20 dB

1 = -6 dB
2 = -18 dB
3 = -8dB
4 = -16dB
5 = -10dB
6 = -14dB
7 = -12dB
Mandatory rules Equal to FDD_Qmin(MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -20 -6 -12
External Comment This parameter is broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is a

PBCCH allocated in the serving cell.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1255 / 1278

10.2.16 (FDD_Qmin_Offset) - (FDD_Qmin_Offset)
Parameter Name HMI Name FDD_Qmin_Offset
Logical Name FDD_Qmin_Offset
Definition Applies an offset to FDD_Qmin value
Coding rules coded on 3 bits:

0 = 0 dB,
1 = 2 dB,
2 = 4 dB,
3 = 6 dB,
4 = 8 dB,
5 = 10 dB,
6 = 12 dB,
7 = 14 dB.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB 0 14 0
External Comment Available only if EN_CPICH_2G_3G_Reselection = 1
1256 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.17 (FDD_Qoffset) - (FDD_Qoffset (BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name FDD_Qoffset
Logical Name FDD_Qoffset (BSC)
the neighbour GSM cells for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection.
1: -28: -28 dB
2: -24: -24 dB
3: -20: -20 dB
4: -16: -16 dB
5: -12: -12 dB
6: -8: -8 dB
7: -4: -4 dB
8: 0: 0 dB
9: 4: 4 dB
10: 8: 8 dB
11: 12: 12 dB
12: 16: 16 dB
13: 20: 20 dB
14: 24: 24 dB
15: 28: 28 dB
Mandatory rules Equal to FDD_Qoffset(MFS)
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -32 28 -32
External Comment This parameter is broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is a

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1257 / 1278

10.2.18 (FDD_RSCPmin) - (FDD_RSCPmin)
Parameter Name HMI Name FDD_RSCPmin
Logical Name FDD_RSCPmin
Definition Minimum threshold of RSCP for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection.
Coding rules coded on 4bits:

0 = -114 dBm,
1 = -112 dBm,
2 = -110 dBm,
3 = -108 dBm,
4 = -106 dBm,
5 = -104 dBm,
6 = -102 dBm,
7 = -100 dBm,
8 = -98 dBm,
9 = -96 dBm,
10 = -94 dBm,
11 = -92 dBm,
12 = -90 dBm,
13 = -88 dBm,
14 = -86 dBm,
15 = -84 dBm.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -114 -84 -102
External Comment Available only if EN_CPICH_2G_3G_Reselection=1
1258 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.19 (LAC_3G) - (LAC_3G)
Parameter Name HMI Name LAC_3G
Logical Name LAC_3G
Definition This parameter indicates the Location Area Code of an external

3G (FDD or TDD) cell, as defined in 3GPP TS 24.008 (in the
HANDOVER COMMAND message on A interface).
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance 3G cell
None 0 65535 None
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1259 / 1278

10.2.20 (Mobile Country Code (MCC) for 3G cell) - (MCC_3G)
Parameter Name HMI Name Mobile Country Code (MCC) for 3G cell
Logical Name MCC_3G
Definition Mobile Country Code of a neighbour external 3G cell (FDD or TDD)

of the own or of a foreign PLMN.
Mandatory rules - The MCC_3G is computed by the OMC-R as a function of the

PLMN id selected by the operator.
- (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, Local-3G-Cell-Identity) shall together
uniquely identify a 3G cell inside the OMC.
- (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall together
uniquely identify a 3G cell.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance 3G cell
None 0 999 None
1260 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.21 (Mobile Network Code (MNC) for 3G cell) - (MNC_3G)
Parameter Name HMI Name Mobile Network Code (MNC) for 3G cell
Logical Name MNC_3G
Definition Mobile Network Code of a neighbour external 3G cell (FDD or TDD)

of the own PLMN or of a foreign PLMN.
Mandatory rules - The MNC_3G is computed by the OMC-R as a function of the

PLMN id selected by the operator.
- (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, Local-3G-Cell-Identity) shall together
uniquely identify a 3G cell inside the OMC.
- (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall together
uniquely identify a 3G cell.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Reference
SubSystem BSC
Instance 3G cell
None 0 999 None
External Comment The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC in the CDE table.
binary coded 1111)
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1261 / 1278

10.2.22 (Qsearch_C) - (Qsearch_C)
Parameter Name HMI Name Qsearch_C
Logical Name Qsearch_C
Definition Threshold for searching for 3G cells in dedicated mode depending

whether the received signal level of the serving cell is below or above
the threshold.
0: -98: -98 dBm (below)
1: -94: -94 dBm (below)
2: -90: -90dBm (below)
3: -86: -86dBm (below)
4: -82: -82 dBm (below)
5: -78: -78 dBm (below)
6: -74: -74 dBm (below)
7: -70: Always search for 3G neighbour cells
8: -78: -78 dBm (above)
9: -74: -74 dBm (above)
10: -70: -70 dBm (above)
11: -66: -66 dBm (above)
12: -62: -62 dBm (above)
13: -58: -58 dBm (above)
14: -54: -54 dBm (above)
15: -50: Never search for 3G neighbour cells
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules In a cell where at least one 2G to 3G adjacency has been defined,
Qsearch_C =-70, i.e. always search for 3G neighbour cells
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -98 -50 -70
External Comment This threshold is used to search for 3G cells if the received signal
level is below (-98 dBm to "always search for 3G neighbour cells") or
above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold.
This parameter is broadcast on SACCH
1262 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.23 (Qsearch_I) - (Qsearch_I)
Parameter Name HMI Name Qsearch_I
Logical Name Qsearch_I
Definition Threshold for searching for 3G cells depending whether the received
level average of the
serving cell is below or above the threshold.
0: -98: -98 dBm (below)
1: -94: -94 dBm (below)
2: -90: -90dBm (below)
3: -86: -86dBm (below)
4: -82: -82 dBm (below)
5: -78: -78 dBm (below)
6: -74: -74 dBm (below)
8: -78: -78 dBm (above)
9: -74: -74 dBm (above)
10: -70: -70 dBm (above)
11: -66: -66 dBm (above)
12: -62: -62 dBm (above)
13: -58: -58 dBm (above)
14: -54: -54 dBm (above)
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules In a cell with FDD_ARFCN_list not empty, Qsearch_I =-70, i.e.
always search for 3G neighbour cells
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -98 -50 -50
above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold.
This parameter is broadcast on BCCH
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1263 / 1278

10.2.24 (Qsearch_P) - (Qsearch_P)
Parameter Name HMI Name Qsearch_P
Logical Name Qsearch_P
Definition Threshold for searching for 3G cells in GPRS depending whether

the received level average of the serving cell is below or above the
threshold
0: -98: -98 dBm (below)
1: -94: -94 dBm (below)
2: -90: -90dBm (below)
3: -86: -86dBm (below)
4: -82: -82 dBm (below)
5: -78: -78 dBm (below)
6: -74: -74 dBm (below)
8: -78: -78 dBm (above)
9: -74: -74 dBm (above)
10: -70: -70 dBm (above)
11: -66: -66 dBm (above)
12: -62: -62 dBm (above)
13: -58: -58 dBm (above)
14: -54: -54 dBm (above)
Mandatory rules –
Recommended rules In a cell with FDD_ARFCN_list not empty, Qsearch_P =-70, i.e.
always search for 3G neighbour cells
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dBm -98 -50 -50
above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold
in GPRS.
This parameter is broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is a
1264 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.25 (Qsearch_P_PTM) - (Qsearch_P_PTM)
Parameter Name HMI Name Qsearch_P_PTM
Logical Name Qsearch_P_PTM
Definition Threshold for searching for 3G cells in GPRS packet transfer mode
depending whether the received level average of the serving cell
is below or above the threshold
0: -98: -98 dBm (below)
1: -94: -94 dBm (below)
2: -90: -90dBm (below)
3: -86: -86dBm (below)
4: -82: -82 dBm (below)
5: -78: -78 dBm (below)
6: -74: -74 dBm (below)
8: -78: -78 dBm (above)
9: -74: -74 dBm (above)
10: -70: -70 dBm (above)
11: -66: -66 dBm (above)
12: -62: -62 dBm (above)
13: -58: -58 dBm (above)
14: -54: -54 dBm (above)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem MFS
Instance cell
dBm -98 -50 -50
above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold
in GPRS packet transfer mode.
This parameter is sent in Packet Measurement Order on PACCH.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1265 / 1278

10.2.26 (RAT_3G) - (RAT_3G)
Parameter Name HMI Name RAT_3G
Logical Name RAT_3G
Definition This parameter defines UMTS radio access technology of an external

3G cell.
Coding rules 0: FDD

1: TDD
Mandatory rules A 3G TDD cell can be configured for "(blind) cell reselection" only.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Enumerated
SubSystem BSC
Instance 3G cell
None 0 1 None
1266 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.27 (RNC_ID) - (RNC_ID_3G)
Parameter Name HMI Name RNC_ID
Logical Name RNC_ID_3G
Definition This parameter indicates the RNC Identifier or the Extended RNC
Identifier of an external 3G (FDD or TDD) cell, as defined in 3GPP TS
25.401 (in HO Required message sent to the MSC on A interface).
Coding rules Binary value on 16 bits.
Mandatory rules (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall together

uniquely identify a 3G cel.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance 3G cell
None 0 65535 None
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1267 / 1278

10.2.28 (SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G) - (SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD)
Parameter Name HMI Name SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G
Logical Name SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD
Definition This parameter indicates the Primary Scrambling Code of an external

3G FDD cell, as defined in 3GPP TS 25.213.
Coding rules Binary value on 9 bits.
Mandatory rules - For a given 2G cell, the couple (ARFCN_3G (FDD),

SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD) shall be unique among all the
neighbour 3G FDD cells target for handover (or both).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance 3G cell
None 0 511 None
External Comment - Significant if RAT_3G is FDD

modification.
1268 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.29 (T3121) - (T3121)
Logical Name T3121
Definition This timer is started by sending an INTER SYSTEM TO UTRAN

HANDOVER message to the MS and is normally stopped when the
MS has correctly seized the UTRAN channel(s). Its purpose is to
keep the old channels sufficiently long for the MS to be able to return
to the old channels, and to release the channels if the MS is lost.
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Timer
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSC
sec 0 25.5 14
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1269 / 1278

10.2.30 (TDD_ARFCN_LIST) - (TDD_ARFCN_LIST)
Parameter Name HMI Name TDD_ARFCN_LIST
Logical Name TDD_ARFCN_LIST
Definition List of neighbour Downlink TDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency

Channel Numbers (UARFCNs) of any 3G TDD neighbor cell
(TD-SCDMA), adjacent to the BSS.
Up to 3 TDD UARFCNs can be defined in the list. This list is used for
2G to 3G cell reselection ("blind" search method).
Coding rules The value of -1 is for implementation purpose only; this dummy value
indicates that the operator does not provide any UARFCN.
Mandatory rules - The UARFCNs defined in the list (i.e. not set to 1) shall be different
from each other.
- Only following downlink TDD UARFCN ranges are standardised :
a) 9504-9596 and 10054-10121
b) 9254-9546 and 9654-9946
c) 9554-9646
d) 12854-13096
e) 11504-11996
f) 9404-9596
valid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where
- Configuration of TDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-working
time a valid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell
where both EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled.
Category Site (CAE)
SubSystem BSC
Instance BSS
None 0 16383 None
1270 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

External Comment - The TDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface.
- The TDD UARFCNs of the 3G neighbour cells are broadcast on
BCCH.
- Significant only if EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION is
not disabled
current calls.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1271 / 1278

10.2.31 (TDD_Qoffset) - (TDD_Qoffset)
Parameter Name HMI Name TDD_Qoffset
Logical Name TDD_Qoffset
the neighbour GSM
cells for UTRAN TDD cell re-selection.
1: -28: -28 dB
2: -24: -24 dB
3: -20: -20 dB
4: -16: -16 dB
5: -12: -12 dB
6: -8: -8 dB
7: -4: -4 dB
8: 0: 0 dB
9: 4: 4 dB
10: 8: 8 dB
11: 12: 12 dB
12: 16: 16 dB
13: 20: 20 dB
14: 24: 24 dB
15: 28: 28 dB
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -32 28 -32
External Comment This parameter is broadcast on BCCH.
1272 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.32 (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT) -
(THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT)
Parameter Name HMI Name THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT
Logical Name THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT
Definition Load threshold determining whether a 3G to 2G handover request

shall be rejected in load situation; the feature is deactivated by setting
THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT to its maximum value 100%.
Mandatory rules THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT shall be lower than the 2G load

thresholds HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD or equal to 100%.
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 100
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1273 / 1278

10.2.33 (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ) - (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ)
Parameter Name HMI Name THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ
Logical Name THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ
Definition Load threshold on the serving cell below which handovers towards
3G cells are forbidden when I.E. Service Handover is missing
(whatever EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO value)
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
% 0 100 0
External Comment Value 0 disables the feature.
1274 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10.2.34 (THR_ECNO_HO) - (THR_ECNO_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name THR_ECNO_HO
Logical Name THR_ECNO_HO
Definition Ec/No threshold above which a handover to UTRAN may be triggered
Coding rules step size = 0.5 dB, coded over 6 bits

0: "HO to 3G attempted whatever the Ec/No",
1: -24.0,
2: -23.5,
3: -23,
...,
48: -0.5,
49: 0.0
Mandatory rules –
Category Site (CAE)
Type Threshold
SubSystem BSC
Instance cell
dB -24.5 0 -15
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1275 / 1278

10.2.35 (UARFCN) - (ARFCN_3G(FDD))
Parameter Name HMI Name UARFCN
Logical Name ARFCN_3G(FDD)
Definition Downlink FDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

(UARFCN) of an external 3G FDD cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules - Only the following downlink FDD UARFCN ranges are standardized:
I) 10562-10838 and
II) 9662-9938 and
III) 1162-1513 and
IV) 1537-1738 and
V) 4357-4458 and
VI) 4387-4413 and
VII) 2237- 2563 and
VIII) 2937-3088 and
IX) 9237-9387
X) 3112-3388
XI) 3712-3812
XII) 3837- 3903
XIII) 4017-4043
XIV) 4117-4143
ARFCN_3G (FDD) among all the neighbour 3G FDD cells target for
handover (or both).
ARFCN_3G (FDD) among all the neighbour 3G FDD cells target for
reselection (or both).
- For a given 2G cell, the couple (ARFCN_3G (FDD),
SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD) shall be unique among all the
neighbour 3G FDD cells target for handover (or both).
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance 3G cell
None 0 16383 None
1276 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

External Comment - Significant if RAT_3G is FDD

- The FDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface.
- The FDD UARFCNs of the 3G neighbour cells configured for
reselection (or both) are broadcast on BCCH.
modification.
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1277 / 1278

10.2.36 (UARFCN) - (ARFCN_3G(TDD))
Parameter Name HMI Name UARFCN
Logical Name ARFCN_3G(TDD)
Definition Downlink TDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

(UARFCN) of an external 3G TDD cell.
Coding rules –
Mandatory rules - Only the following downlink UARFCN ranges are standardized:
a) 9504-9596 and 10054-10121
b) 9254- 9546 and 9654-9946
c) 9554-9646
d) 12854-13096
e) 11504-11996
f) 9404-9596
ARFCN_3G (TDD) among all the neighbour 3G TDD cells target for
reselection.
valid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where
Category Site (CAE)
Type Number
SubSystem BSC
Instance 3G cell
None 0 16383 None
External Comment - Significant if RAT_3G is TDD

- The TDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface.
- The TDD UARFCns of the 3G neighbour cells (configured for
reselection) are broadcast on BCCH
modification.
1278 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Alcatel BSS Parameter Dictionary

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alcatel BSS Parameter Dictionary

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alcatel-Lucent GSM

Telecom Parameters Dictionary

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 3 / 1278

4 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

What’s New In Edition 09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 5 / 1278

Assumed Knowledge Not applicable.

6 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 7 / 1278

1.1 Parameter Classification

System: fixed parameters, i.e. BSS system mandatory rules or

1.2 Parameter Description

Definition: definition/purpose of the parameter.

Mandatory rules: Mandatory relationships or inter-dependence of some

Recommended rules: Recommended relationships or inter-dependence

Feature: Indicates to which feature the parameter is linked.

Category: Category into which the parameter is classified.

Modifiable: Indicates if the parameter is modifiable at the OMC-R.

Parameter Access: Indicates where the parameter is accessible at the

External Comments: Specific information, when necessary, related

8 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 9 / 1278

2.1 Site (CAE)

Parameter Name HMI Name CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)

Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)

Category Site (CAE)

Value Unit Minimum Maximum Default

Cell Type Dependent No

10 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Parameter Name HMI Name CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET

Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(BSC)

Definition Permanent offset to C2 criterion.

Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS) =

Category Site (CAE)

Value Unit Minimum Maximum Default

Cell Type Dependent No

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 11 / 1278

2.1.3 (EN_INBAND_NOTIF) - (EN_INBAND_NOTIF)

Parameter Name HMI Name EN_INBAND_NOTIF

Logical Name EN_INBAND_NOTIF

Definition Flag to disable/enable the in-band notification

Coding rules 0: disabled, 1:enabled

Category Site (CAE)

Value Unit Minimum Maximum Default

Cell Type Dependent No

12 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2.1.4 (EN_INBAND_PAGING) - (EN_INBAND_PAGING)

Parameter Name HMI Name EN_INBAND_PAGING

Logical Name EN_INBAND_PAGING

Definition Flag to disable/enable the in-band paging

Coding rules 0: disabled, 1: enabled

Category Site (CAE)

Value Unit Minimum Maximum Default

Cell Type Dependent No

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 13 / 1278

2.1.5 (EN_UPLINK_REPLY) - (EN_UPLINK_REPLY)

Parameter Name HMI Name EN_UPLINK_REPLY

Logical Name EN_UPLINK_REPLY

Definition Flag to disable/enable the uplink reply procedure

Coding rules 0: disabled, 1: enabled